summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/Master/texmf-dist/source
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/source')
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel-french/frenchb.dtx30
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/lt3luabridge/lt3luabridge.dtx87
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/pst-diffraction/Makefile55
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/tex4ht/ChangeLog35
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/tex4ht/tex4ht-4ht.tex52
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/tex4ht/tex4ht-cpright.tex4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/tex4ht/tex4ht-html4.tex20
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/babel.dtx10
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/babel.ins2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/bbcompat.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/locale.zipbin1088254 -> 1089081 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpara.dtx22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltvers.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/colortbl/colortbl.dtx34
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/easybook/easybook.dtx139
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/firstaid/latex2e-first-aid-for-external-files.dtx27
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/lastpage/lastpage.drv13
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/lastpage/lastpage.dtx179
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/lastpage/lastpage.ins20
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/lettrine/lettrine.dtx32
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/lni/lni.dtx103
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/nicematrix/nicematrix-code.dtx225
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/orcidlink/orcidlink.dtx91
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/orcidlink/orcidlink.ins4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/pdfx/pdfx.dtx1536
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/pdfx/pdfx.ins4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/preview/preview.dtx14
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/se2thesis/se2colors.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/se2thesis/se2fonts.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/se2thesis/se2packages.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/se2thesis/se2thesis.dtx12
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/siunitx/siunitx-table.dtx1
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/siunitx/siunitx.dtx2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/sjtutex/sjtutex.dtx31
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/spelatex/spelatex.dtx462
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/texvc/Makefile17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/texvc/texvc.dtx48
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/texvc/texvc.ins84
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/thuthesis/thuthesis.dtx46
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/uantwerpendocs/uantwerpendocs.dtx20
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/ulthese/ulthese.dtx2046
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/ulthese/ulthese.ins43
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/luatex/luamplib/luamplib.dtx542
43 files changed, 3584 insertions, 2518 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel-french/frenchb.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel-french/frenchb.dtx
index 331a0195e04..1ec34d6f5b2 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel-french/frenchb.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel-french/frenchb.dtx
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Please report errors to: <daniel (dot) flipo (at) free (dot) fr>
%<frenchb>\ProvidesLanguage{frenchb}
%<lua>--[[
%<lua> File `frenchb.lua’ generated from frenchb.dtx
- [2024-05-24 v3.6a French support from the babel system]
+ [2024-06-26 v3.6b French support from the babel system]
%<lua> Copyright © 2014-2024 Daniel Flipo
%<lua> <daniel (dot) flipo (at) free (dot) fr>
%<lua> License LPPL: see french.ldf.
@@ -854,7 +854,7 @@ Please report errors to: <daniel (dot) flipo (at) free (dot) fr>
% \subsubsection*{What’s new in version 3.6?}
%
% Version 3.6a no longer loads the \pkg{keyval} package, replaced by
-% core LaTeX commands (\pkg{ltkeys}). The thin space added before
+% core LaTeX commands (\pkg{l3keys}). The thin space added before
% footnote’s calls is now customisable (suggested by Thomas Savary),
% the command’s name is |\FBfnmarkspace|.
%
@@ -1150,11 +1150,6 @@ Please report errors to: <daniel (dot) flipo (at) free (dot) fr>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
-% Check LaTeX2e version (support for \pkg{ltkeys} required).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifLaTeXe \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[2022/06/01] \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
%\begin{macro}{\ifFBunicode}
% \begin{macro}{\ifFBLuaTeX}
% \begin{macro}{\ifFBXeTeX}
@@ -2779,16 +2774,22 @@ return french_punctuation
% active punctuation characters (if any).
% It is engine independent (works for TeX, LuaTeX and
% XeTeX based engines) and is meant to be used inside a group.
+% The faked definition of |\texorpdfstring| will be overwritten
+% by \file{hyperref.sty}.
%
% \changes{v3.2b}{2016/04/18}{\cs{NoAutoSpacing} made robust.}
%
% \changes{v3.2c}{2016/05/14}{New definition based on
% \cs{FB@spacing@off} common to all engines.}
%
+% \changes{v3.6b}{2024/06/25}{\cs{NoAutoSpacing} must be inhibited
+% in bookmarks.}
+%
% \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand\texorpdfstring[2]{#1}
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\NoAutoSpacing}{%
- \FB@spacing@off
- \ifFB@active@punct\shorthandoff{;:!?}\fi
+ \texorpdfstring{\FB@spacing@off
+ \ifFB@active@punct\shorthandoff{;:!?}\fi}{}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
@@ -2860,7 +2861,6 @@ return french_punctuation
%
% |\FB@og| and |\FB@fg| are now designed to work in bookmarks.
% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\texorpdfstring[2]{#1}
\newcommand*{\FB@og}{\texorpdfstring{\@FB@og}{\guillemotleft\space}}
\newcommand*{\FB@fg}{\texorpdfstring{\@FB@fg}{\space\guillemotright}}
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -4264,7 +4264,7 @@ return french_punctuation
}
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% \subsection{Setup options: key/value stuff (ltkeys)}
+% \subsection{Setup options: key/value stuff (l3keys)}
% \label{ssec-keyval}
%
% \changes{v2.0}{2006/11/06}{New command \cs{frenchbsetup} added
@@ -4274,11 +4274,15 @@ return french_punctuation
% reorganised, now \cs{babel@save} and\cs{babel@savevariable} are
% usable for French.}
%
-% \changes{v3.6a}{2024/05/16}{Internal `ltkeys’ replaces package
+% \changes{v3.6a}{2024/05/16}{Internal `l3keys’ replaces package
% `keyval’ for options’ management.}
%
+% Check LaTeX2e version (support for \pkg{l3keys} required).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[2022-06-01]
+% \end{macrocode}
% All setup options are handled by command \fbsetup{} based on
-% the \file{ltkeys}’ |\SetKeys{}| command. A list of flags is
+% the \file{l3keys}’ |\SetKeys{}| command. A list of flags is
% defined beforehand and set to default values which will possibly
% be changed `AtEndOfPackage’ in case French is the main language.
% After this, \fbsetup{} eventually modifies the preset values of
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/lt3luabridge/lt3luabridge.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/lt3luabridge/lt3luabridge.dtx
index 67cc73c7387..d8bb7a3beec 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/lt3luabridge/lt3luabridge.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/lt3luabridge/lt3luabridge.dtx
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@
% }^^A
% }
%
-% \date{Released 2024-02-14}
+% \date{Released 2024-07-03}
%
% \maketitle
%
@@ -151,7 +151,7 @@
% \texttt{-output-directory} parameter of the \TeX{} engine.
% \end{variable}
%
-% \begin{variable}[added = 2022-06-26]{\c_luabridge_default_output_dirname_str}
+% \begin{variable}[added = 2022-06-26, updated = 2024-07-03]{\c_luabridge_default_output_dirname_str}
% This constant is the default value of \cs{g_luabridge_output_dirname_str}.
% \end{variable}
%
@@ -261,9 +261,42 @@
=
{ \c_luabridge_method_shell_int }
{
- \str_const:Nn
- \c_luabridge_default_output_dirname_str
- { . }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Instead of assuming the current working directory as the output directory,
+% try to determine the output directory from the environmental variable
+% \texttt{TEXMF_OUTPUT_DIRECTORY}, which is automatically defined by \TeX{}
+% engines and accessible from child processes.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \sys_if_platform_unix:TF
+ {
+ \str_const:Nn
+ \c_luabridge_default_output_dirname_str
+ { $TEXMF_OUTPUT_DIRECTORY }
+ }
+ {
+ \sys_if_platform_windows:TF
+ {
+ \str_set:Nn
+ \l_tmpa_str
+ { TEXMF_OUTPUT_DIRECTORY }
+ \str_put_left:NV
+ \l_tmpa_str
+ \c_percent_str
+ \str_put_right:NV
+ \l_tmpa_str
+ \c_percent_str
+ \str_const:NV
+ \c_luabridge_default_output_dirname_str
+ \l_tmpa_str
+ }
+ {
+ \str_const:Nn
+ \c_luabridge_default_output_dirname_str
+ { . }
+ }
+ }
\str_const:Nx
\c_luabridge_default_helper_script_filename_str
{ \jobname.luabridge.lua }
@@ -358,9 +391,43 @@
\g_luabridge_helper_script_filename_str
\sys_get_shell:xnNTF
{
- texlua~
- \g_luabridge_output_dirname_str /
- \g_luabridge_helper_script_filename_str
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% If the environmental variable \texttt{TEXMF_OUTPUT_DIRECTORY} is undefined,
+% use the current working directory (\texttt{.}) instead.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \str_if_eq:NNTF
+ \g_luabridge_output_dirname_str
+ \c_luabridge_default_output_dirname_str
+ {
+ \sys_if_platform_windows:TF
+ {
+ if~not~defined~TEXMF_OUTPUT_DIRECTORY~(
+ texlua~
+ \g_luabridge_helper_script_filename_str
+ )~else~(
+ texlua~
+ \g_luabridge_output_dirname_str /
+ \g_luabridge_helper_script_filename_str
+ )
+ }
+ {
+ \sys_if_platform_unix:T
+ {
+ TEXMF_OUTPUT_DIRECTORY =
+ ${TEXMF_OUTPUT_DIRECTORY:-.} \iow_newline:
+ }
+ texlua~
+ \g_luabridge_output_dirname_str /
+ \g_luabridge_helper_script_filename_str
+ }
+ }
+ {
+ texlua~
+ \g_luabridge_output_dirname_str /
+ \g_luabridge_helper_script_filename_str
+ }
}
{ }
#1
@@ -492,8 +559,8 @@
\RequirePackage{expl3}
\ProvidesExplPackage
{lt3luabridge}%
- {2024-02-14}%
- {2.1.0}%
+ {2024-07-03}%
+ {2.2.0}%
{An expl3 package that allows you to execute Lua code in LuaTeX or any other
TeX engine that exposes the shell}
\input lt3luabridge\relax
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/pst-diffraction/Makefile b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/pst-diffraction/Makefile
deleted file mode 100644
index 1d4650b7c1b..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/pst-diffraction/Makefile
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
-# `Makefile' for `pst-diffraction.pdf', hv, 2007/03/17
-
-.SUFFIXES : .tex .ltx .dvi .ps .pdf .eps
-
-PACKAGE = pst-diffraction
-
-LATEX = latex
-
-ARCHNAME = $(PACKAGE)-$(shell date +%y%m%d)
-ARCHFILES = $(PACKAGE).sty *.tex $(PACKAGE).pro *.tex README Changes Makefile
-
-all : DE E FR clean
-
-DE : $(PACKAGE)-docDE.pdf
-E : $(PACKAGE)-docE.pdf
-FR : $(PACKAGE)-docFR.pdf
-
-doc : $(MAIN).pdf
-
-%.pdf : %.ps
- GS_OPTIONS=-dAutoRotatePages=/None ps2pdf $<
-
-%.ps : %.dvi
- dvips $<
-
-%.dvi : %.tex
- $(LATEX) $<
- $(LATEX) $<
- if ! test -f $(basename $<).glo ; then touch $(basename $<).glo; fi
- if ! test -f $(basename $<).idx ; then touch $(basename $<).idx; fi
- makeindex -s gglo.ist -t $(basename $<).glg -o $(basename $<).gls \
- $(basename $<).glo
- makeindex -t $(basename $<).ilg -o $(basename $<).ind \
- $(basename $<).idx
- bibtex $(basename $<)
- $(LATEX) $<
- $(LATEX) $<
-
-clean :
- $(RM) $(addprefix $(PACKAGE)-docDE, .log .aux .glg .glo .gls .ilg .idx .ind .tmp .toc .out .blg .Roessler .bbl )
- $(RM) $(addprefix $(PACKAGE)-docDE, .dvi .ps)
- $(RM) $(addprefix $(PACKAGE)-docE, .log .aux .glg .glo .gls .ilg .idx .ind .tmp .toc .out .blg .Roessler .bbl )
- $(RM) $(addprefix $(PACKAGE)-docE, .dvi .ps)
- $(RM) $(addprefix $(PACKAGE)-docFR, .log .aux .glg .glo .gls .ilg .idx .ind .tmp .toc .out .blg .Roessler .bbl )
- $(RM) $(addprefix $(PACKAGE)-docFR, .dvi .ps)
-
-veryclean : clean
- $(RM) $(addprefix $(PACKAGE)-docDE, .pdf .bbl .blg)
- $(RM) $(addprefix $(PACKAGE)-docE, .pdf .bbl .blg)
- $(RM) $(addprefix $(PACKAGE)-docFR, .pdf .bbl .blg)
-
-arch :
- zip $(ARCHNAME).zip $(ARCHFILES)
-
-# EOF
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/tex4ht/ChangeLog b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/tex4ht/ChangeLog
index dd7c62fc27e..6bf8ba7fcef 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/tex4ht/ChangeLog
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/tex4ht/ChangeLog
@@ -1,8 +1,41 @@
+2024-07-06 Michal Hoftich <michal.h21@gmail.com>
+
+ * tex4ht-html4.tex (html4.4ht): added itemize+ option. It will keep
+ original characters for itemize bullets.
+ https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/722062/2891
+
+2024-07-03 Michal Hoftich <michal.h21@gmail.com>
+
+ * tex4ht-4ht.tex (fontawesome5.4ht): use icon name as the alt text.
+
+2024-06-21 Michal Hoftich <michal.h21@gmail.com>
+
+ * tex4ht-4ht.tex (arydshln.4ht): fixed clash between Colortbl and
+ Arydshln packages.
+ https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/721185/2891
+
+2024-06-23 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * tex4ht-cpright.tex: https for urls.
+
+2024-06-21 Michal Hoftich <michal.h21@gmail.com>
+
+ * tex4ht-html4.tex (html4.4ht): don't use picture name as alt in
+ \epsfbox, it can lead to spurious characters in the resulting HTML.
+ Thanks to Rolf Brigola
+
+2024-06-20 Michal Hoftich <michal.h21@gmail.com>
+
+ * tex4ht-4ht.tex (footmisc.4ht): fixed handling of footnote counter
+ reset.
+ https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/720989/2891
+
+
2024-06-17 Michal Hoftich <michal.h21@gmail.com>
* tex4ht-4ht.tex (tabularray.4ht): updated names of token lists that
holds rowspan and colspan.
- https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/720800/2891
+ https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/720800/2891
2024-06-15 Michal Hoftich <michal.h21@gmail.com>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/tex4ht/tex4ht-4ht.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/tex4ht/tex4ht-4ht.tex
index 0fd6e45cbaa..f3617f37572 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/tex4ht/tex4ht-4ht.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/tex4ht/tex4ht-4ht.tex
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-% $Id: tex4ht-4ht.tex 1531 2024-06-17 19:40:15Z michal_h21 $
+% $Id: tex4ht-4ht.tex 1536 2024-07-03 12:08:13Z michal_h21 $
% tex tex4ht-4ht or ht tex tex4ht-4ht
%
% Copyright 2009-2024 TeX Users Group
@@ -4265,18 +4265,19 @@ icons to pictures by TeX4ht conversion.
\<fontawesome5.4ht\><<<
% fontawesome5.4ht (|version), generated from |jobname.tex
-% Copyright 2021 TeX Users Group
+% Copyright 2021-2024 TeX Users Group
|<TeX4ht license text|>
\NewConfigure{fontawesome}{2}
\ExplSyntaxOn
\cs_new_protected:Nn\temp:nn{%
+\def\:fontawesomeicon{#2}% to be used in the alt text
\a:fontawesome%
\o:fontawesome_use_icon:nn:{#1}{#2}
\b:fontawesome}
\HLet\fontawesome_use_icon:nn\temp:nn
\ExplSyntaxOff
-\Configure{fontawesome}{\Picture+{}}{\EndPicture}
+\Configure{fontawesome}{\Picture+[icon: \:fontawesomeicon]{}}{\EndPicture}
\Hinput{fontawesome5}
\endinput
>>> \AddFile{9}{fontawesome5}
@@ -11225,12 +11226,13 @@ compilation errors
\<arydshln.4ht\><<<
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
% arydshln.4ht (|version), generated from |jobname.tex
-% Copyright 2022 TeX Users Group
+% Copyright 2022-2024 TeX Users Group
|<TeX4ht license text|>
% this is a copy of code that arydshln inserts to \@array
\def\:new:array{\adl@everyvbox\everyvbox
\everyvbox{\adl@arrayinit \the\adl@everyvbox \everyvbox\adl@everyvbox}%
- \ifadl@inactive \adl@inactivate \else \adl@activate \fi
+ % this line may lead to errors if the document uses Colortbl:
+ % \ifadl@inactive \adl@inactivate \else \adl@activate \fi
\let\adl@noalign\noalign}
\ifcsname n:@array:\endcsname% if \@array was already patched by TeX4ht
\let\orig:n@array\n:@array:
@@ -37900,9 +37902,39 @@ Use
\<footmisc.4ht\><<<
% footmisc.4ht (|version), generated from |jobname.tex
-% Copyright 2019 TeX Users Group
+% Copyright 2019-2024 TeX Users Group
|<TeX4ht license text|>
+|<footmisc footnote counter|>
+|<footmisc footnotetext|>
+|<footmisc symbols|>
+
+
+\Hinput{footmisc}
+\endinput
+>>> \AddFile{9}{footmisc}
+
+Footmisc can reset the normal footnote counter on every page. Footnote links are
+then wrong, as they point to an earlier footnote. My solution is to use a global
+counter that gives each footnote unique number and which doesn't rely on the footnote
+symbol.
+
+\<footmisc footnote counter\><<<
+\newcounter{:footnotes}
+
+\def\FNnum{\the\:footnotes}
+\HRestore\footnote
+
+\def\:tempc{%
+ \HAssign\FNnum = \csname c@:footnotes\endcsname%
+ \stepcounter{:footnotes}%
+ \HAdvance\FNnum by 1%
+ \o:footnote:%
+}
+\HLet\footnote=\:tempc
+>>>
+
+\<footmisc footnotetext\><<<
\long\def\@footnotetext#1{\leavevmode
\vbox{%\IgnorePar
\leftskip0pt {\ht:everypar{}\parindent0pt\leavevmode}%
@@ -37921,6 +37953,9 @@ Use
\color@endgroup
\ht:special{t4ht@[}}\ht:special{t4ht@]}}
+>>>
+
+\<footmisc symbols\><<<
% detect if the symbol or symbol* option were used
% we can detect that by testing of \thefootnote macro
@@ -37937,10 +37972,7 @@ Use
\newcommand\p@footmisc@footnote[1]{\p@footnote{#1}}
\fi
\fi
-
-\Hinput{footmisc}
-\endinput
->>> \AddFile{9}{footmisc}
+>>>
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\Section{tablefootnote}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/tex4ht/tex4ht-cpright.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/tex4ht/tex4ht-cpright.tex
index 35276909217..c15155fcc57 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/tex4ht/tex4ht-cpright.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/tex4ht/tex4ht-cpright.tex
@@ -4,14 +4,14 @@
% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
% version 1.3c of this license or (at your option) any
% later version. The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions
% of LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
%
% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%
% The Current Maintainer of this work
-% is the TeX4ht Project <http://tug.org/tex4ht>.
+% is the TeX4ht Project <https://tug.org/tex4ht>.
%
% If you modify this program, changing the
% version identification would be appreciated.>>>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/tex4ht/tex4ht-html4.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/tex4ht/tex4ht-html4.tex
index a2f3a577811..13bf280c884 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/tex4ht/tex4ht-html4.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/tex4ht/tex4ht-html4.tex
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-% $Id: tex4ht-html4.tex 1526 2024-05-28 19:03:35Z michal_h21 $
+% $Id: tex4ht-html4.tex 1537 2024-07-06 19:48:42Z michal_h21 $
% Compile 4 times: latex tex4ht-html4
% Copy html4.4ht into the work directory before all but the last compilation.
%
@@ -2950,6 +2950,22 @@ such a case, we don't have proper nestings of environments.
\EndP\HCode{</li></ul>}\ShowPar}
{\end:itm \global\def\end:itm{\EndP\Tg</li>}\DeleteMark}
{\HCode{<li class="\getClass{li}itemize">}\afterGetClass{li}|<list par|>}
+
+\:CheckOption{itemize+}\if:Option
+\ConfigureList{itemize}%
+ {\EndP\HCode{<ul \a:LRdir
+ class="\getClass{itemize}itemize\expandafter\the
+ \csname @itemdepth\endcsname">}%
+ \afterGetClass{itemize}%
+ |<save end:itm|>\global\let\end:itm=\empty}
+ {|<recall end:itm|>\ifvmode \IgnorePar\fi
+ \EndP\HCode{</li></ul>}\ShowPar}
+ {\end:itm \global\def\end:itm{\EndP\Tg</li>}\HCode{<li class="\getClass{li}itemize"><span class="itemizeHead" aria-hidden="true">}\afterGetClass{li}}
+ {\HCode{</span>}|<list par|>}
+\Css{.itemizeHead{float: left; margin-left: -1em; width: 1em;}}
+\Css{li.itemize{list-style: none;}}
+\fi
+
\NewConfigure{itemizeClass}{2}
\Configure{itemizeClass}{}{}
\NewConfigure{liClass}{2}
@@ -13824,7 +13840,7 @@ for margin pars.
\<configure html4 epsf\><<<
\Configure{epsfsetgraph}
- {\Picture+[\PicName]{}}
+ {\Picture+[]{}}
{\EndPicture}
>>>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/babel.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/babel.dtx
index 6b6da6ed7cf..19db3457599 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/babel.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/babel.dtx
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@
%
% \iffalse
%<*filedriver>
-\ProvidesFile{babel.dtx}[2024/06/02 v24.6 The Babel package]
+\ProvidesFile{babel.dtx}[2024/06/26 v24.7 The Babel package]
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\GetFileInfo{babel.dtx}
\usepackage{fontspec}
@@ -5479,8 +5479,8 @@ wouldn’t exist.
% \section{Tools}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
-%<<version=24.6>>
-%<<date=2024/06/02>>
+%<<version=24.7>>
+%<<date=2024/06/26>>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \textbf{Do not use the following macros in \texttt{ldf} files. They
@@ -15351,8 +15351,8 @@ end
}}}&%
\bbl@foreach\babeltempb{&%
\bbl@forkv{{##1}}{&%
- \in@{,####1,}{,nil,step,data,remove,insert,string,no,pre,&%
- no,post,penalty,kashida,space,spacefactor,kern,node,after,}&%
+ \in@{,####1,}{,nil,step,data,remove,insert,string,no,pre,no,&%
+ post,penalty,kashida,space,spacefactor,kern,node,after,norule,}&%
\ifin@\else
\bbl@error{bad-transform-option}{####1}{}{}&%
\fi}}&%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/babel.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/babel.ins
index 70cf2a0be70..9c640a94cbe 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/babel.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/babel.ins
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
%%
-\def\filedate{2024/06/02}
+\def\filedate{2024/06/26}
\def\batchfile{babel.ins}
\input docstrip.tex
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/bbcompat.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/bbcompat.dtx
index e4d9db47084..d88b690b23a 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/bbcompat.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/bbcompat.dtx
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@
%
% \iffalse
%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{bbcompat.dtx}[2024/06/02 v24.6]
+\ProvidesFile{bbcompat.dtx}[2024/06/26 v24.7]
%</dtx>
%
%% File 'bbcompat.dtx'
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/locale.zip b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/locale.zip
index 10907ced5ca..f351a76a957 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/locale.zip
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/locale.zip
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpara.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpara.dtx
index f102d68e0d6..b9158564622 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpara.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpara.dtx
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@
%<*driver>
% \fi
\ProvidesFile{ltpara.dtx}
- [2024/05/16 v1.0m LaTeX Kernel (paragraph hooks)]
+ [2024/06/23 v1.0n LaTeX Kernel (paragraph hooks)]
% \iffalse
%
\documentclass{l3doc}
@@ -819,6 +819,18 @@
\@@_handle_indent:
% \the \everypar % <--- done differently below
}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{2024/06/23}
+% {Append \cs{everypar} toks to \cs{g_@@_standard_everypar_tl},
+% rollback 2023/06/01 (gh/1386)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<latexrelease>\cs_set:Npn \@@_tmp:w #1#2#3#4#5 { }
+%<latexrelease>\tl_gput_right:Nx \g_@@_standard_everypar_tl {
+%<latexrelease> \exp_not:N \the
+%<latexrelease> \exp_not:N \toks
+%<latexrelease> \exp_after:wN \@@_tmp:w \token_to_meaning:N \everypar
+%<latexrelease> \c_space_tl
+%<latexrelease>}
%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01}
%<latexrelease> {\g_@@_standard_everypar_tl}{minipage~ fix}
@@ -917,10 +929,10 @@
% the paragraph text starts.
% \begin{macrocode}
\tl_gput_right:Nx \g_@@_standard_everypar_tl {
- \exp_not:N \the
- \exp_not:N \toks
- \the \allocationnumber
- \c_space_tl
+ \exp_not:N \the
+ \exp_not:N \toks
+ \the \allocationnumber
+ \c_space_tl
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltvers.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltvers.dtx
index 557b7b4878b..15e662d843c 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltvers.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltvers.dtx
@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@
{2024-06-01}
%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
%<*2ekernel>
-\def\patch@level{1}
+\def\patch@level{2}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\development@branch@name}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/colortbl/colortbl.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/colortbl/colortbl.dtx
index 076c69643a1..8e5f1e8be18 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/colortbl/colortbl.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/colortbl/colortbl.dtx
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
%<driver>\ProvidesFile{colortbl.drv}
% \fi
% \ProvidesFile{colortbl.dtx}
- [2024/05/26 v1.0h Color table columns (DPC)]
+ [2024/07/06 v1.0i Color table columns (DPC)]
%
% \iffalse
%<*driver>
@@ -1505,9 +1505,21 @@
%
%
% longtable support.
+% \changes{v1.0i}{2024/07/06}{tagging code adjusments for longtable hline}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ExplSyntaxOn
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Stub tag support if tagging has not been enabled.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_if_exist:NF\tag_mc_begin:n{
+ \cs_new:Npn\tag_mc_begin:n#1{}
+ \cs_new:Npn\tag_mc_end:{}
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
% \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{
- \ifx\longtable\@undefined\else
\def\LT@@hline{%
\ifx\LT@next\hline
\global\let\LT@next\@gobble
@@ -1517,7 +1529,10 @@
\else
\gdef\CT@LT@sep{%
\multispan\LT@cols{%
- \CT@drsc@\leaders\hrule\@height\doublerulesep\hfill}\cr}%
+ \tag_mc_begin:n{artifact}
+ \CT@drsc@\leaders\hrule\@height\doublerulesep\hfill
+ \tag_mc_end: \int_gdecr:N \g__tbl_row_int
+ }\cr}%
\fi
\else
\global\let\LT@next\empty
@@ -1526,13 +1541,20 @@
\fi
\ifnum0=`{\fi}%
\multispan\LT@cols
- {\CT@arc@\leaders\hrule\@height\arrayrulewidth\hfill}\cr
+ {\tag_mc_begin:n{artifact}
+ \CT@arc@\leaders\hrule\@height\arrayrulewidth\hfill
+ \tag_mc_end: \int_gdecr:N \g__tbl_row_int
+ }\cr
\CT@LT@sep
\multispan\LT@cols
- {\CT@arc@\leaders\hrule\@height\arrayrulewidth\hfill}\cr
+ {\tag_mc_begin:n{artifact}
+ \CT@arc@\leaders\hrule\@height\arrayrulewidth\hfill
+ \tag_mc_end: \int_gdecr:N \g__tbl_row_int
+ }\cr
\noalign{\penalty\@M}%
\LT@next}
- \fi}
+ }
+\ExplSyntaxOff
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/easybook/easybook.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/easybook/easybook.dtx
index 8bdec3e16d8..4f7a85fc704 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/easybook/easybook.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/easybook/easybook.dtx
@@ -14,13 +14,13 @@
% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
%<class|package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[2021/11/15]
%<*class>
-\ProvidesExplClass{easybook}{2024/06/20}{2024cg}
+\ProvidesExplClass{easybook}{2024/07/06}{2024co}
{Easily typesetting Chinese theses or books}
\bool_new:N \l__eb_compile_draft_bool
\bool_new:N \l__eb_title_newline_bool
-\bool_set_true:N \l__eb_class_mode_book_bool
-\clist_new:N \g__eb_doc_options_clist
+\bool_set_true:N \l__eb_class_mode_book_bool
+\clist_new:N \g__eb_doc_options_clist
\cs_new_protected:Npn \eb_put_ctexbook:n #1
{ \PassOptionsToClass{#1}{ctexbook} }
\cs_generate_variant:Nn \eb_put_ctexbook:n { V }
@@ -66,10 +66,11 @@
\sys_if_engine_xetex:TF
{
- \cs_new_eq:NN \eb_set_family:nnn \xeCJK_set_family:nnn
+ \cs_new_eq:NN \eb_set_family:nnn \xeCJK_set_family:nnn
\cs_new_eq:NN \eb_switch_family:n \xeCJK_switch_family:n
- }{
- \cs_new_eq:NN \eb_set_family:nnn \ctex_ltj_set_family:nnn
+ }
+ {
+ \cs_new_eq:NN \eb_set_family:nnn \ctex_ltj_set_family:nnn
\cs_new_eq:NN \eb_switch_family:n \ctex_ltj_switch_family:n
}
\cs_generate_variant:Nn \eb_set_family:nnn { x }
@@ -300,7 +301,7 @@
%</class>
%<*package>
\RequirePackage{etoolbox}
-\ProvidesExplPackage{easybase}{2024/06/20}{2024cg}
+\ProvidesExplPackage{easybase}{2024/07/06}{2024co}
{Easily typesetting Chinese theses or books}
\cs_generate_variant:Nn \dim_set:Nn { NV }
@@ -382,7 +383,7 @@
}
}
\providecommand{\NewHookWithArguments}[2]{}
-\ProvideDocumentCommand{\AddToHookWithArguments}{mom}{}
+\ProvideDocumentCommand{\AddToHookWithArguments}{mo+m}{}
\bool_set_true:N \l__eb_class_mode_book_bool
\bool_set_false:N \l__eb_compile_draft_bool
@@ -456,7 +457,7 @@
\ctex_define:n { #1 .meta:nn = { ctex/#1 } {##1} }
\cs_new_protected:cpn { eb#1set } ##1 { \ctex_set:nn {#1} {##1} }
}
-\RenewDocumentCommand{\ctexset}{om}
+\RenewDocumentCommand{\ctexset}{o+m}
{
\IfValueTF{#1}
{\ctex_set:nn {#1} {#2}}
@@ -1023,7 +1024,7 @@
{
\noindent
\clist_if_in:NnT \l__eb_footnote_value_clist { flush }
- { \dim_zero:N \fnfirstindent }
+ { \tl_set:Nn \fnfirstindent { 0pt } }
\int_case:nn { \dim_sign:V \fnfirstindent }
{
{ 1 } { \use_i:nnn }
@@ -1421,47 +1422,73 @@
\bool_new:N \l__eb_toc_notitle_bool
\newbool{bitoc}
\cs_new:Npn \ebifbitoc { \ifbool{bitoc} }
+\seq_new:N \l__eb_level_tmpa_seq
+\tl_new:N \l__eb_level_tmpa_tl
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \regex_extract_all:nnN { no }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \keys_define:nn { nx }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \ctex_set:nn { ox }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \eb_toc_extract_level:
+ {
+ \regex_extract_all:noN { \cC. } { \eb@toc@title@level }
+ \l__eb_level_tmpa_seq
+ \seq_get_right:NN \l__eb_level_tmpa_seq \l__eb_level_tmpa_tl
+ \tl_set:Nx \l__eb_level_tmpa_tl
+ {
+ \exp_last_unbraced:No
+ \cs_to_str:N { \l__eb_level_tmpa_tl }
+ }
+ \regex_replace_case_once:nN
+ {
+ { ^bi(.*) } { \1 }
+ { .* } { \0 }
+ }
+ \l__eb_level_tmpa_tl
+ }
\keys_define:nn { eb/tocouter }
{
- level .tl_set:N = \eb@toc@title@level,
- level .initial:n =
+ level .code:n =
+ {
+ \tl_set:Nn \eb@toc@title@level {#1}
+ \eb_toc_extract_level:
+ },
+ level .initial:e =
{
\bool_if:NTF \l__eb_class_mode_book_bool
- { \bichapter* }
- { \bisection* }
+ { \exp_not:N \bichapter* }
+ { \exp_not:N \bisection* }
},
- section .meta:n = { level = \bisection* },
- chapter .meta:n = { level = \bichapter* },
- none .code:n =
+ section .meta:n = { level = \bisection* },
+ chapter .meta:n = { level = \bichapter* },
+ none .code:n =
{
\tl_set:Nn \eb@toc@title@level
{ \par\use_none:nn }
\bool_set_true:N \l__eb_toc_notitle_bool
},
- multoc .int_set:N = \l__eb_toc_columns_int,
- multoc .default:n = 2,
- multoc .initial:n = 1,
+ multoc .int_set:N = \l__eb_toc_columns_int,
+ multoc .default:n = 2,
+ multoc .initial:n = 1,
plan .choice:,
plan .value_required:n = true,
- plan/cn .code:n =
+ plan/cn .code:n =
{
\bool_set_true:N \l__eb_toc_plan_cn_bool
\bool_set_false:N \l__eb_toc_plan_bi_bool
},
- plan/bi .code:n =
+ plan/bi .code:n =
{
\bool_set_false:N \l__eb_toc_plan_cn_bool
\bool_set_true:N \l__eb_toc_plan_bi_bool
},
- plan/both .code:n =
+ plan/both .code:n =
{
\bool_set_true:N \l__eb_toc_plan_cn_bool
\bool_set_true:N \l__eb_toc_plan_bi_bool
},
- plan .initial:n = cn,
- columns .meta:n = { multoc = {#1} },
- title .code:n = \eb_assign_toc_title:n {#1},
- bilist .code:n =
+ plan .initial:n = cn,
+ columns .meta:n = { multoc = {#1} },
+ title .code:n = \eb_assign_toc_title:n {#1},
+ bilist .code:n =
{
\tl_gset:Nn \g__eb_bilist_permute_value_tl {#1}
\str_if_eq:nnTF {#1} { mix }
@@ -1479,12 +1506,16 @@
}
}
},
- name .tl_set:N = \l__eb_print_index_name_tl,
- name .initial:n = \imki@jobname
+ name .tl_set:N = \l__eb_print_index_name_tl,
+ name .initial:n = \imki@jobname,
+ unknown .code:n =
+ {
+ \ctex_set:ox { \l__eb_level_tmpa_tl }
+ { \eb_unknown_kv_handle: }
+ },
+ unknown .default:V = \c_novalue_tl
}
-\bool_if:NTF \l__eb_class_mode_book_bool
- { \keys_define:nn { } { eb/tocouter .inherit:n = ctex/chapter } }
- { \keys_define:nn { } { eb/tocouter .inherit:n = ctex/section } }
+
\NewDocumentCommand{\eb_assign_toc_title:n}
{>{\SplitArgument{1}{,}}m}
{\eb_toc_assign_title_judge:nn #1}
@@ -1540,7 +1571,7 @@
}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \DeclareFloatList #1#2
{
- \exp_args:Nc \DeclareDocumentCommand { listof#1s }{st+o}
+ \exp_args:Nc \DeclareDocumentCommand { listof#1s }{st++o}
{\eb_toc_list_struct_parse:nnnnn {##1} {##2} {##3} {#1} {#2}}
\ctex_define:n
{
@@ -1570,7 +1601,7 @@
bicontentsname .tl_set:N = \bicontentsname,
bicontentsname .initial:n = Contents
}
-\RenewDocumentCommand{\tableofcontents}{st+oD(){}}
+\RenewDocumentCommand{\tableofcontents}{st++o+D(){}}
{
\group_begin:
\tl_set_eq:NN \eb@toc@title \contentsname
@@ -1657,7 +1688,7 @@
{
tocformat = \IfBooleanT{#1}{\contentsmargin{0pt}},
tocindent = 0pt,
- tocrule = \IfBooleanTF{#1}{,~\thecontentspage}{\tocrule{$\cdot$}},
+ tocrule = \IfBooleanTF{#1}{,~\thecontentspage}{\cdottocrule},
toclabel =
{
\bool_if:NTF \l__eb_toc_entry_hang_bool
@@ -1728,7 +1759,7 @@
\eb@register@every@toc@option
}
\RegisterEveryTocOption{tocafter,tocindent,tocrule}
-\NewDocumentCommand{\tocrule}{st-O{0.7pc}d()mO{}}
+\NewDocumentCommand{\tocrule}{st-O{0.6pc}d()mO{}}
{
\normalsize\normalfont
\ttl@row@i[#3]{\IfValueTF{#4}{\scalebox{#4}{#5}}{#5}}#6
@@ -1745,6 +1776,7 @@
}
}
}
+\cs_set:Npn \cdottocrule { \tocrule{\textperiodcentered} }
\ctex_define:nn { toc }
{
lolskip .skip_set:N = \eb@toc@lol@skip,
@@ -1771,8 +1803,7 @@
{
\tl_if_exist:cF { tf@#1 }
{ \iow_new:c { tf@#1 }\iow_open:cn { tf@#1 } { \jobname.#1 } }
- }
- {}
+ }{}
}
\cs_set_eq:NN \eb@starttoc \@starttoc
\cs_set:Npn \@starttoc #1
@@ -1795,9 +1826,18 @@
}
\cs_set_protected:Npn \AllotPartialExt #1#2
{
- \tl_set:cn { ttl@partial#1 } {#2}
- \AddToHookWithArguments{cmd/ttl@writepartial/before}
- {\ttl@topartial{#1}{##1}{##2}}
+ \tl_if_exist:cTF { ttl@partial#1 }
+ { \msg_warning:nnnn { easybase } { repeated-ptoc } {#1} {#2} }
+ {
+ \tl_set:cn { ttl@partial#1 } {#2}
+ \AddToHookWithArguments{cmd/ttl@writepartial/before}[ttl/#1]
+ {\ttl@topartial{#1}{##1}{##2}}
+ }
+ }
+\msg_new:nnn { easybase } { repeated-ptoc }
+ {
+ Local~directory~file~'#2'~of~directory~type~'#1'~is \\
+ repeatedly~allocated.
}
\AllotPartialExt{lol}{pll}
@@ -1823,16 +1863,15 @@
}
\RegisterTitleIfname{toc}
-\cs_set_eq:NN \eb@ctexsetii \ctex_set:nn
\cs_new_protected:Npn \SetTocStyle #1#2#3
{
\cs_set_protected:cpn { eb@toc@style@set@#1@#2 }
- { \eb@ctexsetii{#1}{#3} }
+ { \ctex_set:nn {#1} {#3} }
}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \UseTocStyle #1#2#3
{
\cs_if_exist:cTF { eb@toc@style@set@#1@#2 }
- { \addtocontents{#3}{\@nameuse{eb@toc@style@set@#1@#2}} }
+ { \addtocontents{#3}{\string\csuse{eb@toc@style@set@#1@#2}} }
{ \msg_warning:nnnn { easybase } { undefined-toc-style } {#2} {#1} }
}
\msg_new:nnn { easybase } { undefined-toc-style }
@@ -1851,7 +1890,7 @@
{
tocformat = \addvspace{1pc}\sffamily,
tocindent = 0pt,
- tocrule = \tocrule{$\cdot$}[\bfseries],
+ tocrule = \cdottocrule[\bfseries],
tocline = \CTEXnumberline{#1}#2
},
section =
@@ -1861,8 +1900,8 @@
tocrule =
{
\bool_if:NTF \l__eb_class_mode_book_bool
- { \tocrule{$\cdot$} }
- { \tocrule{$\cdot$}[\bfseries] }
+ { \cdottocrule }
+ { \cdottocrule[\bfseries] }
}
},
subsection =
@@ -2209,9 +2248,9 @@
\RequirePackage{amsthm,thmtools}
\cs_set_eq:NN \eb@declaretheoremstyle@save \declaretheoremstyle
\cs_set_eq:NN \eb@declaretheorem@save \declaretheorem
- \RenewDocumentCommand{\declaretheoremstyle}{O{}mO{}}
+ \RenewDocumentCommand{\declaretheoremstyle}{+O{}m+O{}}
{\eb@declaretheoremstyle@save[#1,#3]{#2}}
- \RenewDocumentCommand{\declaretheorem}{O{}mO{}}
+ \RenewDocumentCommand{\declaretheorem}{+O{}m+O{}}
{
\eb@declaretheorem@save[style = default,#1,#3]{#2}
\settheoremtocline{#2}
@@ -2625,7 +2664,7 @@
}
%</package>
%<*tcolorbox>
-\ProvidesExplFile{eb-tcolorbox.cfg}{2024/06/20}{2024cg}
+\ProvidesExplFile{eb-tcolorbox.cfg}{2024/07/06}{2024co}
{Customization of tcolorbox for easybook}
\cs_set_protected:Npn \addtotcbstyle #1#2
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/firstaid/latex2e-first-aid-for-external-files.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/firstaid/latex2e-first-aid-for-external-files.dtx
index 152737eaf77..5615d3f6976 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/firstaid/latex2e-first-aid-for-external-files.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/firstaid/latex2e-first-aid-for-external-files.dtx
@@ -111,8 +111,8 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\LaTeXFirstAidDate{2024/03/20}
-\def\LaTeXFirstAidVersion{v1.1e}
+\def\LaTeXFirstAidDate{2024/06/25}
+\def\LaTeXFirstAidVersion{v1.1f}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -721,6 +721,29 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
%
+% \subsection{The \pkg{arydshln} package first aid}
+%
+% Making two internal commands robust to avoid expansion while constructing the array preamble.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AddToHook{package/arydshln/after}[firstaid]{%
+ \FirstAidNeededT{arydshln}{sty}{2019/02/21 v1.76 }
+ {%
+% add \protected
+\protected\def\adl@@vlineL#1#2#3#4{\adl@ivline#4\@nil{#1}{#2}%
+ \xdef\adl@colsL{\adl@colsL
+ \@elt{#3}{\number\@tempcnta}{\number\@tempcntb}%
+ {\adl@dashcolor}{\adl@gapcolor}}}%
+\protected\def\adl@@vlineR#1#2#3#4{\adl@ivline#4\@nil{#1}{#2}%
+ \xdef\adl@colsR{%
+ \@elt{#3}{\number\@tempcnta}{\number\@tempcntb}%
+ {\adl@dashcolor}{\adl@gapcolor}%
+ \adl@colsR}}%
+\let\adl@act@@vlineL\adl@@vlineL
+\let\adl@act@@vlineR\adl@@vlineR
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
% \begin{macrocode}
%</kernel>
% \end{macrocode}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/lastpage/lastpage.drv b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/lastpage/lastpage.drv
index 5125a755167..b58b4defae8 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/lastpage/lastpage.drv
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/lastpage/lastpage.drv
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
%% This is a generated file.
%%
%% Project: lastpage
-%% Version: 2024-04-27 v2.1a
+%% Version: 2024-07-07 v2.1c
%% Info: Refers to last page's name
%%
%% Copyright (C) 2010 - 2024 by
@@ -32,10 +32,9 @@
%%
%% This package was invented by Jeffrey P. Goldberg.
%% I thought that a replacement was needed and therefore created the pageslts package,
-%% https://ctan.org/pkg/pageslts
-%% . Nevertheless, for compatibility with existing documents/packages as well as for
-%% the low amount of resources needed by the lastpage package (no new counter!),
-%% I updated this package.
+%% https://ctan.org/pkg/pageslts. Nevertheless, for compatibility with existing
+%% documents/packages as well as for the low amount of resources needed by the
+%% lastpage package (no new counter!), I updated this package.
%% Thanks go to Jeffrey P. Goldberg for allowing me to do this.
%%
%% While this package allows for things like "Page slash thepage{} of slash pageref{LastPage}"
@@ -59,8 +58,8 @@
%%
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[2023-11-01]
\ProvidesFile{lastpage.drv}%
- [2024-04-27 v2.1a Refers to last page's name (HMM)]
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}[2023/03/28]% v2.1j Standard LaTeX documentation class
+ [2024-07-07 v2.1c Refers to last page's name (HMM)]
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}[2024/02/08]% v2.1j Standard LaTeX documentation class
\usepackage{holtxdoc}[2019/12/09]% v0.30 Private additional ltxdoc support (HO)
\hypersetup{%
pdfsubject={Refers to last page's name (HMM; JPG)},%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/lastpage/lastpage.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/lastpage/lastpage.dtx
index 104d6b84187..c447d39cc60 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/lastpage/lastpage.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/lastpage/lastpage.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
% File: lastpage.dtx
-% Version: 2024-04-27 v2.1a
+% Version: 2024-07-07 v2.1c
% Info: Refers to last page's name
%
% Copyright © 2010 - 2024 by
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@
\input docstrip.tex
\Msg{**********************************************************************}
\Msg{* Installation *}
-\Msg{* Package: lastpage 2024-04-27 v2.1a Refers to last page's name (HMM)*}
+\Msg{* Package: lastpage 2024-07-07 v2.1c Refers to last page's name (HMM)*}
\Msg{**********************************************************************}
\keepsilent
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@
This is a generated file.
Project: lastpage
-Version: 2024-04-27 v2.1a
+Version: 2024-07-07 v2.1c
Info: Refers to last page's name
Copyright (C) 2010 - 2024 by
@@ -100,10 +100,9 @@ The Current Maintainer of this work is H.-Martin Muench.
This package was invented by Jeffrey P. Goldberg.
I thought that a replacement was needed and therefore created the pageslts package,
-https://ctan.org/pkg/pageslts
-. Nevertheless, for compatibility with existing documents/packages as well as for
-the low amount of resources needed by the lastpage package (no new counter!),
-I updated this package.
+https://ctan.org/pkg/pageslts. Nevertheless, for compatibility with existing
+documents/packages as well as for the low amount of resources needed by the
+lastpage package (no new counter!), I updated this package.
Thanks go to Jeffrey P. Goldberg for allowing me to do this.
While this package allows for things like "Page slash thepage{} of slash pageref{LastPage}"
@@ -185,8 +184,8 @@ In memoriam
%<*driver>
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[2023-11-01]
\ProvidesFile{lastpage.drv}%
- [2024-04-27 v2.1a Refers to last page's name (HMM)]
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}[2023/03/28]% v2.1j Standard LaTeX documentation class
+ [2024-07-07 v2.1c Refers to last page's name (HMM)]
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}[2024/02/08]% v2.1j Standard LaTeX documentation class
\usepackage{holtxdoc}[2019/12/09]% v0.30 Private additional ltxdoc support (HO)
\hypersetup{%
pdfsubject={Refers to last page's name (HMM; JPG)},%
@@ -234,23 +233,23 @@ In memoriam
% \DoNotIndex{\@auxout,\@evenfoot,\@firstofone,\@firstoftwo,\@ifl@t@r,\@ifpackagelater,\@ifpackageloaded}
% \DoNotIndex{\@ifundefined,\@kernel@reserved@label@data,\@mainaux,\@number,\@oddfoot}
% \DoNotIndex{\addtocounter,\AddToHook,\arabic,\begin}
-% \DoNotIndex{\bigskip,\clearpage,\csname,\documentclass,\EdefUnescapeString,\empty,\end,\endcsname}
-% \DoNotIndex{\enddocument,\ExplSyntaxOff,\ExplSyntaxOn,\fmtversion}
+% \DoNotIndex{\bigskip,\clearpage,\csname,\detokenize,\documentclass,\EdefUnescapeString,\empty,\end}
+% \DoNotIndex{\endcsname,\enddocument,\expanded,\ExplSyntaxOff,\ExplSyntaxOn,\fmtversion}
% \DoNotIndex{\g,\gdef,\here,\hfil,\Hy@temp,\Hy@unicodefalse}
-% \DoNotIndex{\hypersetup,\if@filesw,\if@nobreak,\ifHy@hypertexnames,\ifHy@pageanchor,\ifHy@plainpages}
+% \DoNotIndex{\hypersetup,\if,\if@filesw,\if@nobreak,\ifHy@hypertexnames,\ifHy@pageanchor,\ifHy@plainpages}
% \DoNotIndex{\ifdim,\ifnum,\IfPackageAtLeastTF,\IfPackageLoadedTF,\ifvmode,\ifx,\immediate,\input}
% \DoNotIndex{\label,\lastpage,\lastpage-example.tex,\lastpage.dtx,\lastpage.sty,\lastpagee.sty}
% \DoNotIndex{\lastpageclassic.sty,\lastpagemodern.sty,\LaTeX,\LaTeX-kernel,\listfiles}
-% \DoNotIndex{\makeatletter,\makeatother,\markboth,\mbox,\message,\MessageBreak}
+% \DoNotIndex{\makeatletter,\makeatother,\markboth,\meaning,\mbox,\message,\MessageBreak}
% \DoNotIndex{\NeedsTeXFormat,\newcommand,\newcounter,\newline,\newpage,\nobreak}
% \DoNotIndex{\noindent,\normalsize,\numexpr,\origenddocument,\PackageError,\PackageWarning}
% \DoNotIndex{\PackageWarningNoLine,\pagenumbering,\pageref,\pdfstringdef,\protect,\ProvidesPackage}
% \DoNotIndex{\qquad,\RequirePackage,\section,\ShowHook,\slshape,\smallskip,\space,\test,\textbf}
% \DoNotIndex{\textit,\textquotedblleft,\textquotedblright,\textsf,\texttt,\the,\thepage}
-% \DoNotIndex{\today,\upshape,\url,\usepackage,\value,\verb,\wd,\write}
+% \DoNotIndex{\today,\upshape,\url,\usepackage,\value,\verb,\wd,\write,\xlastpage@rmpage,\xxlastpage@rmpage}
%
% \title{The \xpackage{lastpage} package}
-% \date{2024-04-27 v2.1a}
+% \date{2024-07-07 v2.1c}
% \author{H.-Martin Münch\\\xemail{Martin.Muench at Uni-Bonn.de}\\
% invented by Jeffrey P. Goldberg\\\xemail{jeffrey+news at goldmark.org}}
%
@@ -559,6 +558,18 @@ In memoriam
% but |\lastpage@putlabel| was replaced by |\lastpage@putl@bel|.
% Because \linebreak |\lastpage@putlabel| is no longer called, now there should not be any
% double definitions of the \texttt{lastpage} label.
+%
+% \subsection{\texttt{\textbackslash pagenumbering\{fnsymbol\}}}
+% When using the foot-note-symbols as page numbers,
+% it can be necessary to declare in the document's preamble:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \DeclareTextCommand{\textasteriskcentered}{PD1}{*}
+% \DeclareTextCommand{\textdagger}{PD1}{†}
+% %\DeclareTextCommand{\textdaggerdbl}{PD1}{‡)% seems to neither work nor be necessary
+% \DeclareTextCommand{\textsection}{PD1}{§}
+% \DeclareTextCommand{\textparagraph}{PD1}{¶}
+% \DeclareTextCommand{\textbardbl}{PD1}{‖}
+% \end{verbatim}
% \newpage
%
% \section{Alternatives\label{sec:Alternatives}}
@@ -574,7 +585,7 @@ In memoriam
% \textbf{Note: The current version 2015/12/21 v1.2f of the \pkg{pageslts} package
% has not yet been updated to the new hook mechanism. In special cases (for example }%
% |\pagenumbering{fnsymbol}|\textbf{) the current version of that package combined
-% with a current \LaTeX-format fails. Together with about 80~other packages
+% with a current \LaTeX-format fails. Together with several other packages
% (small to large, public as well as private, some probably obsolete) it is
% in the update queue.}\newline
% The \xpackage{pageslts} package first started as a revision of this
@@ -723,17 +734,17 @@ In memoriam
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*example>
-\documentclass[british]{article}[2023/05/17]% v1.4n Standard LaTeX document class
+\documentclass[british]{article}[2024/02/08]% v1.4n Standard LaTeX document class
\makeatletter
\@ifl@t@r\fmtversion{2022/11/01}{%
\AddToHook{enddocument/afterlastpage}[lastpage]{%
\message{^^JLaTeX Info: Executing hook `enddocument/afterlastpage'.}}%
}{\AtEndDocument{\message{^^JLaTeX Info: Executing hook `AtEndDocument'.}}%
}
-\usepackage[draft]{showkeys}[2023/07/08]% v3.19 Show cite and label keys (DPC, MH)
+\usepackage[draft]{showkeys}[2024/05/23]% v3.21 Show cite and label keys (DPC, MH)
%% Use final instead of draft to hide the keys. %%
\usepackage[pdfpagelabels=true,hyperindex=false]{hyperref}[2024-01-20]% v7.01h
-%% Hypertext links for LaTeX
+\@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{% Hypertext links for LaTeX
\hypersetup{extension=pdf,%
plainpages=false,%
pdflang={en},%
@@ -744,9 +755,8 @@ In memoriam
pdfview=Fit,%
pdfstartview=Fit,%
pdfpagelayout=SinglePage%
-}
-\@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{}{\usepackage{url}[2013/09/16]}% v3.4
-\usepackage{lastpage}[2024/04/27]% v2.1a
+}}{\usepackage{url}[2013/09/16]}% v3.4
+\usepackage{lastpage}[2024/07/07]% v2.1c
\renewcommand{\@evenfoot}{%
\normalsize\slshape \today\hfil \upshape %
page \thepage{} of \pageref{LastPage}}
@@ -758,7 +768,7 @@ In memoriam
\section*{Example for lastpage}
\markboth{Example for lastpage}{Example for lastpage}
This example demonstrates the use of package\newline
-\textsf{lastpage}, v2.1a as of 2024-04-27 (HMM; JPG).\newline
+\textsf{lastpage}, v2.1c as of 2024-07-07 (HMM; JPG).\newline
The package takes no options.\newline
For more details please see the documentation!\newline
@@ -783,7 +793,7 @@ trademark owner. There is no intention of infringement; the
usage is to the benefit of the trademark owner.\newline
\textbf{Tip}: Use \textit{logical page numbers}
-for the display of the pdf (in Adobe Acrobat Reader 2024.002.20687:
+for the display of the pdf (in Adobe Acrobat Reader 2024.002.20895:
Edit $>$ Preferences $>$ Page Display $>$
Page Content and Information: Use logical page numbers)!\newline
@@ -837,8 +847,8 @@ The code does not generally work even without hyperref.
\end{verbatim}
\end{quote}
-\noindent does work, because \verb|\lastpage@lastpage| contains the name
-of the page, \mbox{example:}
+\noindent does work (two compilations needed), because \verb|\lastpage@lastpage|
+contains the name of the page, \mbox{example:}
\begin{verbatim}
Page \thepage{} is (not) page \makeatletter\lastpage@lastpage\makeatother.
\end{verbatim}
@@ -894,7 +904,7 @@ To see the content of the \texttt{enddocument/afterlastpage}-hook
% \DescribeMacro{lastpage.sty}
% We first need to determine whether we are on \TeX~2.09 or \LaTeX2e.\newline
% (That line, which is too long for the documentation, reads:\newline
-% |\def\loadlastpage{\ProvidesPackage{lastpage}[2024/04/27 v2.1a lastpage:|\linebreak
+% |\def\loadlastpage{\ProvidesPackage{lastpage}[2024/07/07 v2.1c lastpage:|\linebreak
% | 2.09 or 2e? (HMM)]\relax\RequirePackage{lastpage2e}}|.)
%
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -902,7 +912,7 @@ To see the content of the \texttt{enddocument/afterlastpage}-hook
%% Part of the "lastpage" package
%% loads either lastpage2.09.sty for TeX 2.09 or lastpage2e.sty for LaTeX 2e
%% with code from https://groups.google.com/g/comp.text.tex/c/-Qmhj1ZI4xM
-\def\loadlastpage{\ProvidesPackage{lastpage}[2024/04/27 v2.1a lastpage: 2.09 or 2e? (HMM)]\relax\RequirePackage{lastpage2e}}
+\def\loadlastpage{\ProvidesPackage{lastpage}[2024/07/07 v2.1c lastpage: 2.09 or 2e? (HMM)]\relax\RequirePackage{lastpage2e}}
\begingroup \expandafter \ifx \csname documentclass\endcsname\relax
\endgroup \expandafter \input{lastpage209.sty}
\else \endgroup \expandafter \loadlastpage
@@ -942,7 +952,7 @@ To see the content of the \texttt{enddocument/afterlastpage}-hook
%<*lastpage2e>
%% Part of the "lastpage" package
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1994/12/01]
-\ProvidesPackage{lastpage2e}[2024/04/27 v2.1a %
+\ProvidesPackage{lastpage2e}[2024/07/07 v2.1c %
Decide which 2e lastpage version to use (HMM)]
\@ifl@t@r\fmtversion{2023/06/01}{\RequirePackage{lastpagemodern}}{%
\RequirePackage{lastpageclassic}}
@@ -957,7 +967,7 @@ To see the content of the \texttt{enddocument/afterlastpage}-hook
%<*lastpageclassic>
%% Part of the "lastpage" package
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1994/12/01]
-\ProvidesPackage{lastpageclassic}[2024/04/27 v2.1a %
+\ProvidesPackage{lastpageclassic}[2024/07/07 v2.1c %
Refers to last page's name (HMM; JPG)]
%% allows for things like "Page \thepage{} of \pageref{LastPage}"
%% to get "Page 7 of 9"
@@ -1375,7 +1385,7 @@ To see the content of the \texttt{enddocument/afterlastpage}-hook
%<*lastpagemodern>
%% Part of the "lastpage" package
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[2023-06-01]
-\ProvidesPackage{lastpagemodern}[2024-04-27 v2.1a %
+\ProvidesPackage{lastpagemodern}[2024-07-07 v2.1c %
Refers to last page's name (HMM; JPG)]
%% allows for things like "Page \thepage{} of \pageref{LastPage}"
%% to get "Page 7 of 9" or "Page VII of IX";
@@ -1463,14 +1473,69 @@ To see the content of the \texttt{enddocument/afterlastpage}-hook
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
+% \begin{macro}{\lastpage@makeHy}
+% Just once we need the page from |\@currentHpage| without any \mbox{\textquotedblleft |page.|\textquotedblright :}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\lastpage@makeHy}{%
+ \gdef\lastpage@Hy{}%
+ \IfPackageLoadedTF{hyperref}{%
+ \ifHy@pageanchor%
+ \@ifundefined{@currentHpage}{%
+ \PackageError{lastpage}{%
+ Kernel command \string\@currentHpage\space is undefined}{%
+ Please contact the lastpage maintainer.}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% |\gdef\lastpage@Hy{}|, but that was already done at the beginning of this command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ }{\xdef\lastpage@Hptest{Doc-Start}%
+ \ifx\lastpage@Hptest\@currentHpage\relax%
+ \gdef\lastpage@Hy{\@currentHpage}%
+ \else%
+ \edef\lastpage@Hptest{\@currentHpage}%
+ \ifx\lastpage@Hptest\empty\relax%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% |\gdef\lastpage@Hy{}|, but that was already done at the beginning of this command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% |\@currentHpage| should be |page.<some number>|, |\lastpage@rmpage| removes the
+% \mbox{\textquotedblleft |page.|\textquotedblright .} Next compilation run,
+% |\lastpage@lastpageHy| gets defined via the \xfile{aux} file.
+% If we arrived at this place, but the definition is still empty,
+% then |\@currentHpage| has some unexpected content.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \gdef\lastpage@Hy{\lastpage@rmpage{\@currentHpage}}%
+ \ifx\lastpage@lastpageHy\empty\relax%
+ \PackageWarningNoLine{lastpage}{%
+ \string\@currentHpage\space is\MessageBreak%
+ \meaning\@currentHpage\MessageBreak%
+ not beginning with "page.",\MessageBreak%
+ \string\lastpage@lastpageHy\space is now let empty.}%
+ \fi%
+ \fi%
+ \fi%
+ }%
+ \fi%
+ }{}%
+ }%
+
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\lastpage@rmpage}
-% Just once we need |\@currentHpage| without the \mbox{\textquotedblleft |page.|\textquotedblright :}
+% |\lastpage@rmpage| removes the \mbox{\textquotedblleft |page.|\textquotedblright.}
+%
% \begin{macrocode}
-%% similar to https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/12811/6865
-\def\lastpage@rmpage#1{\expandafter\lastpage@currentH#1\relax}
-\def\lastpage@currentH#1.#2\relax{#2}
+%% Code provided by David Carlisle at https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/721877
+\def\lastpage@rmpage#1{%
+ \expandafter\xlastpage@rmpage\expanded{#1}\xlastpage@rmpage page.%
+ \xlastpage@rmpage\xxlastpage@rmpage{#1}}
+\def\xlastpage@rmpage #1page.#2\xlastpage@rmpage#3\xxlastpage@rmpage#4{%
+ \if$\detokenize{#1}$#2%\else#4
+ \fi}
% \end{macrocode}
+% |\else#4| means, that it did not start with |page.|, and whatever it is,
+% we cannot use this |#4| for |\lastpage@Hy|.
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\lastpage@putl@bel}
% \indent This command does the writing of the label.
@@ -1529,15 +1594,13 @@ To see the content of the \texttt{enddocument/afterlastpage}-hook
{\@kernel@reserved@label@data}}%
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \pagebreak
% \noindent We also save the values, so that we can later (next rerun) check,
% whether they have been saved in the \xfile{aux} file.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\protected@iwrite\@auxout{}{%
\string\gdef\string\lastpage@lastpage{\thepage}}%
- \gdef\lastpage@Hy{\IfPackageLoadedTF{hyperref}{%
- \ifHy@pageanchor\lastpage@rmpage{\@currentHpage}\fi}{}}%
+ \lastpage@makeHy%
\protected@iwrite\@auxout{}{%
\string\gdef\string\lastpage@lastpageHy{\lastpage@Hy}}%
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -1553,7 +1616,7 @@ To see the content of the \texttt{enddocument/afterlastpage}-hook
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
-%
+%\pagebreak
% \begin{macro}{\lastpage@fileswtest}
% \indent \hspace*{2em}Later it will be determined whether it is allowed to write
% to the \xfile{aux} file. If it was \emph{not} allowed, it is checked
@@ -1679,7 +1742,7 @@ To see the content of the \texttt{enddocument/afterlastpage}-hook
% \begin{description}
% \item[-] \TeX Format \LaTeXe{}: \url{https://www.CTAN.org}
%
-% \item[-] document class \xclass{ltxdoc}, 2023/03/28, v2.1j,
+% \item[-] document class \xclass{ltxdoc}, 2024/02/08, v2.1j,
% \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/ltxdoc}
%
% \item[-] package \xpackage{holtxdoc}, 2019/12/09, v0.30,
@@ -1692,7 +1755,7 @@ To see the content of the \texttt{enddocument/afterlastpage}-hook
% \begin{description}
% \item[-] \TeX, \url{https://www.CTAN.org}
%
-% \item[-] package \xpackage{lastpage}, 2024-04-27, v2.1a,
+% \item[-] package \xpackage{lastpage}, 2024-07-07, v2.1c,
% \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/lastpage}
% \end{description}
%
@@ -1702,7 +1765,7 @@ To see the content of the \texttt{enddocument/afterlastpage}-hook
% \begin{description}
% \item[-] \TeX-format \LaTeX{}, v2.09
%
-% \item[-] package \xpackage{lastpage209}, 2024-04-27, v2.1a,
+% \item[-] package \xpackage{lastpage209}, 2024-07-07, v2.1c,
% \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/lastpage}
% \end{description}
% and does not work with \xpackage{hyperref}, which needs \LaTeX2e{}.\smallskip
@@ -1714,7 +1777,7 @@ To see the content of the \texttt{enddocument/afterlastpage}-hook
% \item[-] \TeX-format \LaTeXe{} 1994/12/01 or newer,
% \url{https://www.CTAN.org}
%
-% \item[-] package \xpackage{lastpage}, 2024-04-27, v2.1a,
+% \item[-] package \xpackage{lastpage}, 2024-07-07, v2.1c,
% \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/lastpage}
% \end{description}
%
@@ -1725,7 +1788,7 @@ To see the content of the \texttt{enddocument/afterlastpage}-hook
% \item[-] \TeX-format \LaTeXe{} between 1994/12/01 and 2023-05-31,\newline
% \url{https://www.CTAN.org}
%
-% \item[-] package \xpackage{lastpage}, 2024-04-27, v2.1a,
+% \item[-] package \xpackage{lastpage}, 2024-07-07, v2.1c,
% \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/lastpage}
% \end{description}
% and can use
@@ -1742,13 +1805,13 @@ To see the content of the \texttt{enddocument/afterlastpage}-hook
% \item[-] \TeX-format \LaTeXe{} 2023-06-01 or newer,\newline
% \url{https://www.CTAN.org}
%
-% \item[-] package \xpackage{lastpage}, 2024-04-27, v2.1a,
+% \item[-] package \xpackage{lastpage}, 2024-07-07, v2.1c,
% \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/lastpage}
% \end{description}
% and can use
% \begin{description}
% \item[-] package \xpackage{hyperref}, 2023-11-07 and newer
-% (tested with: 2024-01-20, v7.01h),
+% (tested with: 2024-05-23, v7.01i),
% \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/hyperref}
% \end{description}
% \pagebreak
@@ -1757,7 +1820,7 @@ To see the content of the \texttt{enddocument/afterlastpage}-hook
% The |lastpage-example.tex| requires the same file as all
% documents using the \xpackage{lastpage} package, i.\,e.
% \begin{description}
-% \item[-] package \xpackage{lastpage}, 2024-04-27, v2.1a,
+% \item[-] package \xpackage{lastpage}, 2024-07-07, v2.1c,
% \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/lastpage}\newline
% (Well, it is the example file for this package, and because you are reading the
% documentation for the \xpackage{lastpage} package, it can be assumed that you already
@@ -1765,13 +1828,13 @@ To see the content of the \texttt{enddocument/afterlastpage}-hook
% \end{description}
% and additionally:
% \begin{description}
-% \item[-] class \xpackage{article}, 2023-05-17, v1.4n, from \xpackage{classes}:
+% \item[-] class \xpackage{article}, 2024-02-08, v1.4n, from \xpackage{classes}:
% \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/classes}
%
-% \item[-] package \xpackage{showkeys}, 2023-07-08, v3.19,
+% \item[-] package \xpackage{showkeys}, 2024-05-23, v3.21,
% \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/showkeys}
%
-% \item[-] package \xpackage{hyperref}, 2024-01-20, v7.01h,
+% \item[-] package \xpackage{hyperref}, 2024-05-23, v7.01i,
% \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/hyperref}
% \end{description}
%
@@ -2038,7 +2101,8 @@ To see the content of the \texttt{enddocument/afterlastpage}-hook
% to update it. Further I would like to thank \textsc{Heiko Oberdiek}
% for providing a~lot~(!) of useful packages (from which I also learned everything
% I know about creating a file in \xfile{dtx} format, OK, say it: copying).
-% Thanks for bug reports go to \textsc{Ulrike Fischer} (twice),
+% Thanks to \textsc{David Carlisle} for the new code for |\lastpage@rmpage|.
+% Thanks for bug reports go to \textsc{Ulrike Fischer} (several times),
% \textsc{Sebastian Bank}, \textsc{James Hedges}, \textsc{Mikhail Titov},
% \textsc{Micha\l{} Herman}, \textsc{Matteo Gamboz}, and \textsc{James Small}.
% Thanks to \textsc{Sven Siegmund} for pointing out a necessary further
@@ -2219,8 +2283,7 @@ To see the content of the \texttt{enddocument/afterlastpage}-hook
% \item Replaced |\immediate\write| by a form of (pseudo-code!) |\immediate\protected@write|.
% (Thanks to \textsc{Ulrike Fischer} for the error report and solution!)
% \item Update of the |\lastpage@putl@bel| code to \pkg{hyperref} 2023-07-08, v7.01b,
-% which now allows fnsymbol as page numbering scheme (while links to, for example,
-% a page named $\|$ still do not work).
+% which now allows fnsymbol as page numbering scheme.
% \end{Version}
% \begin{Version}{2023-10-06 v2.0d}
% \item For plain arabic page numbers only, \pkg{lastpage} again writes the page number
@@ -2237,6 +2300,16 @@ To see the content of the \texttt{enddocument/afterlastpage}-hook
% \item |\lastpage@IfNumericTF| is no longer needed, but has not been removed
% so as not to break older documents that use it in a different context.
% \end{Version}
+% \begin{Version}{2024-07-03 v2.1b}
+% \item The \xclass{beamer} class loads \xpackage{hyperref} partially,
+% so that \xpackage{hyperref} is incorrectly detected as having been loaded.
+% The defining operation for |\lastpage@Hy| has been changed to catch this
+% and other different cases.
+% \end{Version}
+% \begin{Version}{2024-07-07 v2.1c}
+% \item With help from \textsc{David Carlisle} |\lastpage@rmpage| no longer assumes
+% |\@currentHpage| to begin with |page.|.
+% \end{Version}
% \end{History}
% \bigskip
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/lastpage/lastpage.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/lastpage/lastpage.ins
index e39cb80cbef..120709843e4 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/lastpage/lastpage.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/lastpage/lastpage.ins
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
%% This is a generated file.
%%
%% Project: lastpage
-%% Version: 2024-04-27 v2.1a
+%% Version: 2024-07-07 v2.1c
%% Info: Refers to last page's name
%%
%% Copyright (C) 2010 - 2024 by
@@ -32,10 +32,9 @@
%%
%% This package was invented by Jeffrey P. Goldberg.
%% I thought that a replacement was needed and therefore created the pageslts package,
-%% https://ctan.org/pkg/pageslts
-%% . Nevertheless, for compatibility with existing documents/packages as well as for
-%% the low amount of resources needed by the lastpage package (no new counter!),
-%% I updated this package.
+%% https://ctan.org/pkg/pageslts. Nevertheless, for compatibility with existing
+%% documents/packages as well as for the low amount of resources needed by the
+%% lastpage package (no new counter!), I updated this package.
%% Thanks go to Jeffrey P. Goldberg for allowing me to do this.
%%
%% While this package allows for things like "Page slash thepage{} of slash pageref{LastPage}"
@@ -60,7 +59,7 @@
\input docstrip.tex
\Msg{**********************************************************************}
\Msg{* Installation *}
-\Msg{* Package: lastpage 2024-04-27 v2.1a Refers to last page's name (HMM)*}
+\Msg{* Package: lastpage 2024-07-07 v2.1c Refers to last page's name (HMM)*}
\Msg{**********************************************************************}
\keepsilent
@@ -72,7 +71,7 @@
This is a generated file.
Project: lastpage
-Version: 2024-04-27 v2.1a
+Version: 2024-07-07 v2.1c
Info: Refers to last page's name
Copyright (C) 2010 - 2024 by
@@ -95,10 +94,9 @@ The Current Maintainer of this work is H.-Martin Muench.
This package was invented by Jeffrey P. Goldberg.
I thought that a replacement was needed and therefore created the pageslts package,
-https://ctan.org/pkg/pageslts
-. Nevertheless, for compatibility with existing documents/packages as well as for
-the low amount of resources needed by the lastpage package (no new counter!),
-I updated this package.
+https://ctan.org/pkg/pageslts. Nevertheless, for compatibility with existing
+documents/packages as well as for the low amount of resources needed by the
+lastpage package (no new counter!), I updated this package.
Thanks go to Jeffrey P. Goldberg for allowing me to do this.
While this package allows for things like "Page slash thepage{} of slash pageref{LastPage}"
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/lettrine/lettrine.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/lettrine/lettrine.dtx
index c4bf9472c53..e6df6e3b70c 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/lettrine/lettrine.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/lettrine/lettrine.dtx
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@
\ProvidesFile{lettrine.dtx}
%</dtx>
%<*sty|dtx>
- [2024-01-20 v2.60 (Daniel Flipo)]
+ [2024-06-26 v2.61 (Daniel Flipo)]
%</sty|dtx>
% \fi
%
@@ -314,9 +314,6 @@
% \item |\LettrineImagefalse|,
% \item |\LettrineOnGridfalse|,
% \item |\LettrineRealHeightfalse|,
-% \item |\renewcommand*{\LettrineTextFont}{\scshape}|,
-% \item |\renewcommand*{\LettrineTestString}{EFTZ}|,
-% \item |\renewcommand*{\LettrineSecondString}{x}|,
% \item |\renewcommand{\DefaultOptionsFile}{optfile.cfl}|.
% \end{itemize}
%
@@ -336,6 +333,14 @@
% file will be overridden by the optional arguments eventually given
% to the |\lettrine| command.
%
+% More customisation possibilities are offered by the next four
+% commands:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item |\renewcommand*{\LettrineFontHook}{}|,
+% \item |\renewcommand*{\LettrineTextFont}{\scshape}|,
+% \item |\renewcommand*{\LettrineTestString}{EFTZ}|,
+% \item |\renewcommand*{\LettrineSecondString}{x}|,
+% \end{itemize}
% |\LettrineTextFont| sets the font used for the second argument
% of |\lettrine|, its default definition is
% |\newcommand{\LettrineTextFont}{\scshape}| (second argument in
@@ -376,6 +381,8 @@
% all initials in a (part of) document:
% |\renewcommand{\LettrineFontHook}{\color[gray]{0.5}}| \\
% will colour the initials following this command in grey.
+% A |\color| command can be added in |\LettrineTextHook| if the text
+% following the dropped cap requires the same or another colour.
%
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/08/23}{Correct the documentation to
% mention the cm-super fonts and the type1ec package by
@@ -452,6 +459,10 @@
% environments but does not work within `center’ environments
% except with option \texttt{[lines=1]}.
% \item |\lettrine| does not work within lists.
+% \item If |\lettrine| is used inside any environment, it is
+% \emph{mandatory} to end the paragraph starting with the dropped
+% capital \emph{inside} the environment; adding a |\par| command
+% before the end of environment usually fixes placement issues.
% \item The LaTeX |\raggedright| command doesn’t work well with the
% TeX |\parshape| command used internally by |\lettrine|.
% Please use the |\RaggedRight| command from the \pkg{ragged2e}
@@ -668,10 +679,10 @@
{
lines.code = \setcounter{L@lines}{#1} ,
depth.code = \setcounter{L@depth}{#1} ,
- lhang.code = \renewcommand*{\L@hang}{#1} ,
- loversize.code = \renewcommand*{\L@oversize}{#1} ,
- lraise.code = \renewcommand*{\L@raise}{#1} ,
- ante.code = \renewcommand*{\L@ante}{#1} ,
+ lhang.store = \L@hang ,
+ loversize.store = \L@oversize ,
+ lraise.store = \L@raise ,
+ ante.store = \L@ante ,
findent.code = \setlength{\L@Findent}{#1} ,
nindent.code = \setlength{\L@Nindent}{#1} ,
slope.code = \setlength{\L@slope}{#1} ,
@@ -1166,10 +1177,13 @@
% dropped cap, add a \cs{rule} to mimic its height above the baseline
% instead.}
%
+% \changes{v2.61}{2024/06/26}{Include the `ante’ box into the \cs{smash}
+% command in case it is shifted down.}
+%
% Write the dropped capital into the left margin, and wrap
% the rest of paragraph around it.
% \begin{macrocode}
- \llap{\mbox{\L@ante}\smash{\raisebox{\L@lraise}{\usebox{\L@lbox}}}%
+ \llap{\smash{\mbox{\L@ante}\raisebox{\L@lraise}{\usebox{\L@lbox}}}%
\ifL@grid\else\rule{0pt}{\L@ruleht}\fi
\hskip \the\L@Findent}%
\unhcopy\L@tbox\relax
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/lni/lni.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/lni/lni.dtx
index 20261238d4e..257f0d4bb0d 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/lni/lni.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/lni/lni.dtx
@@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ This work consists of the file lni.dtx
%<class>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
%<class>\ProvidesClass{lni}
%<*class>
- [2024/01/08 v1.8.1 Official class for submissions to the ``Lecture Notes
+ [2024/07/01 v1.9 Official class for submissions to the ``Lecture Notes
in Informatics'']
%</class>
%<*driver>
@@ -286,6 +286,7 @@ This work consists of the file lni.dtx
% \changes{v1.8}{2022/06/10}{Fix output error in bst files (#97)}
% \changes{v1.8}{2022/11/25}{Make class compatable with latest publisher requirements (#121)}
% \changes{v1.8}{2022/11/25}{Make usage of `hyperref` mandatory (#131)}
+% \changes{v1.9}{2024/07/01}{Support multiple affiliations (#158)}
%
% \GetFileInfo{\jobname.dtx}
% \DoNotIndex{\newcommand,\newenvironment}
@@ -489,12 +490,13 @@ This work consists of the file lni.dtx
% \cs{affil\oarg{number}\marg{information}} where you can use
% \texttt{\textbackslash\textbackslash} to split the address.
% \begin{examplecode}[label={lst:author}]
-% \author[1]{Firstname1 Lastname1}{firstname1.lastname1@affiliation1.org}{0000-0000-0000-0000}
+% \author[1,2]{Firstname1 Lastname1}{firstname1.lastname1@affiliation1.org}{0000-0000-0000-0000}
% \author[2]{Firstname2 Lastname2}{firstname2.lastname2@affiliation2.org}{0000-0000-0000-0000}
-% \author[1]{Firstname3 Lastname3}{firstname3.lastname3@affiliation1.org}{0000-0000-0000-0000}
+% \author[3]{Firstname3 Lastname3}{firstname3.lastname3@affiliation1.org}{0000-0000-0000-0000}
% \author[1]{Firstname4 Lastname4}{firstname4.lastname4@affiliation1.org}{0000-0000-0000-0000}%
-% \affil[1]{Universität\\Abteilung\\Straße\\Postleitzahl Ort\\Land}
-% \affil[2]{University\\Department\\Address\\Country}
+% \affil[1]{Universität 1\\Abteilung\\Straße\\Postleitzahl Ort\\Land}
+% \affil[2]{University 2 \\Department\\Address\\Country}
+% \affil[3]{University 3\\Department\\Address\\Country}
% \end{examplecode}
%
% Leave the third and/or fourth argument empty if there is no email address and/or ORCID iD.
@@ -1149,53 +1151,71 @@ This work consists of the file lni.dtx
\renewcommand\Authsep{, }
\renewcommand\Authands{\iflanguage{ngerman}{ und }{, and }}
\renewcommand\Authand{\iflanguage{ngerman}{ und }{ and }}
-\renewcommand{\AB@authnote}[1]{$^{\text{\mbox{\normalfont\footnotesize #1}}}$}
+\NewDocumentCommand{\multiaffil}{ >{\SplitList{,}} m m m}{%
+ \gdef\@currEmail{#2}
+ \gdef\@currOrcid{#3}
+ \ProcessList{#1}{\@multiaffil}
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@multiaffil}[1]{%
+ \ifcsundef{@emailsandorcids#1}{\csgdef{@emailsandorcids#1}{}}{}%
+ \ifcsempty{@emailsandorcids#1}%
+ {\csgappto{@emailsandorcids#1}{%
+ \if\relax\@currEmail\relax\else\email{\@currEmail}\fi\if\relax\@currOrcid\relax\else,\ \orcid{\@currOrcid}\fi}}%
+ {\csgappto{@emailsandorcids#1}{%
+ \if\relax\@currEmail\relax\else;\ \email{\@currEmail}\fi\if\relax\@currOrcid\relax\else,\ \orcid{\@currOrcid}\fi}}%
+}
+
\renewcommand\author[4][]{%
\ifnewaffil\addtocounter{affil}{1}%
\edef\AB@thenote{\arabic{affil}}%
\fi%
\if\relax#1\relax\def\AB@note{\AB@thenote}\else\def\AB@note{#1}%
- \ifcsundef{@emailsandorcids\AB@note}{\csgdef{@emailsandorcids\AB@note}{}}{}%
\setcounter{Maxaffil}{0}\fi
\ifnum\value{authors}=0\def\@firstauthor{#2}\fi
\ifnum\value{authors}>1\relax
- \@namedef{@sep\number\c@authors}{\Authsep}\fi
+ \@namedef{@sep\number\c@authors}{\Authsep}\fi
\addtocounter{authors}{1}%
\begingroup
- \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect \let\and\AB@pand
- \def\thanks{\protect\thanks}\def\footnote{\protect\footnote}%
- \@temptokena=\expandafter{\AB@authors}%
- \@temptokenb=\expandafter{\AB@authors}%
- {\def\\{\protect\\[\@affilsep]\protect\Affilfont
- \protect\AB@resetsep}%
- \xdef\AB@author{\AB@blk@and#2}%
- \ifnewaffil\gdef\AB@las{}\gdef\AB@lasx{\protect\Authand}\gdef\AB@as{}%
- \xdef\AB@authors{\the\@temptokena\AB@blk@and}%
- \else
- \xdef\AB@authors{\the\@temptokena\AB@as\AB@au@str}%
- \global\let\AB@las\AB@lasx\gdef\AB@lasx{\protect\Authands}%
- \gdef\AB@as{\Authsep}%
- \fi
- \gdef\AB@au@str{#2}}%
- \@temptokena=\expandafter{\AB@authlist}%
- \@temptokenb=\expandafter{\@authlisthead}%
- \let\\=\authorcr
- \xdef\AB@authlist{\the\@temptokena
- \protect\@nameuse{@sep\number\c@authors}%
- \protect\Authfont#2\if\relax#4\relax\else\,\orcidlink{#4}\fi\AB@authnote{\AB@note}}%
- \xdef\@authlisthead{\the\@temptokenb
- \protect\@nameuse{@sep\number\c@authors}%
- \protect\Authfont#2}%
+ \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect \let\and\AB@pand
+ \def\thanks{\protect\thanks}\def\footnote{\protect\footnote}%
+ \@temptokena=\expandafter{\AB@authors}%
+ \@temptokenb=\expandafter{\AB@authors}%
+ {\def\\{\protect\\[\@affilsep]\protect\Affilfont
+ \protect\AB@resetsep}%
+ \xdef\AB@author{\AB@blk@and#2}%
+ \ifnewaffil\gdef\AB@las{}\gdef\AB@lasx{\protect\Authand}\gdef\AB@as{}%
+ \xdef\AB@authors{\the\@temptokena\AB@blk@and}%
+ \else
+ \xdef\AB@authors{\the\@temptokena\AB@as\AB@au@str}%
+ \global\let\AB@las\AB@lasx\gdef\AB@lasx{\protect\Authands}%
+ \gdef\AB@as{\Authsep}%
+ \fi
+ \gdef\AB@au@str{#2}}%
+ \@temptokena=\expandafter{\AB@authlist}%
+ \@temptokenb=\expandafter{\@authlisthead}%
+ \let\\=\authorcr
+ \xdef\AB@authlist{\the\@temptokena
+ \protect\@nameuse{@sep\number\c@authors}%
+ \protect\Authfont#2\if\relax#4\relax\else\,\orcidlink{#4}\fi\AB@authnote{\AB@note}}%
+ \xdef\@authlisthead{\the\@temptokenb
+ \protect\@nameuse{@sep\number\c@authors}%
+ \protect\Authfont#2}%
\endgroup
\ifnum\value{authors}>2\relax
\@namedef{@sep\number\c@authors}{\Authands}\fi
+ \ifcsundef{@emailsandorcids\AB@note}{\csgdef{@emailsandorcids\AB@note}{}}{}%
+ \sbox\z@{\@tempcnta=0#1\relax}%
+ \expandafter\ifdim\wd\z@>\z@\relax
+ \multiaffil{#1}{#3}{#4}
+ \else
+ \ifcsundef{@emailsandorcids\AB@note}{\csgdef{@emailsandorcids\AB@note}{}}{}%
\ifcsempty{@emailsandorcids\AB@note}%
{\csgappto{@emailsandorcids\AB@note}{%
- \if\relax#3\relax\else\email{#3}\fi\if\relax#4\relax\else,\ \orcid{#4}\fi}%
- }%
+ \if\relax#3\relax\else\email{#3}\fi\if\relax#4\relax\else,\ \orcid{#4}\fi}}%
{\csgappto{@emailsandorcids\AB@note}{%
\if\relax#3\relax\else;\ \email{#3}\fi\if\relax#4\relax\else,\ \orcid{#4}\fi}}%
-
+ \fi%
\newaffilfalse
}
\renewcommand\@author{%
@@ -3071,12 +3091,13 @@ EXECUTE {end.bib}
\title[Ein Kurztitel]{Ein sehr langer Titel über mehrere Zeilen mit sehr vielen
Worten und noch mehr Buchstaben}
%% \subtitle{Untertitel / Subtitle} % if needed
-\author[1]{Firstname1 Lastname1}{firstname1.lastname1@affiliation1.org}{0000-0000-0000-0000}
-\author[2]{Firstname2 Lastname2}{firstname2.lastname2@affiliation2.org}{0000-0000-0000-0000}
-\author[1]{Firstname3 Lastname3}{firstname3.lastname3@affiliation1.org}{0000-0000-0000-0000}
-\author[1]{Firstname4 Lastname4}{firstname4.lastname4@affiliation1.org}{0000-0000-0000-0000}%
-\affil[1]{Universität\\Abteilung\\Straße\\Postleitzahl Ort\\Land}
-\affil[2]{University\\Department\\Address\\Country}
+ \author[1,2]{Firstname1 Lastname1}{firstname1.lastname1@affiliation1.org}{0000-0000-0000-0000}
+ \author[2]{Firstname2 Lastname2}{firstname2.lastname2@affiliation2.org}{0000-0000-0000-0000}
+ \author[3]{Firstname3 Lastname3}{firstname3.lastname3@affiliation1.org}{0000-0000-0000-0000}
+ \author[1]{Firstname4 Lastname4}{firstname4.lastname4@affiliation1.org}{0000-0000-0000-0000}%
+ \affil[1]{Universität 1\\Abteilung\\Straße\\Postleitzahl Ort\\Land}
+ \affil[2]{University 2 \\Department\\Address\\Country}
+ \affil[3]{University 3\\Department\\Address\\Country}
\maketitle
\begin{abstract}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/nicematrix/nicematrix-code.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/nicematrix/nicematrix-code.dtx
index 059c4b2ca6c..05251bd9cd5 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/nicematrix/nicematrix-code.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/nicematrix/nicematrix-code.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% This file should be compiled with $xelatex$.
+% This file should be compiled with $lualatex$.
%
% Copyright (C) 2018-2024 by F. Pantigny
% ------------------------------------------
@@ -17,8 +17,8 @@
%
% \fi
% \iffalse
-\def\myfileversion{6.28}
-\def\myfiledate{2024/05/29}
+\def\myfileversion{6.28b}
+\def\myfiledate{2024/06/29}
%
%
%<*batchfile>
@@ -155,9 +155,11 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
% In the version 2.6a of \pkg{array}, important modifications have been done for
% the Tagging Project.
% \begin{macrocode}
-\bool_const:Nn \c_@@_tagging_array_bool { \cs_if_exist_p:N \ar@ialign }
+\bool_const:Nn \c_@@_tagging_array_bool
+ { \IfPackageAtLeastTF { array } { 2024/05/01 } \c_true_bool \c_false_bool }
\bool_const:Nn \c_@@_testphase_table_bool
- { \IfPackageLoadedTF { latex-lab-testphase-table } \c_true_bool \c_false_bool }
+ { \IfPackageLoadedTF { latex-lab-testphase-table } \c_true_bool \c_false_bool
+ }
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
@@ -287,19 +289,27 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
%
% \bigskip
% \begin{macrocode}
-\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_security_test_i:w \ignorespaces #1
+\bool_if:NTF \c_@@_tagging_array_bool
{
- \peek_meaning:NF \unskip { \@@_error:n { Internal~error } }
- #1
+ \cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_security_test_i:w \ignorespaces #1
+ {
+ \peek_meaning:NF \textonly@unskip { \@@_error:n { Internal~error } }
+ #1
+ }
+ }
+ {
+ \cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_security_test_i:w \ignorespaces #1
+ {
+ \peek_meaning:NF \unskip { \@@_error:n { Internal~error } }
+ #1
+ }
}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \bigskip
% Here, the box |\l_tmpa_box| will be used as sandbox to take our security test.
-% This code has been modified in version 6.18 (see question 682891 on TeX
-% StackExchange).
% \begin{macrocode}
-\hook_gput_code:nnn { begindocument / after } { . }
+\hook_gput_code:nnn { begindocument / end } { . }
{
\IfPackageLoadedTF { mdwtab }
{ \@@_fatal:n { mdwtab~loaded } }
@@ -385,6 +395,7 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
\tl_const:Nn \c_@@_dot_tl { . }
\tl_const:Nn \c_@@_default_tl { default }
\tl_const:Nn \c_@@_star_tl { * }
+\str_const:Nn \c_@@_star_str { * }
\str_const:Nn \c_@@_r_str { r }
\str_const:Nn \c_@@_c_str { c }
\str_const:Nn \c_@@_l_str { l }
@@ -1489,10 +1500,11 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \medskip
-% For the vertical position, the possible values are |c|, |t| and |b|.
+% For the vertical position, the possible values are |c|, |t|, |b|, |T| and |B|
+% (but |\l_@@_vpos_block_str| will remain empty if the user doesn't use a key
+% for the vertical position).
% \begin{macrocode}
\str_new:N \l_@@_vpos_block_str
-\str_set:Nn \l_@@_vpos_block_str { c }
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
@@ -1765,6 +1777,14 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
\newcounter { tabularnote }
% \end{macrocode}
%
+% We want to avoid error messages for duplicate labels when the package
+% \pkg{hyperref} is used. That's why we will count all the tabular notes of the
+% whole document with |\g_@@_tabularnote_int|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\int_new:N \g_@@_tabularnote_int
+\cs_set:Npn \theHtabularnote { \int_use:N \g_@@_tabularnote_int }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
% \begin{macrocode}
\seq_new:N \g_@@_notes_seq
\seq_new:N \g_@@_notes_in_caption_seq
@@ -1990,7 +2010,12 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
% \begin{macrocode}
\int_gdecr:N \c@tabularnote
\int_set_eq:NN \l_tmpa_int \c@tabularnote
- \refstepcounter { tabularnote }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following line is only to avoid error messages for multipy defined labels
+% when the package \pkg{hyperref} is used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \int_gincr:N \g_@@_tabularnote_int
+ \refstepcounter { tabularnote }
\int_compare:nNnT \l_tmpa_int = \c@tabularnote
{ \int_gincr:N \c@tabularnote }
\seq_clear:N \l_@@_notes_labels_seq
@@ -2504,6 +2529,7 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
{
ampersand-in-blocks .bool_set:N = \l_@@_amp_in_blocks_bool ,
ampersand-in-blocks .default:n = true ,
+ &-in-blocks .meta:n = ampersand-in-blocks ,
no-cell-nodes .code:n =
\cs_set_protected:Npn \@@_node_for_cell:
{ \box_use_drop:N \l_@@_cell_box } ,
@@ -5416,22 +5442,12 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \bigskip
-%
% \begin{macrocode}
\str_new:N \c_@@_ignorespaces_str
\str_set:Nx \c_@@_ignorespaces_str { \ignorespaces }
\str_remove_all:Nn \c_@@_ignorespaces_str { ~ }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \bigskip
-% In order to test whether a cell is empty, we test whether it begins by
-% |\ignorespaces\unskip|. However, in some circunstancies, for example when
-% |\collectcell| of \pkg{collcell} is used, the cell does not begin with
-% |\ignorespaces|. In that case, we consider as not empty...
-%
-% First, we test if the next token is |\ignorespaces| and it's not very easy...
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_test_if_empty: { \peek_after:Nw \@@_test_if_empty_i: }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_test_if_empty:
+ { \peek_after:Nw \@@_test_if_empty_i: }
\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_test_if_empty_i:
{
\str_set:Nx \l_tmpa_str { \token_to_meaning:N \l_peek_token }
@@ -5439,17 +5455,40 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
{ \@@_test_if_empty:w }
}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_test_if_empty:w \ignorespaces
- {
- \peek_meaning:NT \unskip
- {
- \tl_gput_right:Nn \g_@@_cell_after_hook_tl
- {
- \box_set_wd:Nn \l_@@_cell_box \c_zero_dim
- \skip_horizontal:N \l_@@_col_width_dim
- }
+ { \peek_after:Nw \@@_test_if_empty_ii: }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \bigskip
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_nullify_cell:
+ {
+ \tl_gput_right:Nn \g_@@_cell_after_hook_tl
+ {
+ \box_set_wd:Nn \l_@@_cell_box \c_zero_dim
+ \skip_horizontal:N \l_@@_col_width_dim
}
}
% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \bigskip
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\bool_if:NTF \c_@@_tagging_array_bool
+ {
+ \cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_test_if_empty_ii:
+ { \peek_meaning:NT \textonly@unskip \@@_nullify_cell: }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In the old version of \pkg{array}, we test whether it begins by
+% |\ignorespaces\unskip|. However, in some circunstancies, for example when
+% |\collectcell| of \pkg{collcell} is used, the cell does not begin with
+% |\ignorespaces|. In that case, we consider as not empty...
+% First, we test if the next token is |\ignorespaces| and it's not very easy...
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {
+ \cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_test_if_empty_ii:
+ { \peek_meaning:NT \unskip \@@_nullify_cell: }
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -6769,7 +6808,7 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
}
}
{
- \@@_create_col_nodes:
+ \@@_create_col_nodes:
\endarray
}
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -6817,7 +6856,7 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
% \begin{macrocode}
{
\@@_create_col_nodes:
- \endarray
+ \endarray
}
% \end{macrocode}
%
@@ -7193,7 +7232,7 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
\endpgfpicture
}
}
- % \cr
+ % \cr
}
% \end{macrocode}
%
@@ -12984,6 +13023,9 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
b .value_forbidden:n = true ,
B .code:n = \str_set:Nn \l_@@_vpos_block_str B ,
B .value_forbidden:n = true ,
+ m .code:n = \str_set:Nn \l_@@_vpos_block_str c ,
+ m .value_forbidden:n = true ,
+ v-center .meta:n = m ,
p .code:n = \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_p_block_bool ,
p .value_forbidden:n = true ,
color .code:n =
@@ -13071,12 +13113,12 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
% \begin{macrocode}
\bool_lazy_or:nnTF
{ \tl_if_blank_p:n { #1 } }
- { \str_if_eq_p:nn { #1 } { * } }
+ { \str_if_eq_p:Vn \c_@@_star_str { #1 } }
{ \int_set:Nn \l_tmpa_int { 100 } }
{ \int_set:Nn \l_tmpa_int { #1 } }
\bool_lazy_or:nnTF
{ \tl_if_blank_p:n { #2 } }
- { \str_if_eq_p:nn { #2 } { * } }
+ { \str_if_eq_p:Vn \c_@@_star_str { #2 } }
{ \int_set:Nn \l_tmpb_int { 100 } }
{ \int_set:Nn \l_tmpb_int { #2 } }
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -13124,20 +13166,10 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
\bool_set_false:N \l_tmpa_bool
\bool_if:NT \l_@@_amp_in_blocks_bool
{ \tl_if_in:nnT { #5 } { & } { \bool_set_true:N \l_tmpa_bool } }
- \bool_if:NTF \l_tmpa_bool
- { \exp_args:Nee \@@_Block_vii:nnnnn }
- {
- \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_p_block_bool
- { \exp_args:Nee \@@_Block_vi:nnnnn }
- {
- \bool_if:nTF
- {
- (
- \int_compare_p:nNn \l_tmpa_int = \c_one_int
- ||
- \int_compare_p:nNn \l_tmpb_int = \c_one_int
- )
- && ! \tl_if_empty_p:n { #5 }
+ \bool_case:nF
+ {
+ \l_tmpa_bool { \exp_args:Nee \@@_Block_vii:nnnnn }
+ \l_@@_p_block_bool { \exp_args:Nee \@@_Block_vi:nnnnn }
% \end{macrocode}
% For the blocks mono-column, we will compose right now in a box in order to
% compute its width and take that width into account for the width of the
@@ -13147,12 +13179,14 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
% column, it's imperative. Otherwise, the process for the determination of the
% widths of the columns will be wrong.
% \begin{macrocode}
- && ! \l_@@_X_bool
- }
- { \exp_args:Nee \@@_Block_iv:nnnnn }
- { \exp_args:Nee \@@_Block_v:nnnnn }
- }
- }
+ \l_@@_X_bool { \exp_args:Nee \@@_Block_v:nnnnn }
+ { \tl_if_empty_p:n { #5 } } { \exp_args:Nee \@@_Block_v:nnnnn }
+ { \int_compare_p:nNn \l_tmpa_int = \c_one_int }
+ { \exp_args:Nee \@@_Block_iv:nnnnn }
+ { \int_compare_p:nNn \l_tmpb_int = \c_one_int }
+ { \exp_args:Nee \@@_Block_iv:nnnnn }
+ }
+ { \exp_args:Nee \@@_Block_v:nnnnn }
{ \l_tmpa_int } { \l_tmpb_int } { #3 } { #4 } { #5 }
}
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -13265,7 +13299,7 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
{ ! \g_@@_rotate_bool }
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% When the block is mono-column in a column with a fixed width (eg |p{3cm}|), we
+% When the block is mono-column in a column with a fixed width (e.g. |p{3cm}|), we
% use a |{minipage}|.
% \begin{macrocode}
{
@@ -13339,9 +13373,16 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
}
% \end{macrocode}
% If we are in a mono-row block we take into account the height and the depth of
-% that block for the height and the depth of the row.
+% that block for the height and the depth of the row, excepted when the block
+% uses explicitely an option of vertical position.
% \begin{macrocode}
- \int_compare:nNnT { #1 } = \c_one_int
+ \bool_lazy_and:nnT
+ { \int_compare_p:nNn { #1 } = \c_one_int }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the user has not used a key for the vertical position of the block, then
+% |\l_@@_vpos_block_str| remains empty.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ { \str_if_empty_p:N \l_@@_vpos_block_str }
{
\dim_gset:Nn \g_@@_blocks_ht_dim
{
@@ -13384,7 +13425,6 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
{ m }
{ \int_compare:nNnT \c@iRow = \l_@@_last_row_int T }
}
-
}
{
\box_use_drop:c
@@ -13576,6 +13616,9 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
% \begin{macrocode}
\keys_define:nn { NiceMatrix / Block / SecondPass }
{
+ ampersand-in-blocks .bool_set:N = \l_@@_amp_in_blocks_bool ,
+ ampersand-in-blocks .default:n = true ,
+ &-in-blocks .meta:n = ampersand-in-blocks ,
tikz .code:n =
\IfPackageLoadedTF { tikz }
{ \seq_put_right:Nn \l_@@_tikz_seq { { #1 } } }
@@ -13707,10 +13750,22 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
{
\int_compare:nNnTF \l_@@_last_row_int > \g_@@_row_total_int
{ \msg_error:nnnn { nicematrix } { Block~too~large~1 } { #1 } { #2 } }
- { \@@_Block_v:nnnnnn { #1 } { #2 } { #3 } { #4 } { #5 } { #6 } }
+ {
+ \@@_Block_v:nnVVnn
+ { #1 }
+ { #2 }
+ \l_@@_last_row_int
+ \l_@@_last_col_int
+ { #5 }
+ { #6 }
+ }
}
}
% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \@@_Block_v:nnnnnn { n n V V n n }
+% \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \medskip
@@ -14172,13 +14227,15 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \bigskip
-% Now, we will put the label of the block.
+% Now, we will put the label of the block. We recall that |\l_@@_vpos_block_str|
+% is empty when the user has not used a key for the vertical position of the block.
% \begin{macrocode}
\pgfpicture
\pgfrememberpicturepositiononpagetrue
\pgf@relevantforpicturesizefalse
\bool_lazy_any:nTF
{
+ { \str_if_empty_p:N \l_@@_vpos_block_str } % added 2024/06/29
{ \str_if_eq_p:on \l_@@_vpos_block_str { c } }
{ \str_if_eq_p:on \l_@@_vpos_block_str { T } }
{ \str_if_eq_p:on \l_@@_vpos_block_str { B } }
@@ -14206,6 +14263,19 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
{
\str_case:on \l_@@_vpos_block_str
{
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We recall that |\l_@@_vpos_block_str| is empty when the user has not used a key
+% for the vertical position of the block.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ { } { % added 2024-06-29
+ \str_case:on \l_@@_hpos_block_str
+ {
+ c { center }
+ l { west }
+ r { east }
+ j { center }
+ }
+ }
c {
\str_case:on \l_@@_hpos_block_str
{
@@ -15656,6 +15726,7 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
{
\nullfont
\c_math_toggle_token
+ \colorlet { current-color } { . }
\@@_color:o \l_@@_delimiters_color_tl
\left .
\vcenter
@@ -15667,7 +15738,7 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
}
\right #1
\tl_if_empty:nF { #3 } { _ { \smash { #3 } } }
- ^ { \smash { #4 } }
+ ^ { \color { current-color } \smash { #4 } }
\c_math_toggle_token
}
{ #2 }
@@ -15705,9 +15776,12 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
{
left-shorten .bool_set:N = \l_@@_brace_left_shorten_bool ,
left-shorten .default:n = true ,
+ left-shorten .value_forbidden:n = true ,
right-shorten .bool_set:N = \l_@@_brace_right_shorten_bool ,
- shorten .meta:n = { left-shorten , right-shorten } ,
right-shorten .default:n = true ,
+ right-shorten .value_forbidden:n = true ,
+ shorten .meta:n = { left-shorten , right-shorten } ,
+ shorten .value_forbidden:n = true ,
yshift .dim_set:N = \l_@@_brace_yshift_dim ,
yshift .value_required:n = true ,
yshift .initial:n = \c_zero_dim ,
@@ -16438,7 +16512,7 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
~you~try~to~use~more~columns~than~allowed~by~your~
\@@_full_name_env:.\@@_message_hdotsfor:\ The~maximal~number~of~columns~is~
\int_use:N \g_@@_static_num_of_col_int\
- ~(plus~the~potential~exterior~ones).
+ ~(plus~the~potential~exterior~ones).~
This~error~is~fatal.
}
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -17211,9 +17285,10 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
\c_@@_available_keys_str
}
{
- The~available~keys~are~(in~alphabetic~order):~b,~B,~borders,~c,~draw,~fill,~
- hlines,~hvlines,~l,~line-width,~name,~opacity,~rounded-corners,~r,~
- respect-arraystretch,~t,~T,~tikz,~transparent~and~vlines.
+ The~available~keys~are~(in~alphabetic~order):~&-in-blocks,~ampersand-in-blocks,~
+ b,~B,~borders,~c,~draw,~fill,~hlines,~hvlines,~l,~line-width,~name,~
+ opacity,~rounded-corners,~r,~respect-arraystretch,~t,~T,~tikz,~transparent~
+ and~vlines.
}
% \end{macrocode}
%
@@ -17347,7 +17422,9 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
}
{
The~available~keys~are~(in~alphabetic~order):~
+ &-in-blocks,~
allow-duplicate-names,~
+ ampersand-in-blocks,~
caption-above,~
cell-space-bottom-limit,~
cell-space-limits,~
@@ -17405,6 +17482,8 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
}
{
The~available~keys~are~(in~alphabetic~order):~
+ &-in-blocks,~
+ ampersand-in-blocks,~
b,~
baseline,~
c,~
@@ -17469,6 +17548,8 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
}
{
The~available~keys~are~(in~alphabetic~order):~
+ &-in-blocks,~
+ ampersand-in-blocks,~
b,~
baseline,~
c,~
@@ -17532,6 +17613,8 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
}
{
The~available~keys~are~(in~alphabetic~order):~
+ &-in-blocks,~
+ ampersand-in-blocks,~
b,~
baseline,~
c,~
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/orcidlink/orcidlink.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/orcidlink/orcidlink.dtx
index e096f502f6e..fcc5a731763 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/orcidlink/orcidlink.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/orcidlink/orcidlink.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 2019-2023 by Leo C. Stein <leo.stein@gmail.com>
+% Copyright (C) 2019-2024 by Leo C. Stein <leo.stein@gmail.com>
% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
@@ -27,9 +27,12 @@
%<*driver>
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\usepackage[dvipsnames]{xcolor}
-\usepackage{orcidlink}[2023/12/30]
-\hypersetup{colorlinks,urlcolor=NavyBlue,citecolor=NavyBlue,linkcolor=NavyBlue,pdfusetitle}
+\usepackage{orcidlink}[2024/06/25]
+\hypersetup{colorlinks,urlcolor=NavyBlue,citecolor=NavyBlue,linkcolor=NavyBlue}
+\hypersetup{pdftitle={The orcidlink package},pdfauthor={Leo C. Stein},
+ pdfsubject={-}}
\usepackage{graphicx}
+\usepackage{microtype}
\EnableCrossrefs
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
@@ -40,7 +43,7 @@
%</driver>
% \fi
%
-% \CheckSum{41}
+% \CheckSum{59}
%
% \CharacterTable
% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
@@ -69,6 +72,8 @@
% working correctly with XeTeX. Thanks to Tim Henke for the bug report.}
% \changes{v1.0.5}{2023/12/30}{Turn off TikZ externalization of logos.
% Thanks to github user aquileia for the bug report.}
+% \changes{v1.1.0}{2024/06/25}{Support ORCID's three different ID
+% formats. Thanks to Hugo Heagren for suggestions.}
%
% \DoNotIndex{\newcommand,\newenvironment}
%
@@ -84,8 +89,10 @@
%
% \section{Introduction}
%
-% This is a LaTeX style file to add a macro for inserting a linked
-% ORCiD logo. The package provides exactly one command, |\orcidlink|.
+% This is a LaTeX style file providing a macro for inserting a
+% hyperlinked ORCiD logo. The package also provides three commands
+% for ORCiD's three recommended ID printing formats, and a command for
+% just the ORCiD logo, not linked to anything.
%
% \section{Usage}
%
@@ -113,6 +120,36 @@
% \includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{preview}\newline{}
% The macro is used in the author line of this documentation as well.
%
+% \DescribeMacro{\orcidlogo}
+% If you simply want the ORCiD logo without a hyperlink anywhere, use
+% |\orcidlogo|.
+%
+% ORCiD's \href{https://info.orcid.org/brand-guidelines/}{guidelines}
+% recommend three formats: full, compact, and inline. The three
+% formats are available:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item \DescribeMacro{\orcidlinkf\marg{orcid}} Full format. Example:
+% |\orcidlinkf{0000-0001-7559-9597}| will insert
+% \orcidlinkf{0000-0001-7559-9597}
+% \item \DescribeMacro{\orcidlinkc\marg{orcid}} Compact format.
+% Example: |\orcidlinkc{0000-0001-7559-9597}| will insert
+% \orcidlinkc{0000-0001-7559-9597}
+% \item \DescribeMacro{\orcidlinki\marg{Name}\marg{orcid}} Inline
+% format. Example: |\orcidlinki{Leo C. Stein}{0000-0001-7559-9597}|
+% will insert \orcidlinki{Leo C. Stein}{0000-0001-7559-9597}
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\orcidlinkX\marg{before}\marg{orcid}\marg{after}}
+%
+% The command |\orcidlinkX{before}{orcid}{after}| is a helper macro
+% that's used to implement all of the others. Though it is just an
+% internal helper, I saw no reason to keep it internal.
+% |\orcidlinkX{before}{orcid}{after}| results in
+% \orcidlinkX{before}{orcid}{after}. The entire output is hyperlinked
+% to the ORCiD page. There is a thin space |\,| between ``before,''
+% the logo, and ``after.'' However if ``before'' is empty, the space
+% will be omitted; similarly for ``after.''
+%
% \section{Package Compatibility}
%
% This package relies on \texttt{hyperref} and \texttt{tikz}. If you
@@ -132,10 +169,11 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1994/06/01]
\ProvidesPackage{orcidlink}
- [2023/12/30 v1.0.5 Linked ORCiD logo macro package]
+ [2024/06/26 v1.1.0 Support ORCID's three different ID formats.]
-%% All I did was package up Milo's code on TeX.SE,
-%% see https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/445583/34063
+%% This started out as Milo's code on TeX.SE,
+%% see https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/445583/34063.
+%% It has since been expanded with more commands.
\RequirePackage{hyperref}
\RequirePackage{tikz}
@@ -168,18 +206,45 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% \begin{macro}{\orcidlink}
+% \begin{macro}{\orcidlogo}
% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\orcidlink[1]{%
+\newcommand{\orcidlogo}{%
\texorpdfstring{%
\setlength{\@curXheight}{\fontcharht\font`X}%
-\href{https://orcid.org/#1}{\XeTeXLinkBox{\mbox{%
+\XeTeXLinkBox{%
\@preventExternalization%
\begin{tikzpicture}[yscale=-\@OrigHeightRecip*\@curXheight,
xscale=\@OrigHeightRecip*\@curXheight,transform shape]
\pic{orcidlogo};
\end{tikzpicture}%
-}}}}{}}
+}}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+
+% \begin{macro}{\orcidlinkX}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\orcidlinkX[3]{\href{https://orcid.org/#2}{%
+\ifstrempty{#1}{}{#1\,}\orcidlogo\ifstrempty{#3}{}{\,#3}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\orcidlinkf}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\orcidlinkf}[1]{\orcidlinkX{}{#1}{https://orcid.org/#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\orcidlinkc}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\orcidlinkc}[1]{\orcidlinkX{}{#1}{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\orcidlinki}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\orcidlinki}[2]{\orcidlinkX{#1}{#2}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\orcidlink}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\orcidlink}[1]{\orcidlinkX{}{#1}{}}
\endinput
% \end{macrocode}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/orcidlink/orcidlink.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/orcidlink/orcidlink.ins
index 201841f6386..bd2ce9a35c8 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/orcidlink/orcidlink.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/orcidlink/orcidlink.ins
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-%% Copyright (C) 2019-2023 by Leo C. Stein <leo.stein@gmail.com>
+%% Copyright (C) 2019-2024 by Leo C. Stein <leo.stein@gmail.com>
%% --------------------------------------------------------------------------
%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@
This is a generated file.
-Copyright (C) 2019-2023 by Leo C. Stein <leo.stein@gmail.com>
+Copyright (C) 2019-2024 by Leo C. Stein <leo.stein@gmail.com>
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/pdfx/pdfx.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/pdfx/pdfx.dtx
index ffdb92ee01b..573a23b6117 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/pdfx/pdfx.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/pdfx/pdfx.dtx
@@ -1,33 +1,33 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
+%
% File: pdfx.dtx
%
% Copyright (c) 2019, CV Radhakrishnan <cvr@river-valley.org>,
% Han The Thanh <thanh@river-valley.org>,
% Ross Moore <ross.moore@mq.edu.au>,
% Peter Selinger <selinger@mathstat.dal.ca>
-%
+%
% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions
% of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2 of this
% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version
% of this license is in:
-%
+%
% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%
+%
% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
% version 1999/12/01 or later.
%
% \fi
%
-% \CheckSum{6309}
+% \CheckSum{6802}
% \iffalse
%
%<*driver>
\pdfcompresslevel 9
\providecommand{\pdfxopt}{a-2u}
\providecommand{\lastyear}{2018}
-\providecommand{\thisyear}{2019}
-\begin{filecontents*}{./\jobname.xmpdata}
+\providecommand{\thisyear}{2024}
+\begin{filecontents}[force]{./\jobname.xmpdata}
\Title{Generation of PDF/X- and PDF/A-compliant PDFs with pdfTeX \textemdash\ pdfx.sty}
\Author{\CVR\sep \Thanh\sep Ross Moore\sep Peter Selinger}
\Subject{This package supports generation of PDF/X-, PDF/A- and PDF/E-compliant documents, in most of their variants, using pdfLaTeX, LuaLaTeX and XeLaTeX.}
@@ -37,10 +37,10 @@
\Copyright{Public domain.}
\Copyrighted{False}
\CopyrightURL{http://tug.org/texlive/}
-\CoverDisplayDate{March \thisyear}
-\CoverDate{\thisyear-03-10}
+\CoverDisplayDate{July \thisyear}
+\CoverDate{\thisyear-07-01}
\CreatorTool{LaTeX + pdfx.sty with option \pdfxopt, from TeX Live \thisyear}
-\Date{2017-05-18\sep 2017-06-23\sep 2018-11-29\sep 2018-12-22\sep 2019-02-08\sep 2019-03-10}
+\Date{2024-07-01}
\Advisory{An earlier version of this documentation was published as: TUGboat 36, No.2, pp.136\textendash 142 (2015)}
\Advisory{v1.6: Added XMP support for PDF/UA-1. Added more Metadata fields and Language support.}
\Advisory{v1.6: Default RGB and CMYK profiles now require the colorprofiles.sty package.}
@@ -52,16 +52,29 @@
\Advisory{v1.6: Support for 8-bit Hebrew encodings, some Arabic and Devanagari.}
\Advisory{v1.6: Updated documentation, incl. for LaTeX changes.}
\Advisory{v1.6.1: Fixed issue with ifthen package; improved Metadata with LuaTeX and XeTeX.}
-\Advisory{v.1.6.1: Flexibility with page boxes for PDF/X.}
-\Advisory{v.1.6.2: Fixed passing of options to xcolor, and some glyphtounicode values.}
-\Advisory{v.1.6.2: Fixed encoding issue. Extra warning when colorprofiles.tex is missing.}
-\Advisory{v.1.6.3: Properly fixed encoding issue; supports \string\pdfomitcharset\ primitive.}
-\Advisory{v.1.6.3: Reference to veraPDF validation software; additions to glyphtounicode-ntx.tex.}
-\Advisory{v.1.6.3: Patched \string\mathaccentV\ to output accents after the base character.}
+\Advisory{v1.6.1: Flexibility with page boxes for PDF/X.}
+\Advisory{v1.6.2: Fixed passing of options to xcolor, and some glyphtounicode values.}
+\Advisory{v1.6.2: Fixed encoding issue. Extra warning when colorprofiles.tex is missing.}
+\Advisory{v1.6.3: Properly fixed encoding issue; supports \string\pdfomitcharset\ primitive.}
+\Advisory{v1.6.3: Reference to veraPDF validation software; additions to glyphtounicode-ntx.tex.}
+\Advisory{v1.6.3: Patched \string\mathaccentV\ to output accents after the base character.}
+\Advisory{v1.6.4: Added check and warning with luatex for whether \string\pdfminorversion\ can be changed.}
+\Advisory{v1.6.4: Ensure correct \string\catcode for input characters up to 31, when reading .xmpdata file.}
+\Advisory{v1.6.4: Disabled patched \string\mathaccentV\ due to incompatibility with wide base expressions.}
+\Advisory{v1.6.5: Support for \string\Nickname\ as Metadata command.}
+\Advisory{v1.6.5: Ensure par is unexpandable when reading Metadata.}
+\Advisory{v1.6.5a: Support for Memoir class's \string\stockwidth\ and \string\stockheight.}
+\Advisory{v1.6.5a: Added pdf20 option for PDF 2.0, with support for \string\pdfmajorversion.}
+\Advisory{v1.6.5b: Avoid loading xmpincl package from within a TeX grouping.}
+\Advisory{v1.6.5c: Avoid loading stringenc package from within a TeX grouping.}
+\Advisory{v1.6.5d: Disable some options for xcolor after use.}
+\Advisory{v1.6.5e: Ensure \string\pdfmajorversion\ and \string\pdfminorversion\ are both defined and set correctly.}
+\Advisory{v1.6.5e: Updated documentation; added new Bibliography entries and revised URL links.}
+\Advisory{v1.6.5f: Reset ifpdf properly; support \string\creationdate with XeTeX. Revised Glossary layout.}
\pdfxEnableCommands{%
\def\CVR{C.V. Radhakrishnan}\def\Thanh{H\`an Th\eee Thanh}%
\def\eee{^^c3^^aa^^cc^^81 }}
-\end{filecontents*}
+\end{filecontents}
\PassOptionsToPackage{dvipsnames,svgnames}{xcolor}
\documentclass[a4paper]{ltxdoc}
\usepackage[\pdfxopt]{pdfx}
@@ -104,12 +117,12 @@
% \GetFileInfo{pdfx.dtx}
%
% \DoNotIndex{\newcommand,\newenvironment}
-%
+%
% \DoNotIndex{\def,\edef,\gdef,\xdef,\global,\long,\let}
% \DoNotIndex{\expandafter,\string,\the,\ifx,\else,\fi}
% \DoNotIndex{\csname,\endcsname,\relax,\begingroup,\endgroup}
% \DoNotIndex{\DeclareTextCommand,\DeclareTextCompositeCommand}
-% \DoNotIndex{\space,\@empty,\special,\@nil,\advance\@nnil,\z@,\@@mod}
+% \DoNotIndex{\space,\@empty,\special,\@nil,\z@,\@@mod}
% \DoNotIndex{\\,\@gobble,\@@,\@fornoop,\@fortmp,\@ifundefined,\@firstoftwo,\@secondoftwo}
% \DoNotIndex{\@tempcnta,\@tempcntb,\@tempboxa,\ifnot@empty,\@this,\@firstofone}
% \DoNotIndex{\{,\},\alph,\bgroup,\dp,\ht,\kern,\egroup}
@@ -134,78 +147,92 @@
% \DoNotIndex{\scantokens,\typeout,\vrule,\wd}
%
% \changes{v1.00}{2008/12/01}{Initial commit to the CVS.}
-% \changes{v1.01}{2008/12/10}{glyphtounicode-cmr.tex included with the package.}
-% \changes{v1.3}{2008/12/01}{Fix copyright in xmp files.}
+% \changes{v1.01}{2008/12/10}{\texttt{glyphtounicode-cmr.tex} included with the package.}
+% \changes{v1.3}{2008/12/01}{Fix copyright in \texttt{.xmp} files.}
% \changes{v1.5.4}{2015/02/28}{Fixed timezone bug; Unicode support; more
% PDF variants; added color profiles.}
-% \changes{v1.5.5}{2015/03/23}{Support for PDF/X-4p and PDF/X-5pg
+% \changes{v1.5.5}{2015/03/23}{Support for PDF/X-4p and PDF/X-5pg
% with external color profiles.}
% \changes{v1.5.6}{2016/02/05}{Suppressed `dummy-space' font warning;
-% removed spurious '?' in XMP packets; improved handling of Color Profiles;
-% ensure Hy@pdfatrue when building PDF/A, for link flags;
-% properly enables xcolor conversion of color models.}
-% \changes{v1.5.7}{2016/02/17}{Removed UTF-8 characters that appear in
+% removed spurious `?' in XMP packets; improved handling of Color Profiles;
+% ensure \texttt{\textbackslash Hy@pdfatrue} when building PDF/A, for link flags;
+% properly enables \texttt{xcolor} conversion of color models.}
+% \changes{v1.5.7}{2016/02/17}{Removed UTF-8 characters that appear in
% the documentation only, within comments in the package source,
% but result in a validation failure. Language support in XMP metadata.
% Added macros for Windows and Mac system color profile directories.}
% \changes{v1.5.8}{2016/05/03}{MediaBox, TrimBox, etc. derived from
-% the paperheight, paperwidth. Improved language support, incl. KOI8-R
+% the \texttt{\textbackslash paperheight}, \texttt{\textbackslash paperwidth}.
+% Improved language support, incl. KOI8-R
% encoded cyrillics, Armenian OT6, and LGR Greek encoding, incl. polytonic Greek.
% All the encodings Latin-1--9 are supported for upper 8-bit characters.
-% Fixed the quoted file-name problem, evident with LuaTeX.
+% Fixed the quoted file-name problem, evident with Lua\TeX.
% Method to generate correct bookmarks with non-active (transliterated) input.
-% Added support for XeLaTeX, improvements with LuaTeX. Updated documentation.}
+% Added support for Xe\LaTeX, improvements with Lua\TeX. Updated documentation.}
% \changes{v1.5.82}{2017/05/12}{%
-% Adjusted to changes in the LaTeX core, affecting macros for composite
+% Adjusted to changes in the \LaTeX\ core, affecting macros for composite
% commands; incl. \texttt{\textbackslash textsuperscript} and others.}%
-% \changes{v1.5.83}{2017/05/16}{Improved support for XeLaTeX and LuaLaTeX.}%
-% \changes{v1.5.84}{2017/05/18}{Fully expand options for hyperref. Better support
+% \changes{v1.5.83}{2017/05/16}{Improved support for Xe\LaTeX\ and Lua\LaTeX.}%
+% \changes{v1.5.84}{2017/05/18}{Fully expand options for \texttt{hyperref}. Better support
% for extended IPA letters and modifiers. Adjusted release versions and dates.}%
-% \changes{v1.5.85}{2017/06/23}{Fixed bugs, and fully implemented L8U as
-% a pseudo-encoding; renamed L8U files into the form *-penc.def }%
-% \changes{v1.6}{2018/11/18}{Added XMP support for PDF/UA-1.
-% Added more Metadata fields and Language support.
-% Default RGB and CMYK profiles now require the colorprofiles.sty package.
-% Added file CallasColorProfiles.tex .
-% Revised glyphtounicode.sty to use variation selectors, altered maps to PUA
-% codepoints; added more glyphs via glyphtounicode-ntx.tex .
+% \changes{v1.5.85}{2017/06/23}{Fixed bugs, and fully implemented L8U as
+% a pseudo-encoding; renamed L8U files into the form \texttt{*-penc.def}.}%
+% \changes{v1.6}{2018/11/18}{Added XMP support for PDF/UA-1.
+% Added more Metadata fields and Language support.
+% Default RGB and CMYK profiles now require the \texttt{colorprofiles.sty} package.
+% Added file \texttt{CallasColorProfiles.tex}.
+% Revised \texttt{glyphtounicode.sty} to use variation selectors, altered maps to PUA
+% codepoints; added more glyphs via \texttt{glyphtounicode-ntx.tex}.
% Support for 8-bit Hebrew encodings, some Arabic and Devanagari.
-% Updated documentation, incl. for LaTeX changes.
+% Updated documentation, incl. for \LaTeX\ changes.
% }%
-% \changes{v1.6.1}{2018/12/22}{Fixed issue with ifthen package;
-% improved Metadata with LuaTeX and XeTeX. Flexibility with page boxes for PDF/X.}%
-% \changes{v1.6.2}{2019/01/04}{Fixed passing of options to xcolor, and some glyphtounicode values.}%
-% \changes{v1.6.3}{2019/02/27}{Fixed encoding issues; support for new pdfomitcharset primitive;
-% reference to veraPDF validation software; additions to glyphtounicode-ntx.tex.}%
+% \changes{v1.6.1}{2018/12/22}{Fixed issue with \texttt{ifthen} package;
+% improved Metadata with Lua\TeX\ and Xe\TeX. Flexibility with page boxes for PDF/X.}%
+% \changes{v1.6.2}{2019/01/04}{Fixed passing of options to \texttt{xcolor}, and some \texttt{glyphtounicode} values.}%
+% \changes{v1.6.3}{2019/02/27}{Fixed encoding issues; support for new \texttt{\textbackslash pdfomitcharset} primitive;
+% reference to \textsf{veraPDF} validation software; additions to \texttt{glyphtounicode-ntx.tex}.}%
+% \changes{v1.6.4}{2019/09/26}{Added check and warning with \texttt{luatex} for whether \texttt{\textbackslash pdfminorversion} can be changed;
+% ensure correct \texttt{\textbackslash catcode} for input characters up to 31, when reading \texttt{.xmpdata} file;
+% disabled patched \texttt{\textbackslash mathaccentV} due to incompatibility with wide base expressions.}
+% \changes{v1.6.5}{2021/07/06}{Support for \texttt{\textbackslash Nickname} as Metadata command;
+% ensure \texttt{\textbackslash par} is unexpandable when processing XMP metadata.}
+% \changes{v1.6.5a}{2023/10/17}{Added option \texttt{pdf20} for future need with PDF 2.0; support for \texttt{\textbackslash pdfmajorversion};
+% support for Memoir's \texttt{\textbackslash stockwidth} and \texttt{\textbackslash stockheight} dimen registers.}
+% \changes{v1.6.5b}{2024/04/05}{Avoid loading \texttt{xmpincl} package from within a \TeX\ grouping.}
+% \changes{v1.6.5c}{2024/05/23}{Avoid loading \texttt{stringenc} package from within a \TeX\ grouping.}
+% \changes{v1.6.5d}{2024/05/29}{Adjust for non-zero \texttt{\textbackslash stockwidth} only; prevent changes to \texttt{xcolor} options after use.}
+% \changes{v1.6.5e}{2024/06/22}{Ensure \texttt{\textbackslash pdfmajorversion} and \texttt{\textbackslash pdfminorversion}
+% are both defined and set correctly. Updated documentation; added new Bibliography entries and revised URL links.}
+% \changes{v1.6.5f}{2024/06/24}{Reset \texttt{\textbackslash ifpdf} properly; support \texttt{\textbackslash creationdate} with Xe\TeX. Revised Glossary layout.}
% \title{Generation of PDF/X- and PDF/A-\penalty-200 compliant PDFs with \pdftex --- \texttt{pdfx.sty}}
-% \date{2019/02/27}
-% \version{1.6.3}
+% \date{2024/07/01}
+% \version{1.6.5f}
% \keywords{PDF, PDF/A, PDF/X, pdf\TeX, \LaTeX, Multilingual Metadata}
% \author{C.\,V.\,Radhakrishnan, \Thanh, Ross Moore {\upshape\small
% and} Peter Selinger}
% \contact{\texttt{[cvr,thanh]@river-valley.org},\\%
-% \texttt{ross.moore@mq.edu.au}, \texttt{selinger@mathstat.dal.ca}\hss}
-%
+% \texttt{ozross@icloud.com}, \texttt{selinger@mathstat.dal.ca}\hss}
+%
% \maketitle
%
% \StopEventually{}
%
% \section[Introduction]{Introduction}
%
-% This package\footnote{An earlier version of this documentation
+% This package\footnote{An earlier version of this documentation
% was published as \cite{pdfx}. All the changes since then have been developed
% and coded by the 3rd-listed author.}
-% currently supports generation of PDF/X-, PDF/A- and PDF/E-compliant
+% currently supports generation of PDF/X-, PDF/A- and PDF/E-compliant
% documents, using \pdftex, in most of their variants;
% see the complete list in Section~\ref{ssec-options} below.
% As of \TeX\,Live 2016 it now also works with Lua\LaTeX\ and Xe\LaTeX,
% when using appropriate command-line options\footnote{%
-% The required invokation is:\quad
+% The required invocation is:\quad
% |xelatex --shell-escape -output-driver="xdvipdfmx -z 0" <filename>.tex |}, but
% with some limitations --- see Sections~\ref{sssec-xetex} and \ref{sssec-luatex}.
-% By `supports', we mean that the package provides correct and sufficient
+% By `supports', we mean that the package provides correct and sufficient
% means to declare that a document conforms with a stated PDF variant
-% (PDF/X, PDF/A, PDF/E, PDF/VT, PDF/UA, etc.) along with the version and/or
+% (PDF/X, PDF/A, PDF/E, PDF/VT, PDF/UA, etc.) along with the version and/or
% level of conformance.
% This package also allows appropriate Metadata and Color Profile
% to be specified, according to the requirements of the PDF variant.
@@ -216,7 +243,7 @@
% information as well as a large range of optional data, a fully validating
% PDF file cannot be achieved. The PDF can be created, having the correct
% visual appearance on all pages, but it will not pass validation checks.
-% Sections~\ref{ssec-metadata} and \ref{ssec-multi} describe
+% Sections~\ref{ssec-metadata} and \ref{ssec-multi} describe
% how this file should be constructed.
%
% \medskip
@@ -224,23 +251,24 @@
% of document structure and type of content that may be required
% (or restricted) within a PDF variant. For example, PDF/VT \cite{PDFVT} requires
% well-structured parts, using Form XObject sections tagged as `/DPart'.
-% Similarly PDF/A-1a (and 2a and 3a) \cite{PDFA,PDFA2,PDFA3} require
-% a fully `Tagged PDF', including a detailed structure tagging which
+% Similarly PDF/A-1a (and 2a and 3a) \cite{PDFA,PDFA2,PDFA3} require
+% a fully `Tagged PDF', including a detailed structure tagging which
% envelops the complete contents of the document, as does also PDF/UA \cite{PDF-UA}.
-% This is beyond the current version of \LaTeX\ engines, as commonly shipped.
+% This is beyond the current version of \LaTeX\ engines as commonly shipped;
+% though see Section~\ref{sec-pdf20} for recent developments.
% So while this package provides enough to meet the declaration,
-% metadata and font-handling aspects for these PDF/A variants,
-% it is not sufficient to produce fully conforming PDFs.
-% However, with extra \pdftex-based software or macro coding that \emph{is} capable
-% of producing `Tagged PDF', this package can be used as part of
-% the overall workflow to produce fully conforming documents.
+% Metadata and font-handling aspects for these PDF/A variants,
+% it is not sufficient to produce fully-conforming PDFs.
+% However, with extra \pdftex-based software or macro coding that \emph{is} capable
+% of producing `Tagged PDF', this package can be used as part of
+% the overall workflow to produce fully-conforming documents; see \cite{tpdf}.
%
%
% \subsection{PDF standards}\label{ssec-standards}
%
% PDF/X and PDF/A are umbrella terms used to denote several ISO
-% standards \cite{PDFX,PDFX3,PDFX1a,PDFX4,PDFX5,PDFA,PDFA2,PDFA3}
-% that define different subsets of the PDF standard \cite{PDF17,ISO32000}.
+% standards \cite{PDFX,PDFX3,PDFX1a,PDFX4,PDFX5,PDFA,PDFA2,PDFA3}
+% that define different subsets of the PDF standard \cite{PDF17,ISO32000}.
% The objective of PDF/X is to facilitate graphics exchange between
% document creator and printer and therefore, has all requirements
% related to printing. For instance, in PDF/X, all fonts need to be
@@ -249,28 +277,28 @@
% specifications of PDF/X.
% Since 2005 other variants of PDF/X have emerged, as extra effects
% (such as layering and transparency) have been supported within the PDF
-% standard itself. The full range of versions and conformance supported
+% standard itself. The full range of versions and conformance supported
% in this package is discussed below in Section~\ref{ssec-options}.
%
% PDF/A defines a profile for archiving PDF documents, which ensures
% the documents can be reproduced in the exact same way in years to
% come. A key element to achieving this is that PDF/A documents
% are 100\% self-contained. All the information needed to display the
-% document in the same manner every time is embedded in the file.
+% document in the same manner every time is embedded in the file.
% A PDF/A document is not permitted to be reliant on information from
% external sources. Other restrictions include avoidance of
-% audio/video content, JavaScript and encryption.
-% Mandatory inclusion of fonts, color profile and standards-based metadata
+% audio/video content, JavaScript and encryption.
+% Mandatory inclusion of fonts, color profile and standards-based metadata
% are absolutely essential for PDF/A.
% Later versions allow for use of image compression and file attachments.
%
-% PDF/E is an ISO standard \cite{PDFE} intended for documents used in engineering workflows.
+% PDF/E is an ISO standard \cite{PDFE} intended for documents used in engineering workflows.
% PDF/VT \cite{PDFVT} allows for high-volume customised form printing, such as utility bills.
% PDF/UA (`Universal Accessibility') has emerged as a standard \cite{PDF-UA,PDFUA1,PDFUABSI}
-% supporting Assistive Technologies, incorporating web-accessibility guidelines (WCAG)
-% for electronic documents.
+% supporting Assistive Technologies, incorporating web-accessibility guidelines (WCAG)
+% for electronic documents.
% In future, PDF/H may emerge for health records and medical-related
-% documents. Other applications can be envisaged.
+% documents. Other applications can be envisaged.
% Declarations and Metadata are supported for the first three of these.
% The others are the subject of further work; revised versions of this
% package can be expected in later years.
@@ -281,6 +309,30 @@
% and whatever else is relevant to how the standards have been established
% and how they can be used.
%
+% \subsection{Later \LaTeX\ changes, support for newer PDF standards}\label{sec-pdf20}
+%
+% Although PDF 2.0~\cite{PDF20} was first published in 2017 and revised in 2020, it has taken
+% a long time for it to become a target format for documents built using \LaTeX.
+% This is because the requirement of using `Tagged PDF' is stringent, requiring
+% a reworking of almost every aspect of \LaTeX's document production model \cite{LaTeXPDF}.
+% Work to this end is going on, via the PDF Association's `\LaTeX\ Project LWG'\cite{PDF-LaTeX},
+% the experimental |tagpdf| package \cite{tagpdf}, and Ross Moore's |tpdf| package and macro suite \cite{tpdf}.
+% Significant internal changes have been made to \LaTeX\ itself, which in turn have
+% required the |v1.6.5x| updates in 2024 to this |pdfx| package. We thank the following users for reporting
+% issues arising from such changes: Sergio Zenoni, Takehiko Tanabe, Tom\'a\v s Nov\'a\v cek.
+%
+% In early 2024 the PDF Association published several documents for new and updated standards
+% based upon PDF 2.0~\cite{PDF20}. These include PDF/UA-2 \cite{PDFUA2}, PDF `Declarations' \cite{PDFDecl},
+% `Well-Tagged PDF' (WTPDF) \cite{WTPDF} with declarations for `Accessibility' and `Reuse',
+% adding to PDF/A-4 \cite{PDFA4}, PDF/X-6 \cite{PDFX6} and PDF/VT-3 \cite{PDFVT3}, each with various flavours.
+% To support these, there will be released in late 2024 a variant named |pdfx2| as an extension of |pdfx|,
+% with separate documentation detailing how to specify appropriate XMP metadata \cite{XMP-ISO}.
+%
+% Once |pdfx2| becomes available, this will take on the role of handling new developments for
+% \LaTeX\ support of PDF 2.0-based software solutions. The |pdfx| package will remain under
+% active development, primarily to ensure compatibility of existing documents with PDF 1.7-based
+% requirements (tagged or otherwise), following any further changes in \LaTeX\ or other packages.
+%
% \section[Usage]{Usage}\label{sec-usage}
%
% The package can be loaded with the command:
@@ -292,7 +344,7 @@
% \subsection{Package options}\label{ssec-options}
%
% \subsubsection{PDF/A options}
-%
+%
% PDF/A is an ISO standard~\cite{PDFA,PDFA2,PDFA3} intended for long-term archiving of
% electronic documents. It therefore emphasizes self-containedness and
% reproducibility, as well as machine-readable metadata. The PDF/A
@@ -307,7 +359,7 @@
% versions contain a subset of the features of later versions, so for
% maximum portability, it is preferable to use a lower-numbered
% version, when the extra features allowed in higher versions are not used.
-% There is no conformance level `u' in version 1 of the standard.
+% There is no conformance level `u' in version 1 of the standard.
% Thus for many typical uses of PDF/A, it is sufficient to use PDF/A-1b.
%
% \begin{itemize}
@@ -320,28 +372,28 @@
% \item |a-3b|: generate PDF/A-3b.
% \item |a-3u|: generate PDF/A-3u.
% \end{itemize}
-% By `Experimental, not fully implemented' here we mean primarily that
+% By `Experimental, not fully implemented' here we mean primarily that
% the document structure, as required for `Tagged PDF', is not handled
-% by this package. Using other \pdftex-based software that \emph{is}
+% by this package. Using other \pdftex-based software that \emph{is}
% capable of producing such complete tagging, conforming documents
% can indeed be produced.
%
% \subsubsection{PDF/E options}
-%
+%
% PDF/E is an ISO standard~\cite{PDFE} intended for documents used in engineering
% workflows. There is only one version of the PDF/E standard so far,
% and it is called PDF/E-1.
-%
+%
% \begin{itemize}
% \item |e-1|: generate PDF/E-1.
% \item |e|: same as |e-1|.
% \end{itemize}
%
% \subsubsection{PDF/UA options}
-%
-% PDF/UA is an ISO and ANSI standard~\cite{PDF-UA,PDFUABSI} intended for making
-% structured documents readable and navigable using Assistive Technology;
-% e.g., screen-readers, Braille keyboards and such-like.
+%
+% PDF/UA is an ISO and ANSI standard~\cite{PDF-UA,PDFUABSI} intended for making
+% structured documents readable and navigable using Assistive Technology;
+% e.g., screen-readers, Braille keyboards and such-like.
% Documents prepared this way can be easily saved in other formats which
% preserve the structure, such as XML, HTML, and (Microsoft) Word-based formats.
%
@@ -359,20 +411,20 @@
% multi-file exchange, and level 2s is for streamed delivery.
% Currently, none of the PDF/VT conformance levels are fully
% implemented by the |pdfx| package.
-%
+%
% \begin{itemize}
% \item |vt-1|: generate PDF/VT-1, based on PDF/X-4. Experimental, not fully implemented
% \item |vt-2|: generate PDF/VT-2, based on PDF/X-5pg. Experimental, not fully implemented.
% \item |vt-2s|: generate PDF/VT-2s. Experimental, not fully implemented.
% \end{itemize}
-% By `Experimental, not fully implemented' here we mean primarily that
+% By `Experimental, not fully implemented' here we mean primarily that
% the structuring of a document into `/DPart' sections, as Form XObjects,
-% is not handled by this package.
-% This \emph{is} possible with current \pdftex\ software,
+% is not handled by this package.
+% This \emph{is} possible with current \pdftex\ software,
% but not yet in a way that lends itself easily to full automation, due to
% requirements of knowing the internal object number of certain internal
-% PDF constructs. All the other aspects: PDFInfo declaration, Metadata
-% and Color Profile, of the PDF/VT variants are correctly handled.
+% PDF constructs. All the other aspects: PDFInfo declaration, Metadata
+% and Color Profile, of the PDF/VT variants are correctly handled.
%
% \subsubsection{PDF/X options}
%
@@ -380,13 +432,13 @@
% emphasizes printing-related requirements, such as embedded fonts and
% color profiles. The PDF/X standard has a large number of variants
% and conformance levels. The basic variants are X-1, X-1a,
-% X-3, X-4, and X-5. (Note that a revised version of the X-2 standard
-% was published in 2003 but withdrawn as an ISO standard in 2011,
-% basically due to lack of interest in using it).
-% The PDF/X-1a standard exists in revisions of 2001 and 2003,
-% the PDF/X-3 standard exists in revisions of 2002 and 2003,
-% and the PDF/X-4 and PDF/X-5 standards exist in revisions of 2008 and 2010.
-% Moreover, some of these standards have a `p' version, which permits the
+% X-3, X-4, and X-5. (Note that a revised version of the X-2 standard
+% was published in 2003 but withdrawn as an ISO standard in 2011,
+% basically due to lack of interest in using it).
+% The PDF/X-1a standard exists in revisions of 2001 and 2003,
+% the PDF/X-3 standard exists in revisions of 2002 and 2003,
+% and the PDF/X-4 and PDF/X-5 standards exist in revisions of 2008 and 2010.
+% Moreover, some of these standards have a `p' version, which permits the
% use of an externally supplied color profile (instead of an embedded one),
% and/or a `g' version, which permits the use of external graphical
% content. Moreover, PDF/X-5 has an `n' version, which extends
@@ -401,14 +453,14 @@
% \item |x-2|: generate PDF/X-2; unpublished, doesn't validate.
% \item |x-3|: generate PDF/X-3. Options |x-302| and |x-303| are
% also available to specify PDF/X-3:2002 or PDF/X-3:2003 explicitly.
-% \item |x-4|: generate PDF/X-4. Options |x-408| and |x-410| are
+% \item |x-4|: generate PDF/X-4. Options |x-408| and |x-410| are
% also available to specify PDF/X-4:2008 or PDF/X-4:2010 explicitly.
% \item |x-4p|: generate PDF/X-4p. Options |x-4p08| and |x-4p10| are
% also available to specify PDF/X-4p:2008 or PDF/X-4p:2010 explicitly.
% \item |x-5g|: generate PDF/X-5g. Options |x-5g08| and |x-5g10| are
% also available to specify PDF/X-5g:2008 or PDF/X-5g:2010 explicitly.
% \item |x-5n|: generate PDF/X-5n. Options |x-5n08| and |x-5n10| are
-% also available to specify PDF/X-5n:2008 or PDF/X-5n:2010 explicitly.
+% also available to specify PDF/X-5n:2008 or PDF/X-5n:2010 explicitly.
% Experimental, not fully implemented.
% \item |x-5pg|: generate PDF/X-5pg. Options |x-5pg08| and |x-5pg10| are
% also available to specify PDF/X-5pg:2008 or PDF/X-5pg:2010 explicitly.
@@ -441,9 +493,11 @@
% applicable standard.\\This may produce a non-standard-conforming PDF file.
% \item |pdf17|: use PDF 1.7, overriding the version specified by the
% applicable standard.\\This may produce a non-standard-conforming PDF file.
+% \item |pdf20|: use PDF 2.0, experimental in preparation for use with future
+% software, under development. This may produce a non-standard-conforming PDF file.
% \item |nocharset|: do not generate the Charset entry for fonts (\pdftex\ only).
% \item |usecharset|: generate the Charset entry for fonts (\pdftex\ only).
-% \end{itemize}
+% \end{itemize}
% The latter two options affect the value of the |\pdfomitcharset| primitive,
% added to \pdftex\ in 2019, due to differing requirements for PDF/A-1
% and other PDF/A versions. Indeed use of the |/Charset| entry for a font
@@ -451,14 +505,14 @@
%
% \subsubsection{XMP language options}\label{ssec-xmplang}
%
-% These options allow for characters in alphabets other than those
-% used for English and Western European languages to be used
-% within the |.xmpdata| file (see Section~\ref{ssec-metadata}),
+% These options allow for characters in alphabets other than those
+% used for English and Western European languages to be used
+% within the |.xmpdata| file (see Section~\ref{ssec-metadata}),
% supported through \LaTeX\ character representation macros.
% \begin{itemize}
-% \item |latxmp|: extended Latin blocks, |Ux0180|--|Ux024F|
-% and |Ux1E00|--|Ux1EFF|
-% \item |armxmp|: armenian letters and ligatures, |Ux0530|--|Ux058F|,
+% \item |latxmp|: extended Latin blocks, |Ux0180|--|Ux024F|
+% and |Ux1E00|--|Ux1EFF|
+% \item |armxmp|: armenian letters and ligatures, |Ux0530|--|Ux058F|,
% via macros |\armyba|, |\armfe|, |\armcomma|, etc.
% \item |cyrxmp|: cyrillic letters and accents, |Ux0400|--|Ux04FF|
% and |Ux0500|--|Ux0527| via macros |\cyra|, |\CYRN|, etc.
@@ -472,8 +526,8 @@
% via macros |\abreve|, |\uhorn|, |\ECIRCUMFLEX|, etc.
% \item |ipaxmp|: phonetic extensions, |Ux0250|--|Ux02AF|
% and |Ux1D00|--|Ux1DFF|
-% \item |mathxmp|: mathematical letters, symbols, operators
-% arrows, alphanumeric forms.
+% \item |mathxmp|: mathematical letters, symbols, operators
+% arrows, alphanumeric forms.
% \item |allxmp|: all of the above, as well as those listed next;
% used primarily for testing compatibility with other packages.
% \end{itemize}
@@ -486,13 +540,13 @@
% Further options allow direct (enclosed) input of upper 8-bit
% characters, from encodings such as Latin-1--Latin-9, KOI8-R,
% LGR (Greek), ArmSSCI8, and a few more.
-% Use of these requires a carefully controlled parsing regime.
+% Use of these requires a carefully controlled parsing regime.
% Here we list the package options that declare such content
% may be present in the |.xmpdata| file.
-% A detailed account of how these are used is given
+% A detailed account of how these are used is given
% in~Section~\ref{ssec-multi} (``Multilingual Metadata'').
% \begin{itemize}
-% \item |LATxmp|: support for direct use of the upper-range characters
+% \item |LATxmp|: support for direct use of the upper-range characters
% (byte codes 160--255) for input encodings Latin1--Latin9, for
% Latin-based alphabets as used in European countries and elsewhere.
% This defines parser macros |\textLAT|, |\textLII|, \dots, |\textLIX|.
@@ -501,7 +555,7 @@
% of upper-range characters (byte codes 148--255) under input
% encodings KOI8-R and KOIR8-RU, using |\textKOI| as parser macro.
% All support from |cyrxmp| is loaded also.
-% \item |LGRxmp|: support for greek letters entered using either
+% \item |LGRxmp|: support for greek letters entered using either
% the LGR input transliteration of ASCII characters, or the ISO-8859-7
% encoding of upper-range characters (byte codes 160--255),
% or a combination of both, using |\textLGR| as parser macro.
@@ -509,25 +563,25 @@
% \item |AR8xmp|: support for armenian letters entered using the
% Arm\TeX~2.0 input transliteration of ASCII characters, or the
% ArmSCII8 encoding of upper-range characters (byte codes 160--255),
-% or a combination of both, using |\textARM| as parser macro.
+% or a combination of both, using |\textARM| as parser macro.
% All support from |armxmp| is loaded also.
-% \item |HEBxmp|: support for hebrew letters entered using either
-% LHE input transliteration of ASCII characters, or the CP1255, CP862
+% \item |HEBxmp|: support for hebrew letters entered using either
+% LHE input transliteration of ASCII characters, or the CP1255, CP862
% or ISO-8859-8 (HE8) encoding of upper-range characters (byte codes 160--255),
% or a combination of these using |\textLHE|, |\textHEBO|, |\textHEB| as parser macros.
% All support from |hebxmp| is loaded also.
% \end{itemize}
-% These `parser' options have received limited testing, so please
+% These `parser' options have received limited testing, so please
% report any mistakes in the UTF-8 output that you may encounter.
%
% \subsection{Data file for metadata}\label{ssec-metadata}
%
-% As mentioned above, standards-compliant PDF documents require
-% document-level metadata to be included.
-% This, known as an `XMP packet'~\cite{XMP-spec,XMP-ISO},
+% As mentioned above, standards-compliant PDF documents require
+% document-level metadata to be included.
+% This, known as an `XMP packet'~\cite{XMP-spec,XMP-ISO},
% is like having a library catalog card included within the PDF itself. It is an unencrypted
% portion of the PDF file, with data expressed in Extensible Markup Language (XML),
-% using Resource Description Format (RDF~\cite{RDF}) syntax, encoded as UTF-8
+% using Resource Description Format (RDF~\cite{RDF}) syntax, encoded as UTF-8
% so readable by any text editing software on any modern computing platform.
%
% Some advantages of doing this are clear.
@@ -539,12 +593,12 @@
% \item For the author(s): who can specify the kind of information most appropriate
% to help readers understand the nature and purpose of the document.
% \end{itemize}
-%
-% The |pdfx| package builds the XMP metadata from information supplied via a special data file
-% called |\jobname.xmpdata|. Here, |\jobname| is usually the basename of the document's main
-% |.tex| file. For example, if your document source is in the file |main.tex|,
-% then the metadata must be in a file called |main.xmpdata|.
-% None of the individual metadata fields are mandatory, but for most documents, it makes sense
+%
+% The |pdfx| package builds the XMP metadata from information supplied via a special data file
+% called |\jobname.xmpdata|. Here, |\jobname| is usually the basename of the document's main
+% |.tex| file. For example, if your document source is in the file |main.tex|,
+% then the metadata must be in a file called |main.xmpdata|.
+% None of the individual metadata fields are mandatory, but for most documents, it makes sense
% to specify at least the title and the author. For more technical aspects of metadata
% and its uses, consult the work of the Dublin Core Initiative~\cite{DC} and PRISM~\cite{PRISM}.
%
@@ -557,72 +611,73 @@
% |\Publisher{Baking International}|
% \end{decl}
% You should note that multiple authors and keywords have been separated
-% by |\sep|. This |\sep| macro serves a technical purpose and is
+% by |\sep|. This |\sep| macro serves a technical purpose and is
% permitted within the |\Author|, |\Keywords|, and |\Publisher| fields,
-% as well as some others. See \S\ref{mdfields} below for a complete listing
+% as well as some others. See \S\ref{mdfields} below for a complete listing
% of the supported author-supplied metadata fields.
%
% After processing, the local directory contains a file named such as
% |pdfa.xmpi| or |pdfe.xmpi| or |pdfx.xmpi| according to the PDF variant desired.
-% This file is the complete XMP Metadata packet.
-% It can be checked for validity, using an online validator, such as at
+% This file is the complete XMP Metadata packet.
+% It can be checked for validity, using an online validator, such as at
% \href{http://www.pdflib.com/knowledge-base/xmp-metadata/free-xmp-validator/}{www.pdflib.com}.
-% \textsf{veraPDF}~\cite{veraPDF} is Open Source software providing validation for PDF/A,
+% \textsf{veraPDF}~\cite{veraPDF} is Open Source software providing validation for PDF/A,
% and other checkers useful in a PDF/A production setting.
-%
+%
% \textbf{Warning}: The |\jobname.xmpdata| file may be included in the
-% main document source, within a |{filecontents*}| environment,
+% main document source, within a |{filecontents}| environment,
% provided this comes \emph{before} the |\documentclass| command, as follows.
+% The |force| option ensures overwriting a previous file to catch recent edits.
% \begin{decl}[]
-% |\begin{filecontents*}{\jobname.xmpdata}|\\
+% |\begin{filecontents}[force]{\jobname.xmpdata}|\\
% | \Title{Baking through the ages}|\\
% | \Author{A. Baker\sep C. Kneader}|\\
% | \Language{en-GB}|\\
% | \Keywords{cookies\sep muffins\sep cakes}|\\
% | \Publisher{Baking International}|\\
-% |\end{filecontents*}|\\
+% |\end{filecontents}|\\
% |\documentclass[11pt,a4paper]{article}|\\
% |...|
% \end{decl}
% Including the metadata with the \LaTeX\ source is very convenient.
-% Having it at the top of the file also brings attention to it, placing emphasis on
-% the desirability of including metadata, and keeping it accurate while the main
-% content of the document is subject to changes or revision.
-% Macro definitions can also occur prior to the |\documentclass| command,
-% including any that may be needed within the metadata.
+% Having it at the top of the file also brings attention to it, placing emphasis on
+% the desirability of including metadata, and keeping it accurate while the main
+% content of the document is subject to changes or revision.
+% Macro definitions can also occur prior to the |\documentclass| command,
+% including any that may be needed within the metadata.
% An example of this is apparent in Figure~\ref{koi8-code} occurring later.
%
-% However, this ordering is also extremely important, else any non-ascii UTF-8 byte
-% sequences can become active characters and expand upon data being written out,
+% However, this ordering is also extremely important, else any non-ascii UTF-8 byte
+% sequences can become active characters and expand upon data being written out,
% rather than remaining as inactive bytes.
% If you edit the metadata supplied this way, remember to remove the
% existing copy of |\jobname.xmpdata| file before the next processing run,
-% as \LaTeX\ does not write a new copy of the file when it exists on disk already,
+% as \LaTeX\ does not write a new copy of the file when it exists on disk already,
% within the current working directory or elsewhere that \LaTeX\ may find.
% In development or testing situations the filename may need to be given as
% |./\jobname.xmpdata|, else an older version may be loaded in error.
-%
+%
% Experienced users/programmers can employ the \verb|\write18| mechanism%
-% \footnote{If you don't already know what this is, they you probably
-% should not try using it |:-)|.}, together with the |--shell-escape| command-line
-% option, to automatically execute a shell command that removes |\jobname.xmpdata|
-% on every (or on selected) processing runs.
+% \footnote{If you don't already know what this is, they you probably
+% should not try using it |:-)|.}, together with the |--shell-escape| command-line
+% option, to automatically execute a shell command that removes |\jobname.xmpdata|
+% on every (or on selected) processing runs.
% This is only useful when the metadata changes, for whatever reason.
%
% \medskip
-% Other places for the |{filecontents*}| environment can work,
+% Other places for the |{filecontents}| environment can work,
% but \emph{only} when it contains \emph{no} non-ascii UTF-8 byte sequences.
-% Since 2018, with default
+% Since 2018, with default
% See Section~\ref{ssec-symbols} below for more information on the macros
% that can be safely used within |.xmpdata| metadata files.
-%
+%
% \subsection{List of supported metadata fields}\label{mdfields}
-%
+%
% Following is a complete list of user-definable metadata fields currently supported,
% separated into particular groupings.
-% Each command is accompanied by the specific XML tagged field name (with namespace)
-% that is placed into the document-level Metadata packet, as well as the kind of information
-% being conveyed.
+% Each command is accompanied by the specific XML tagged field name (with namespace)
+% that is placed into the document-level Metadata packet, as well as the kind of information
+% being conveyed.
% More may be added in the future.
% These commands can \emph{only} be used within the |.xmpdata| file.
%
@@ -630,13 +685,13 @@
% using RFC5646 (BCP 47)~\cite{BCP47} codes, in which the metadata field is given.
% Languages for multiple entries can use e.g., |\sep[de] ...|.
% Only those fields requiring a specific format (e.g. dates) do \emph{not}
-% support language specifiers; these are indicated with \fixmd.
+% support language specifiers; these are indicated with \fixmd.
% Fields allowing more than one value are indicated with \starmd.
% Multiple values may be given as separate instances of the macro, or as a single
-% instance with the values delimited by |\sep|, as in the example above.
-%
+% instance with the values delimited by |\sep|, as in the example above.
+%
% \subsubsection{General information:}
-%
+%
% \begin{itemize}
% \item \starmd|\Author|: \hfill (|dc:creator|)\\
% the document's human author(s). Separate multiple authors with |\sep|.
@@ -661,10 +716,10 @@
% location of a web page describing the owner
% and/or rights statement for this document.
% \item \fixmd|\Copyrighted|: \hfill (|xmpRights:Marked|)\\
-% `True' if the document is copyrighted, and `False' if it isn't.
-% This is automatically set to `True' if either |\Copyright| or |\CopyrightURL| is specified,
-% but this can be overridden.
-% For example, if the copyright statement is `Public Domain',
+% `True' if the document is copyrighted, and `False' if it isn't.
+% This is automatically set to `True' if either |\Copyright| or |\CopyrightURL| is specified,
+% but this can be overridden.
+% For example, if the copyright statement is `Public Domain',
% then specify also |\Copyrighted{False}|.
% \item \starmd|\Owner|: \hfill (|xmpRights:Owner|)\\
% specifies the owner(s) of the document or resource.
@@ -673,18 +728,18 @@
% \end{itemize}
%
% \subsubsection{more Dublin Core metadata:}\label{sssec-dc}
-% From version 1.6 of |pdfx.sty|, the following fields can be used to provide a greater
-% range of information to be specified as metadata.
+% From version 1.6 of |pdfx.sty|, the following fields can be used to provide a greater
+% range of information to be specified as metadata.
% \begin{itemize}
% \item \starmd|\Contributor|: \hfill (|dc:contributor|)\\
% contributor(s) other than author(s) of the PDF document.
% \item |\Coverage|: \hfill (|dc:coverage|)\\
% statement about the extent or scope of the document's contents.
% \item \starmd\fixmd|\Date|: \hfill (|dc:date|)\\
-% date(s) when something significant occurred relating to the resource (e.g., version changes);
+% date(s) when something significant occurred relating to the resource (e.g., version changes);
% must be in ISO date format |YYYY-MM-DD| or |YYYY-MM|.
% \item \fixmd|\PublicationType|: \hfill (|dc:type|)\\
-% The type of publication. If specified, must be one of `book', `catalog', `feed', `journal',
+% The type of publication. If specified, must be one of `book', `catalog', `feed', `journal',
% `magazine', `manual', `newsletter', `pamphlet'. This is automatically set to `journal'
% if |\Journaltitle| is specified (see below), but can be overridden.
% \item \starmd|\Relation|: \hfill (|dc:relation|)\\
@@ -700,10 +755,10 @@
% \end{itemize}
%
% The remaining Dublin Core field |(dc:format)| is always set to `|application/pdf|'.
-%
+%
% \subsubsection{Publication information:}\label{sssec-publ}
-% The following macros allow for inclusion of publication related metadata fields,
-% as specified by PRISM~\cite{PRISM} to meet publishing requirements.
+% The following macros allow for inclusion of publication related metadata fields,
+% as specified by PRISM~\cite{PRISM} to meet publishing requirements.
% \begin{itemize}
% \item |\Journaltitle|: \hfill (|prism:issueName|)\\
% The title of the journal in which the document was published.
@@ -720,7 +775,7 @@
% \item |\CoverDisplayDate|: \hfill (|prism:coverDisplayDate|)\\
% Date on the cover of the journal issue, as a human-readable text string.
% \item \fixmd|\CoverDate|: \hfill (|prism:coverDate|)\\
-% Date on the cover of the journal issue, in a format suitable for storing in a database
+% Date on the cover of the journal issue, in a format suitable for storing in a database
% field with a `date' data type; e.g. |YYYY-MM|, or |YYYY-MM-DD|.
% \end{itemize}
% This is an area which can be expanded, to deal with more kinds
@@ -729,20 +784,20 @@
% Examples of this can be found in the template files |pdfx.xmp|, |pdfa.xmp|, |pdfe.xmp|.
%
% \subsubsection{Backward Compatibility}
-% The following macros are also recognised, for backward compatibility
+% The following macros are also recognised, for backward compatibility
% with earlier versions of the package.
% \begin{itemize}
% \item \starmd|\AuthoritativeDomain|: \hfill (|pdfx:AuthoritativeDomain|)\\
% specifies extra names (e.g., of companies) associated to the existence of the PDF or resource.
% \item |\Creator|: \hfill (|xmp:CreatorTool|)\\
-% synonymous with |\CreatorTool| which is usually handled automatically anyway,
+% synonymous with |\CreatorTool| which is usually handled automatically anyway,
% but can be over-ridden.
% \item |\Org|: synonymous with |\Publisher|.
% \item |\WebStatement|: synonymous with |\CopyrightURL|.
% \end{itemize}
-%
+%
% \subsubsection{more XMP metadata:}\label{sssec-xmp}
-%
+%
% \begin{itemize}
% \item \starmd|\Advisory|: \hfill (|xmp:Advisory|)\\
% noteworthy information; e.g., revision data or changes.
@@ -763,7 +818,7 @@
% with a PDF standard, and level of conformance.
% There are no separate user-macros to alter these.
% The first three dates are usually set to be identical.
-%
+%
% \begin{itemize}
% \item (|xmp:CreateDate|) : creation date\&time of the PDF.
% \item (|xmp:MetadataDate|) : creation date\&time of the Metadata for the PDF.
@@ -776,7 +831,7 @@
% \item (|pdfaid:conformance|) : |a|, |b| or |u| for PDF/A-??
% \item (|pdfuaid:part|) : currently |1| for PDF/UA-1
% \item (|pdfe:ISO_PDFEVersion|) : currently |1| for PDF/E-1
-% \item (|pdf:Version|) : |PDF/X-1|, |PDF/X-2| or |PDF/X-3|
+% \item (|pdf:Version|) : |PDF/X-1|, |PDF/X-2| or |PDF/X-3|
% \item (|pdfx:GTS_PDFXVersion|) : e.g., |PDF/X-1a:2003| up to PDF/X-3 ;
% but no year for PDF/X-4 and PDF/X-5 variants
% \item (|pdfx:GTS_PDFXConformance|) : e.g., |PDF/X-1a:2003| up to PDF/X-2
@@ -788,13 +843,13 @@
% \subsection{Symbols permitted in metadata}\label{ssec-symbols}
%
% Within the metadata, all printable ASCII characters except
-% |\|, |{|, |}| and |%| represent themselves. Also, all printable Unicode characters
-% from the basic multilingual plane (i.e., up to code point U+FFFF)
+% |\|, |{|, |}| and |%| represent themselves. Also, all printable Unicode characters
+% from the basic multilingual plane (i.e., up to code point U+FFFF)
% can be used directly with the UTF-8 encoding.
-% (Please note: encodings other than UTF-8 are not supported in the metadata,
-% except as arguments to `parser-macros'; see Section~\ref{ssec-xmplang}).
-% Consecutive whitespace characters are combined into a single space.
-% Whitespace after a macro such as |\copyright|, |\backslash|, or |\sep| is ignored.
+% (Please note: encodings other than UTF-8 are not supported in the metadata,
+% except as arguments to `parser-macros'; see Section~\ref{ssec-xmplang}).
+% Consecutive whitespace characters are combined into a single space.
+% Whitespace after a macro such as |\copyright|, |\backslash|, or |\sep| is ignored.
% Blank lines are not permitted.
% Moreover, the following markup can be used:
%
@@ -807,32 +862,32 @@
% \item |\copyright|: the copyright symbol \textcopyright
% \end{itemize}
% The macro |\sep| is permitted within |\Author|, |\Keywords|,
-% |\Publisher|, and other macros marked with \starmd\ above.
-% It's purpose is to separate multiple authors, keywords, etc.
-% to appear as separate list items appropriately and consistently
-% in the different ways that such information is represented
-% within the PDF file.
+% |\Publisher|, and other macros marked with \starmd\ above.
+% It's purpose is to separate multiple authors, keywords, etc.
+% to appear as separate list items appropriately and consistently
+% in the different ways that such information is represented
+% within the PDF file.
% The package takes care of this when |\sep| is used.
% For example, in the XMP metadata, it expands as |</rdf:li><rdf:li>| tagging.
%
% \subsubsection{PDF Info strings}\label{sssec-info}
-% When |\sep| is not used within its argument, the metadata from |\Title|,
-% |\Author| and |\Keywords| is also included in the PDF |/Info| dictionary.
+% When |\sep| is not used within its argument, the metadata from |\Title|,
+% |\Author| and |\Keywords| is also included in the PDF |/Info| dictionary.
% When this is the case, validation for the declared standard
% will occur only if the corresponding |/Info| item and XMP metadata field
-% convert to exactly the same Unicode string.
+% convert to exactly the same Unicode string.
% This cannot happen when |\sep| is used, so the |/Info| items are then not populated.
%
% Unfortunately not all PDF browsers (in particular, older ones and much Apple software)
% give ready access to the XMP metadata packet. Some authors want to see everything
-% using e.g., the Unix/Linux command: |pdfinfo -enc UTF-8 |. In fact there is the |-meta|
-% option to get the complete metadata packet (in UTF-8 encoding).
+% using e.g., the Unix/Linux command: |pdfinfo -enc UTF-8 |. In fact there is the |-meta|
+% option to get the complete metadata packet (in UTF-8 encoding).
% This can give more than what one wants, so use it as follows:
% \begin{decl}[]
% pdfinfo -meta <filename>.pdf \textbar\ grep 'dc:'
% \end{decl}
% to extract just the Dublin Core metadata fields.
-%
+%
% Another possibility is to \emph{not} use |\sep| with multiple authors and/or keywords.
% Instead replace it with simply `|, |'. We do not recommend doing this, as more sophisticated
% metadata tools will see the result as a single value, rather than multiple authors, say.
@@ -842,21 +897,21 @@
%
% \subsection{Macros permitted in metadata}\label{ssec-macros}
%
-% Other \TeX\ macros actually can be used, provided the author is very
+% Other \TeX\ macros actually can be used, provided the author is very
% careful and not ask for too-complicated \TeX\ or \LaTeX\ expansions
% into internal commands or non-character primitives; basically just accents,
% macros for Latin-based special characters, and simple textual replacements,
-% perhaps with a simple parameter. A special macro |\pdfxEnableCommands{...}|
+% perhaps with a simple parameter. A special macro |\pdfxEnableCommands{...}|
% is provided to help resolve difficulties that may arise.
%
% Here is an example\footnote{ Other use cases are discussed with regard to
-% Figures~\ref{arm-code} and \ref{math-wflow}.} of the use of |\pdfxEnableCommands|,
-% which occurs with the name of one of our authors {(H\`an Th\'{\^e} Thanh)}
+% Figures~\ref{arm-code} and \ref{math-wflow}.} of the use of |\pdfxEnableCommands|,
+% which occurs with the name of one of our authors {(H\`an Th\'{\^e} Thanh)}
% due to the doubly-accented letter \'{\^e}.
% It is usual to define a macro such as: |\def\thanh{H\`an Th\'{\^e} Thanh}|.
-% In previous versions of the |pdfx| package, use of such a macro
+% In previous versions of the |pdfx| package, use of such a macro
% within the |.xmpdata| file, in the |Copyright| information say,
-% could result in the accent macros expanding into internal primitives, such as
+% could result in the accent macros expanding into internal primitives, such as
% \begin{decl}[]
% | H\unhbox \voidb@x \bgroup \let \unhbox \voidb@x \setbox \@tempboxa ... |
% \end{decl}
@@ -867,7 +922,7 @@
% | \def\`#1{#1^^cc^80}\def\'#1{#1^^cc^81}\def\^#1{#1^^cc^82}}|
% \end{decl}
% \removelastskip\noindent
-% where the |^^cc^80|, |^^cc^81|, |^^cc^82| cause \TeX\ to generate the correct
+% where the |^^cc^80|, |^^cc^81|, |^^cc^82| cause \TeX\ to generate the correct
% UTF-8 bytes for `combining accent' characters.
%
% This works fine for metadata fields that appear just in the XMP packet.
@@ -878,22 +933,22 @@
% | \def\thanh{H^^c3^^a0n Th\eee Thanh}\def\eee{^^c3^^aa^^cc^^81 }}|
% \end{decl}
% \removelastskip\noindent
-% or the above with `\`a' typed directly as UTF-8 instead of |^^c3^^a0|
+% or the above with `\`a' typed directly as UTF-8 instead of |^^c3^^a0|
% and `\^e' in UTF-8 for |^^c3^^aa|.
% The reason for this is due to the |\pdfstringdef| command, which constructs
-% the accented latin letters as single combined characters \`a and \^e,
+% the accented latin letters as single combined characters \`a and \^e,
% without resorting to combining accents, wherever possible.
-% If the Metadata does not have the same, irrespective of Unicode normalisation,
+% If the Metadata does not have the same, irrespective of Unicode normalisation,
% then validation fails.
%
% With version (1.5.6) of the |pdfx| package, such difficulties
-% have been overcome, at least for characters used in Western European,
-% Latin-based languages. The input encoding used when reading the |.xmpdata|
-% file now includes interpretations of \TeX's usual accent commands to
+% have been overcome, at least for characters used in Western European,
+% Latin-based languages. The input encoding used when reading the |.xmpdata|
+% file now includes interpretations of \TeX's usual accent commands to
% produce the required UTF-8 byte sequences.
%
% \medskip
-% Since version (1.5.8) this input encoding was extended to include
+% Since version (1.5.8) this input encoding was extended to include
% macro definitions covering \LaTeX's internal character representation
% of other alphabets (e.g., extended Latin, Cyrillic, Greek, etc.).
% However this can become memory intensive, requiring a large number of
@@ -902,12 +957,12 @@
% be relevant. Currently these are as in Section~\ref{ssec-xmplang}.
%
% A significant portion of the Unicode Basic Plane characters can be covered
-% this way. Modules could even be provided for CJK character sets and
+% this way. Modules could even be provided for CJK character sets and
% mathematical symbols, etc. However, as this can become memory intensive,
% significant testing will be required before these become a standard
-% part of the |pdfx| package.
+% part of the |pdfx| package.
+%
%
-%
% \subsection{Color profiles}\label{sec-profiles}
%
% Most standards compliant PDF documents require a \emph{color
@@ -915,26 +970,26 @@
% determines precisely how the colors used in the document will be
% rendered when printed to a physical medium. This can be used to
% ensure that the document will look exactly the same, even when it is
-% printed on different printers, with different paper types, etc.
-% The inclusion of a color profile is necessary to make the document
+% printed on different printers, with different paper types, etc.
+% The inclusion of a color profile is necessary to make the document
% completely self-contained.
%
% Since most \LaTeX\ users are not graphics professionals and are not
% particularly picky about colors, the |pdfx| package includes default
-% profiles that will be included when nothing else is specified.
+% profiles that will be included when nothing else is specified.
% Therefore, the average user doesn't have to do anything
% special about color.
%
% For users who have a specific color profile they wish to use, it is
% possible to do so by including a |\setRGBcolorprofile| or
% |\setCMYKcolorprofile| command in the |.xmpdata| file. Note that
-% PDF/A and PDF/E require a profile of type `|mnrt|' (monitor) which
-% is usually an RGB color profile, while PDF/X and PDF/VT require type `|prtr|'
+% PDF/A and PDF/E require a profile of type `|mnrt|' (monitor) which
+% is usually an RGB color profile, while PDF/X and PDF/VT require type `|prtr|'
% (printer) which is usually a CMYK color profile; but valid documents
% can be created with the correct type designed for the other color space.
-% Use the following commands to specify an RGB or CMYK color profile,
+% Use the following commands to specify an RGB or CMYK color profile,
% respectively:
-%
+%
% \begin{decl}
% \defmacro{setRGBcolorprofile}\marg{filename}\marg{identifier}\marg{info
% string}\marg{registry URL}
@@ -944,7 +999,7 @@
% \end{decl}
% Within the arguments of these macros, the characters |<|, |>|, |&|,
% |^|, |_|, |#|, |$|, and |~| can be used as themselves, but
-% |%| must be escaped as |\%|.
+% |%| must be escaped as |\%|.
%
% From version (1.6) the default RGB and CMYK color profiles are now supplied
% using the |colorprofiles| package by Norbert Preining and Ross Moore~\cite{colorp}.
@@ -966,7 +1021,7 @@
% \url{http://www.color.org/iccprofile.xalter}.
%
% Alternatively, color profiles are shipped with many Adobe software
-% applications; these are then available for use also with non-Adobe
+% applications; these are then available for use also with non-Adobe
% software. Now the |pdfx| package includes coding to streamline
% inclusion of these profiles in PDF documents, or to specify
% them as `external' profiles, with PDF/X-4p and PDF/X-5pg variants.
@@ -977,17 +1032,17 @@
% Both define commands to use Color Profiles as follows.
% \begin{decl}[]
% \begin{tabular}{ll}
-% \texttt{\string\FOGRAXXXIX} & Coated FOGRA39 (ISO 12647-2:2004)\\
+% \texttt{\string\FOGRAXXXIX} & Coated FOGRA39 (ISO 12647-2:2004)\\
% \texttt{\string\SWOPCGATSI} & U.S. Web Coated (SWOP) v2\\
-% \texttt{\string\JapanColorMMICoated} & Japan Color 2001 Coated\\
-% \texttt{\string\JapanColorMMIUncoated} & Japan Color 2001 Uncoated\\
-% \texttt{\string\JapanColorMMIINewspaper} & Japan Color 2002 Newspaper\\
-% \texttt{\string\JapanWebCoatedAd} & Japan Web Coated (Ad)\\
-% \texttt{\string\CoatedGRACoL} & Coated GRACoL 2006 (ISO 12647-2:2004)\\
+% \texttt{\string\JapanColorMMICoated} & Japan Color 2001 Coated\\
+% \texttt{\string\JapanColorMMIUncoated} & Japan Color 2001 Uncoated\\
+% \texttt{\string\JapanColorMMIINewspaper} & Japan Color 2002 Newspaper\\
+% \texttt{\string\JapanWebCoatedAd} & Japan Web Coated (Ad)\\
+% \texttt{\string\CoatedGRACoL} & Coated GRACoL 2006 (ISO 12647-2:2004)\\
% \texttt{\string\SNAPCGATSII} & CGATS TR 002\\
% \texttt{\string\SWOPCGATSIII} & CGATS TR 003\\
% \texttt{\string\SWOPCGATSV} & CGATS TR 005\\
-% \texttt{\string\ISOWebCoated} & Web Coated FOGRA28 (ISO 12647-2:2004)\\
+% \texttt{\string\ISOWebCoated} & Web Coated FOGRA28 (ISO 12647-2:2004)\\
% \texttt{\string\ISOCoatedECI} & ISO Coated v2 (ECI)\\
% \texttt{\string\CoatedFOGRA} & Coated FOGRA27 (ISO 12647-2:2004)\\
% \texttt{\string\WebCoatedFOGRA} & Web Coated FOGRA28 (ISO 12647-2:2004)\\
@@ -999,18 +1054,18 @@
% As of the time of first compiling this list, only the first six of these result in PDFs
% which can validate with external profiles (i.e., for PDF/X-4p and PDF/X-5pg)
% using the then-current versions of Adobe Acrobat Pro software. It is unclear
-% whether the others (incl.\,\verb|\IFRAXXVI| and \verb|\IFRAXXX|) failed due
-% to incorrect data or problems in the validation software.
+% whether the others (incl.\,\verb|\IFRAXXVI| and \verb|\IFRAXXX|) failed due
+% to incorrect data or problems in the validation software.
% Since then, with updates to Acrobat Pro, almost all the others have been verified
% to work, except \verb|\IFRAXXX| which seems no longer available.
-% Thus these commands come with a `use at own risk' clause.
+% Thus these commands come with a `use at own risk' clause.
%
-% For `external' profiles, there is a command |\setEXTERNALprofile|, taking 9 arguments,
+% For `external' profiles, there is a command |\setEXTERNALprofile|, taking 9 arguments,
% that must be used. Consult |AdobeExternalProfiles.tex| for examples of its use.
-%
-% All but the last of the macros listed above can also be used for valid embedded profiles,
-% providing the corresponding files can be found.
-% The following macros are used to set the (absolute or relative) path,
+%
+% All but the last of the macros listed above can also be used for valid embedded profiles,
+% providing the corresponding files can be found.
+% The following macros are used to set the (absolute or relative) path,
% on the local operating system, to the location of color profile files.
% \begin{decl}
% \defmacro{pdfxSetRGBcolorProfileDir}\marg{path to RGB color profiles}\\
@@ -1020,7 +1075,7 @@
% One can use either a macro |\MacOSColordir| which expands
% into the path for system-provided profiles:
% \begin{decl}[]
-% |/System/Library/ColorSync/Profiles/|
+% |/System/Library/ColorSync/Profiles/|
% \end{decl}
% or the macro |\MacOSLibraryColordir| expanding to:
% \begin{decl}[]
@@ -1030,23 +1085,23 @@
% \begin{decl}[]
% |/Library/Application Support/Adobe/Color/Profiles/Recommended/|
% \end{decl}
-% Under Windows an available macro is |\WindowsColordir| which expands to:
+% Under Windows an available macro is |\WindowsColordir| which expands to:
% \begin{decl}[]
% |C:\Windows\System32\Spool\Drivers\Color/|
% \end{decl}
% being the common location for color profiles.
-% Use these within the \verb|.xmpdata| file as, e.g.,
+% Use these within the \verb|.xmpdata| file as, e.g.,
% \begin{decl}[]
% |\pdfxSetCMYKcolorProfileDir{\AdobeMacOSdir}|
% \end{decl}
% Authors may change the paths to suit their own circumstances, either
-% \emph{before} loading |pdfx.sty| or within the \verb|.xmpdata| file.
+% \emph{before} loading |pdfx.sty| or within the \verb|.xmpdata| file.
%
% PDF/A and PDF/E usually need an RGB profile, while PDF/X and PDF/VT
-% require a CMYK profile. It is possible to use a CMYK profile with PDF/A
+% require a CMYK profile. It is possible to use a CMYK profile with PDF/A
% or PDF/E by specifying |\setRGBcolorprofile{}{}{}{}| in the \verb|.xmpdata| file.
% Beware however, that with PDF/A any coloured hyperlink annotations can
-% cause a validation problem, as these are interpreted as RGB colours
+% cause a validation problem, as these are interpreted as RGB colours
% even when 4 components are given. This may be a bug in validators,
% as PDF specifies that the number of components should match the color space.
%
@@ -1070,44 +1125,44 @@
% \end{decl}
% which uses a profile that accompanies the \texttt{pdfaPilot} software from
% Callas Software Gmbh~\cite{pdfaPilot}.
-% The macro |\CallasMacOSpdfaPilotdir|, defined in the file \texttt{CallasColorProfiles.tex},
+% The macro |\CallasMacOSpdfaPilotdir|, defined in the file \texttt{CallasColorProfiles.tex},
% specifies the directory where this Custom profile is located, when installed under MacOS.
% One needs to |\input CallasColorProfiles.tex| \emph{before} loading the |pdfx| package.
-% Macros for other directories are also defined in this file.
+% Macros for other directories are also defined in this file.
%
% \subsection{Notes on the internal representation of metadata}
-%
+%
% Within the PDF file, metadata is deposited in two places: some data
% goes into the native PDF |/Info| dictionary, and some data goes into
% an XMP packet stored separately within the file. XMP is Adobe's
-% Extensible Metadata Platform~\cite{XMP-spec,XMP-ISO}, and is an XML-based format.
+% Extensible Metadata Platform~\cite{XMP-spec,XMP-ISO}, and is an XML-based format.
% See \href{http://www.adobe.com/devnet/xmp/}{Adobe XMP Development Center}
-% for more exhaustive information about XMP.
+% for more exhaustive information about XMP.
% An XMP Toolkit SDK which supports the GNU/Linux, Macintosh and Windows operating
% systems is also available under modified BSD licence.
%
% Some of the metadata, such as the author, title, and keywords, can be
-% stored \emph{both} in the XMP packet and in the |/Info| dictionary.
-% For the resulting file to be standards-compliant, the two copies of the data
+% stored \emph{both} in the XMP packet and in the |/Info| dictionary.
+% For the resulting file to be standards-compliant, the two copies of the data
% must be identical. This is taken care of automatically by the |pdfx| package,
% except when |\sep| is used to handle multiple entries, as discussed above
-% in \S\ref{sssec-info}. In such cases the string is not included within the |/Info|
+% in \S\ref{sssec-info}. In such cases the string is not included within the |/Info|
% dictionary. Note that this is in accordance with the PDF 2.0 specification~\cite{PDF20},
% which deprecates use of the |/Info| dictionary for such metadata.
-%
-% In principle, users can resort to alternate ways to create an XMP file
-% for inclusion in PDF. In this case, one should create a customised template
+%
+% In principle, users can resort to alternate ways to create an XMP file
+% for inclusion in PDF. In this case, one should create a customised template
% file |pdfa.xmp| or |pdfx.xmp| or |pdfe.xmp| (etc., depending on the PDF flavor)
-% containing the pre-defined data. This can be done by modifying the ones supplied
-% with the |pdfx| package. However, this is an error-prone process and is
-% \emph{not} recommended for most users.
+% containing the pre-defined data. This can be done by modifying the ones supplied
+% with the |pdfx| package. However, this is an error-prone process and is
+% \emph{not} recommended for most users.
% If there is a particular field of metadata that you need and that is not currently
% supported, please contact the package authors.
%
% |pdfx| makes use of the |xmpincl| package to include XMP data into
% the PDF. The documentation of |xmpincl| package may help interested
% users to understand the process of XMP data inclusion.
-%
+%
% \subsection{Tutorials and technical notes}
%
% A tutorial with step-by-step instructions for generating PDF/A files
@@ -1120,7 +1175,7 @@
% \url{http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Generating_PDF/A_compliant_PDFs_from_pdftex}.
% Be aware that this is based on use of an earlier version of the |pdfx| package,
% so some of the advice may have been superseded.
-%
+%
%
% \section[Installing]{Installing}
% The |pdfx.dtx| package is available on CTAN as usual, via
@@ -1131,24 +1186,24 @@
% For those wishing to do a manual installation, here are some notes.
% The file |pdfx.dtx| is a composite document of program code and
% documentation in \LaTeX{} format, in the tradition of \emph{literate
-% programming}. After having installed the package,
+% programming}. After having installed the package,
% to get the documentation that you are reading now,
-% run (\textsc{pdf})\LaTeX{} on the file |pdfx.dtx|.
+% run (\textsc{pdf})\LaTeX{} on the file |pdfx.dtx|.
% The resulting PDF should be valid as PDF/A-2u.
% Or better, use the included |Makefile|, which will also regenerate the index.
%
% To install the package, first extract the program code; i.e., the
-% file |pdfx.sty|, by running \LaTeX{} or \TeX{} on the file |pdfx.ins|.
+% file |pdfx.sty|, by running \LaTeX{} or \TeX{} on the file |pdfx.ins|.
% Create a directory named |pdfx| under |$TEXMF/tex/latex| and copy the files
-% |pdfx.sty|, |8bit.def|, |glyphtounicode-cmr.tex|, |glyphtounicode-ntx.tex| as well
+% |pdfx.sty|, |8bit.def|, |glyphtounicode-cmr.tex|, |glyphtounicode-ntx.tex| as well
% as the other |*.tex|, |l8u*-penc.def| and |*.xmp| files, into it. Then update
% \TeX's file database using the appropriate command for your distribution
% and operating system (such as |texhash| or |mktexlsr|, or similar).
-%
+%
% \subsection{Limitations and dependencies}
-%
-% The |pdfx.sty| package works with \pdftex\ and also Lua\TeX\ and Xe\TeX\
-% with some minor limitations.
+%
+% The |pdfx.sty| package works with \pdftex\ and also Lua\TeX\ and Xe\TeX\
+% with some minor limitations.
% It further depends on the following other packages.
% \begin{enumerate}
% \item |xmpincl| for insertion of metadata into PDF.
@@ -1159,28 +1214,28 @@
% hyperlinking, bookmarks, etc.
% \item |xcolor| for ensuring consistent use of the color model
% appropriate the PDF variant, within text and hyperlinks (when allowed).
-% \item |glyphtounicode.tex| (not Xe\LaTeX) maps glyph names
+% \item |glyphtounicode.tex| (not Xe\LaTeX) maps glyph names
% to corresponding Unicode code-points.
% \item |ifluatex| allowing coding specific to Lua\LaTeX.
% \item |ifxetex| allowing coding specific to Xe\LaTeX.
-% \item |luatex85| or |pdftexcmds| (Lua\TeX\ only) for access
+% \item |luatex85| or |pdftexcmds| (Lua\TeX\ only) for access
% to primitive commands using \pdftex\ macro names.
-% \item |stringenc| used to help generate proper bookmarks with transliterated input;
+% \item |stringenc| used to help generate proper bookmarks with transliterated input;
% e.g., with |\textLGR| or |\textARM| --- see Section~\ref{sssec-arm}.
% \end{enumerate}
% Other files and packages are loaded as sub-packages or as
-% configuration files for these. Since some of these packages
-% may be loaded by existing documents we provide here advice on
+% configuration files for these. Since some of these packages
+% may be loaded by existing documents we provide here advice on
% how to deal with potential loading and option conflicts.
%
% Firstly, it is best if |pdfx| is the first package loaded; e.g.,
-% directly after the |\documentclass| line. This is not a strict requirement,
+% directly after the |\documentclass| line. This is not a strict requirement,
% but it is worthwhile to deal with the metadata at the top of your \LaTeX\ source,
% allowing correct options to be loaded to cope with validation aspects.
%
% Secondly, replace |\usepackage[<options>]{hyperref}| with |\hypersetup{<options>}|.
-% This deals with most loading issues with the |hyperref| package.
-% Note that PDF/X is a format intended for printing.
+% This deals with most loading issues with the |hyperref| package.
+% Note that PDF/X is a format intended for printing.
% It forbids inclusion of hyperlinks and other actions, including via bookmarks.
% To produce a validating PDF/X document, |pdfx| overrides internal macros
% while keeping colors associated with link anchors.
@@ -1191,53 +1246,53 @@
% Furthermore, options to set metadata components (such as |pdfauthor|,
% |pdftitle|, |pdfsubject|, |pdfkeywords|, etc.) are disabled, since
% |pdfx| has already taken care of this information.
-%
+%
% Thirdly, conflicts with other packages may be dealt with by simply
% changing |\usepackage| to |\RequirePackage| within the document's
-% preamble. But this may not be possible when the |\usepackage|
+% preamble. But this may not be possible when the |\usepackage|
% or |\RequirePackage| command occurs within another package, or with
-% a specific set of options, thereby causing processing to stop.
-% Few packages have a command analogous to |\hypersetup|.
+% a specific set of options, thereby causing processing to stop.
+% Few packages have a command analogous to |\hypersetup|.
% Instead |\PassOptionsToPackage{<options>}{<package>}| can help.
% For |<options>| specify the ones associated with the loading yet to come.
% This can give a smooth processing run, but you'll need to check whether
% the results from those options have actually taken effect.
-% Some examples of this can be seen later, in Figures~\ref{koi8-code}
+% Some examples of this can be seen later, in Figures~\ref{koi8-code}
% and \ref{tldoc-pol}.
%
% \subsubsection{Limitations using Xe\LaTeX}\label{sssec-xetex}
%
-% To process a file using Xe\LaTeX, to produce a document that can
+% To process a file using Xe\LaTeX, to produce a document that can
% validate to a particular PDF standard, one need to use a command
% to run the \TeX\ engine, as follows.
% \begin{decl}[]
% |xelatex -shell-escape -output-driver="xdvipdfmx -z 0" <filename>.tex |
% \end{decl}
% The |-shell-escape| option allows a command-line task to be run,
-% which writes the creation-date \& time of the running job into
-% a small file on disk. This data, written in a specific format, is then
+% which writes the creation-date \& time of the running job into
+% a small file on disk. This data, written in a specific format, is then
% read by the job for inclusion into several metadata fields.
% This emulates the result of \pdftex's |\pdfcreationdate| primitive.
% As there are security implications in allowing arbitrary commands to be run,
-% this need for |-shell-escape| must be viewed as imposing a limitation on the
+% this need for |-shell-escape| must be viewed as imposing a limitation on the
% work-flows in which this can be safely used.
%
-% The |-output-driver="xdvipdfmx -z 0"| suppresses compression, which
+% The |-output-driver="xdvipdfmx -z 0"| suppresses compression, which
% is not allowed for the XMP metadata packet. Without this, the resulting PDF
-% may fail to pass validation tests.
+% may fail to pass validation tests.
%
% Xe\TeX\ is designed for processing UTF-8 input only. When presented
-% with \LaTeX\ source using a legacy encoding, such as |latin2| or |koi8-r|,
-% the input is accepted and a PDF produced. Yet there will be garbage
+% with \LaTeX\ source using a legacy encoding, such as |latin2| or |koi8-r|,
+% the input is accepted and a PDF produced. Yet there will be garbage
% characters corresponding to each character entered from the upper range
-% (128--255). This is evident in the PDF content and bookmarks;
+% (128--255). This is evident in the PDF content and bookmarks;
% yet |pdfx| produces the correct XMP metadata packet.
% So while the techniques explained later in Section~\ref{ssec-multi} are
% valid, the PDF itself does not contain correct content.
%
% Not all fonts, in particular Open-Type fonts (OTF), naturally come with
% mappings of the glyphs to Unicode code points. This is a requirement
-% with PDF/A, PDF/E and PDF/UA standards.
+% with PDF/A, PDF/E and PDF/UA standards.
% Use of such fonts can result in validation errors, such as:
% \begin{itemize}
% \item
@@ -1245,7 +1300,7 @@
% \item
% Type 2 CID font: CIDToGID map is invalid or missing.
% \end{itemize}
-%
+%
% If one has access to Adobe's |Acrobat Pro| software, then its |Preflight|
% utility can rewrite the uncompressed output from Xe\LaTeX\ into a valid
% PDF standard, using compression of the contents but not of the XMP packet.
@@ -1256,7 +1311,7 @@
%
% Lua\LaTeX\ can handle the OTF font issues mentioned for Xe\LaTeX,
% so can produce valid PDF/A documents where Xe\LaTeX\ fails.
-% However, since Lua\TeX\ expects all input source to be UTF8-encoded,
+% However, since Lua\TeX\ expects all input source to be UTF8-encoded,
% it cannot work at all with documents using older legacy encodings.
% Instead one gets error messages such as:
%\begin{decl}
@@ -1299,15 +1354,15 @@
% \item |l8uheb-penc.def| --- input macro declarations for Hebrew alphabet.
% \item |l8ulat-penc.def| --- input macro declarations for Latin 1--9 encodings.
% \item |l8umath-penc.def| --- input macro declarations for mathematical symbols.
-% \item |glyphtounicode-cmr.tex|, |glyphtounicode-ntx.tex| --- maps glyph names
+% \item |glyphtounicode-cmr.tex|, |glyphtounicode-ntx.tex| --- maps glyph names
% to corresponding Unicode for Computer Modern and other \TeX-specific fonts.
% \item |AdobeColorProfiles.tex| --- macros for inclusion of Adobe-supplied color profiles.
% \item |AdobeExternalProfiles.tex| --- macros for use of external color profiles.
% \item |CallasColorProfiles.tex| --- macros for profiles included with Callas pdfaPilot software.
% \end{itemize}
-%
+%
% \subsubsection{Documentation \& Examples}
-%
+%
% \begin{itemize}
% \item |README| --- usual top-level information.
% \item |manifest.txt| --- file list.
@@ -1315,9 +1370,9 @@
% \item |sample.tex|, |sample.xmpdata| --- a sample file with sample metadata.
% \item |small2e-pdfx.tex| --- sample file with included metadata.
% \end{itemize}
-%
+%
% \subsubsection{Sources}
-%
+%
% \begin{itemize}
% \item |src/pdfx.dtx| --- composite package and documentation.
% \item |src/pdfx.ins| --- installer batch file.
@@ -1326,10 +1381,10 @@
% \item |src/Makefile| --- a Makefile for building the documentation.
% \item |src/MANIFEST| --- list of files in this directory.
% \item |src/text89.def| --- used with Figure\,\ref{ex-arm} in the documentation.
-% \item |src/{arm-start,koi8-example,koi8-example2,latin2-example}.tex|
+% \item |src/{arm-start,koi8-example,koi8-example2,latin2-example}.tex|
% --- used in the documentation with figures showing example coding.
% \item |src/{TL-POL-meta,TL-RU-LICRs,TL-RU-metadata,TL-RU-toc,Armenian-example-UTF8,|\\
-% |armtex-meta,usage-meta,math-assign5}.png| --- screenshot images showing multilingual
+% |armtex-meta,usage-meta,math-assign5}.png| --- screenshot images showing multilingual
% and other metadata.
% \end{itemize}
%
@@ -1337,9 +1392,9 @@
%
% The package is released under the \LaTeX{} Project Public
% Licence. Bug reports, suggestions, feature requests, etc., may be
-% sent to the original authors at
+% sent to the original authors at
% \href{mailto:cvr@river-valley.org}{\ttfamily cvr@river-valley.org}
-% and/or
+% and/or
% \href{mailto:thanh@river-valley.org}{\ttfamily thanh@river-valley.org},
% or to the more recent contributors at
% \href{mailto:ross.moore@mq.edu.au}{\ttfamily ross.moore@mq.edu.au}
@@ -1348,9 +1403,9 @@
%
%
% \section[Multilingual and Technical Considerations]{Multilingual and Technical Considerations}\label{sec-meta}
-%
-% \TeX\ and \LaTeX\ have an on-going practice of including metadata within
-% the source files and package documentation. Usually this is done as comments
+%
+% \TeX\ and \LaTeX\ have an on-going practice of including metadata within
+% the source files and package documentation. Usually this is done as comments
% at the beginning of the file; such as the following from the English
% language version of the 2015 \TeX\ Live documentation\footnote{%
% found at |/usr/local/texlive/2016/texmf-dist/doc/texlive/texlive-en/|.}.
@@ -1360,10 +1415,10 @@
% |Michel Goossens, now maintained by Karl Berry and others.|\\
% |Public domain.|
% \end{decl}
-% This provides information, ideally suited for copyright metadata
-% fields, as in Section~\ref{sssec-copy}, as well as for |\Subject|
-% and |\CoverDate| from Section~\ref{sssec-publ}.
-%
+% This provides information, ideally suited for copyright metadata
+% fields, as in Section~\ref{sssec-copy}, as well as for |\Subject|
+% and |\CoverDate| from Section~\ref{sssec-publ}.
+%
% Also near the top of the file one finds front-matter content
% \begin{decl}[]
% |\title{%|\\
@@ -1374,7 +1429,7 @@
% | }|\\
% |\date{May 2015}|
% \end{decl}
-% which supplies metadata information for the commands |\Title|, |\Author|,
+% which supplies metadata information for the commands |\Title|, |\Author|,
% |\CoverDisplayDate| also from Section~\ref{sssec-publ}, and |\CopyrightURL|.
%
% Most of the hundreds of thousands, if not millions of documents prepared
@@ -1384,14 +1439,14 @@
% requirement, for PDFs to satisfy a standard that requires inclusion
% of metadata. This is especially so for government agencies and institutions
% receiving government funding, in several countries around the world.
-%
+%
% It is an aim of the |pdfx| to simplify the process of capturing and
-% including metadata within \LaTeX-produced PDFs, from both the author's
-% view and that of archivists. The extra features introduced with version
-% 1.5.8 take a large step in that direction.
+% including metadata within \LaTeX-produced PDFs, from both the author's
+% view and that of archivists. The extra features introduced with version
+% 1.5.8 take a large step in that direction.
% This includes the ability, described in the next subsection, to reliably
% include data presented in different text encodings, rather than being
-% restricted to UTF-8 only. It is a role of the software to make the
+% restricted to UTF-8 only. It is a role of the software to make the
% conversion, rather than rely on some 3rd party for a translation.
%
%
@@ -1400,40 +1455,40 @@
% A cursory search of the documentation (|.../texmf-dist/doc|) subtree
% of the forthcoming \TeX\,Live 2016 release reveals more than 730 different
% |.tex| or |.dtx| document sources which specify an input encoding,
-% via the |\usepackage[...]{inputenc}| command. Roughly 380 (a bit more
-% than half) declare UTF-8 as the input encoding.
-% Of the remainder there are $\approx 20$ other encodings specified,
-% covering a range of languages for at least part of their content.
+% via the |\usepackage[...]{inputenc}| command. Roughly 380 (a bit more
+% than half) declare UTF-8 as the input encoding.
+% Of the remainder there are $\approx 20$ other encodings specified,
+% covering a range of languages for at least part of their content.
% At some point in time, these documents may be required to have accurate
-% accompanying metadata, as part of conformance to a designated PDF
-% (or other) standard. There are libraries and archives that already must
+% accompanying metadata, as part of conformance to a designated PDF
+% (or other) standard. There are libraries and archives that already must
% meet such standards.
%
-% We have shown above, in Section~\ref{ssec-metadata}, how the |.xmpdata|
-% file can be inserted into the document source, which then ensures that
+% We have shown above, in Section~\ref{ssec-metadata}, how the |.xmpdata|
+% file can be inserted into the document source, which then ensures that
% metadata is reliably transferred along with the source itself.
% This seems a good strategy, but are there any problems with it,
% especially in a multi-lingual context?
-%
-% Modern editing software can require an encoding to be associated
-% with each file. This is what allows the correct characters to be shown,
-% from what is otherwise just a sequence of 8-bit bytes. The flip-side
-% is that arbitrary editing is not permitted. Add some UTF-8 data into
-% a file that is encoded as Latin-2 then try to save it. You may be asked
+%
+% Modern editing software can require an encoding to be associated
+% with each file. This is what allows the correct characters to be shown,
+% from what is otherwise just a sequence of 8-bit bytes. The flip-side
+% is that arbitrary editing is not permitted. Add some UTF-8 data into
+% a file that is encoded as Latin-2 then try to save it. You may be asked
% to specify a new encoding, or the application may even crash out entirely.
-% Maybe this happens \emph{accidentally}. It is not hard for a curly quote
-% (`) or endash (--) to be included; many editors have settings which can
+% Maybe this happens \emph{accidentally}. It is not hard for a curly quote
+% (`) or endash (--) to be included; many editors have settings which can
% do this with normal ascii input. Turn \emph{off} such settings.
%
% The approach that we advocate is that when editing to add metadata,
-% best is to:
+% best is to:
% \begin{enumerate}
-% \item
-% use the \emph{same encoding} as is specified for the file itself,
+% \item
+% use the \emph{same encoding} as is specified for the file itself,
% if known (as is usually the case);
-% \item
-% even if 1. is not possible, use Copy/Paste \emph{within} the document source
-% (e.g., for authors' names, addresses, affiliations, etc.) and from comments,
+% \item
+% even if 1. is not possible, use Copy/Paste \emph{within} the document source
+% (e.g., for authors' names, addresses, affiliations, etc.) and from comments,
% as in Section~\ref{sec-meta} above;
% \item
% avoid typing new characters, especially quotes and dashes, and be extra
@@ -1470,7 +1525,7 @@
% as could be produced for the Russian language version of the \TeX\ Live documentation,
% from coding as shown in Figure\,\ref{koi8-code}.
% The source file itself is actually encoded for KOI8-R, as indicated by the presence
-% of the code line |\usepackage[koi8-r]{inputenc}|,
+% of the code line |\usepackage[koi8-r]{inputenc}|,
% but is deliberately shown here encoded as |T1|~\cite[p.\,449]{LC2}.
% This difference is immaterial for checking the validity of the metadata.
% For example, the stream of upper (accents, etc.) characters within
@@ -1480,17 +1535,17 @@
% in the document, and from early subsection titles.
%
% It is the `parser' command/macro |\textKOI{ ... }| that indicates that the upper range
-% characters (having byte codes 128--255) are to be treated as KOI8-R characters,
+% characters (having byte codes 128--255) are to be treated as KOI8-R characters,
% rather than as part of UTF-8 byte sequences. It works by examining each byte in sequence,
-% and returning the appropriate UTF-8 2-byte sequence for the required cyrillic character.
-% This happens during the processing of data from |\jobname.xmpdata| for fleshing-out
+% and returning the appropriate UTF-8 2-byte sequence for the required cyrillic character.
+% This happens during the processing of data from |\jobname.xmpdata| for fleshing-out
% the XMP metadata packet to be included within the final PDF/A document.
%
% The `parser' macros defined for various encodings, are given in Figure\,\ref{parsers}.
-% In Section\,\ref{ssec-xmplang} the package options are given
+% In Section\,\ref{ssec-xmplang} the package options are given
% for loading the appropriate support for desired languages or alphabets.
% Support for other encodings can be added, if there proves to be a need.
-%
+%
%\begin{figure}[ht]
% \centering
% \begin{tabular}{lll}\hline
@@ -1519,13 +1574,13 @@
% \caption{How to see LICRs in the \texttt{.log} window.}\label{koi8-LICR}
% \end{figure}
%
-% With encoded characters marked in this way with a `parser' macro,
+% With encoded characters marked in this way with a `parser' macro,
% it is actually possible to mix UTF-8 metadata with other bytes;
% provided, of course, you have an editor that allows such a file
% to be created and saved. On the other hand, if you are unhappy with mixing
% content having different encodings, then there is another way, based upon
-% \LaTeX's LICR macros~\cite[\S\,7.11]{LC2} for representing accented
-% and non-latin characters.
+% \LaTeX's LICR macros~\cite[\S\,7.11]{LC2} for representing accented
+% and non-latin characters.
% These are normally hidden away (`I $=$ Internal') but in fact can be seen
% within auxiliary files, such as |.aux| and |.toc|, |.lof| and |.lot|.
% This is how \LaTeX\ stores the knowledge of such characters for use in
@@ -1548,20 +1603,20 @@
% \caption{How to get desired LICRs into the \texttt{.toc} file.}\label{koi8-toc}
% \end{figure}
%
-% Figure~\ref{koi8-LICR} shows how to see this.
+% Figure~\ref{koi8-LICR} shows how to see this.
% The document source in the lower portion clearly shows the cyrillic
% input, whereas the |.log| messages in a command-line window above
% reveal the LICR representation. A command |\showLICRs| is available
% with |pdfx.sty| version 1.5.8, specifically to allow this.
-% Now the LICR representation can be copied directly from the |.log| file,
+% Now the LICR representation can be copied directly from the |.log| file,
% modulo slight difficulties due to the way long lines are broken.
% As this representation is entirely with ASCII characters, it should not
% cause any conflict with any UTF-8 metadata that you want within the same file.
% The |.xmpdata| file might now look as in Figure~\ref{koi8-code2}.
% Although very verbose, this should be resistant to any corruption due to
-% character encodings, and produces the same result within the PDF,
+% character encodings, and produces the same result within the PDF,
% as in Figure~\ref{koi8-meta}.
-%
+%
% Alternatively one can exploit the |.toc| file, using \LaTeX's command
% |\addtocontents|, as shown in Figure~\ref{koi8-toc}.
% After processing the file, you can copy the LICR representations out
@@ -1570,24 +1625,24 @@
%
% Of course once you have harvested the metadata in this format, remove
% or comment-out those extra |\showLICRs| to get uninterrupted processing.
-% Similarly comment-out the extra |\addtocontents| lines, else the real
+% Similarly comment-out the extra |\addtocontents| lines, else the real
% Table-of-Contents will become corrupted with unwanted entries.
% A couple more \LaTeX\ processing runs should restore the PDF to the
% way you want it.
%
% \subsubsection[Metadata with Polish]{Metadata with Polish}\label{sssec-pol}
-%
-% The next example has upper-range bytes intended to represent Latin-2 encoded
-% characters, as used in Polish.
-% With the \LaTeX\ source starting as in Figure~\ref{tldoc-pol},
+%
+% The next example has upper-range bytes intended to represent Latin-2 encoded
+% characters, as used in Polish.
+% With the \LaTeX\ source starting as in Figure~\ref{tldoc-pol},
% the resulting metadata is shown in Figure~\ref{tlmeta-pol}.
-%
+%
%\begin{figure}[htb]
% \centering
% \includegraphics[scale=.45]{TL-POL-meta}
%\caption{Metadata generated from the coding shown in Figure~\ref{tldoc-pol}
-% for the Polish version of \TeX\ Live 2015 documentation, showing Latin-2 encoded
-% characters. The document is valid for PDF/A-2, after having been processed with
+% for the Polish version of \TeX\ Live 2015 documentation, showing Latin-2 encoded
+% characters. The document is valid for PDF/A-2, after having been processed with
% pdf-\LaTeX.}\label{tlmeta-pol}
%\end{figure}
%
@@ -1597,13 +1652,13 @@
% \input{latin2-example}
%\end{decl}
% }%
-%\caption{Start of the \LaTeX\ source for the Polish version of \TeX\ Live
-% documentation. Although Latin-2 encoded, the bytes are shown here using
+%\caption{Start of the \LaTeX\ source for the Polish version of \TeX\ Live
+% documentation. Although Latin-2 encoded, the bytes are shown here using
% \LaTeX's \texttt{T1} encoding \cite[p.\,449]{LC2}.}\label{tldoc-pol}
%\end{figure}
%
% Here the `parser macro' is |\textLII|, which can be seen in Figure~\ref{tldoc-pol}
-% to surround either complete metadata entries, or just those parts containing
+% to surround either complete metadata entries, or just those parts containing
% polish accented (or other) characters in entries that also contain english words.
% The macro |\textLF| provides a line-feed character for the UTF-8 output.
%
@@ -1619,38 +1674,38 @@
% Let's understand better how this example was created. There are three files involved.
%\begin{itemize}
% \item |pdfx.dtx|, the source for this documentation, open in an editor with
-% encoding declared as UTF-8;
+% encoding declared as UTF-8;
% \item |texlive-pl.tex| the Polish documentation for \TeX\ Live, open in the
% same editor with Latin-2 encoding;
% \item |latin2-example.tex| which starts life as an empty file on disk.
%\end{itemize}
% \noindent
-% This latter file must be opened in the editor, with encoding declared as
+% This latter file must be opened in the editor, with encoding declared as
% Latin-2 (ISO-8859-2).
% Next the preamble is copied from |texlive-pl.tex| and pasted into |latin2-example.tex|
% which is then saved to disk. Further editing is done to |latin2-example.tex| to
% add verbatim markers (\texttt{$\vert$...$\vert$}) and adjust line lengths for display
-% within Figure~\ref{tldoc-pol}. This file's contents is included as part of the
-% documentation via |\input{latin2-example}| within an environment that handles
+% within Figure~\ref{tldoc-pol}. This file's contents is included as part of the
+% documentation via |\input{latin2-example}| within an environment that handles
% presentation aspects, and (since 2018) declares |\UseRawInputEncoding|.
%
% What \emph{cannot} be done is to paste the preamble content directly into |pdfx.dtx|.
-% Consider what would then happen, using `t{\l}umaczy' (`translators', on line 10
-% following `UWAGA'). This word shows correctly in the Latin-2 encoded files.
-% It was typeset here using |\l| for the `\l' letter, having Unicode code-point
-% |Ux0142| (so UTF-8 byte pair |"C5|\,|"82|).
-% However, it occurs at slot |"B3| within Latin-2 encoding.
-% In the |T1| font encoding \cite[p.\,449]{LC2} the character glyph name
-% for slot |"B3| is |/scedilla|, which is what shows in Figure~\ref{tldoc-pol}.
-% When the `\l' is pasted directly into a UTF-8 file and shown verbatim,
-% the result is the pair of glyphs |"C5| (|/Aring|) and |"82| (|/Cacute|);
+% Consider what would then happen, using `t{\l}umaczy' (`translators', on line 10
+% following `UWAGA'). This word shows correctly in the Latin-2 encoded files.
+% It was typeset here using |\l| for the `\l' letter, having Unicode code-point
+% |Ux0142| (so UTF-8 byte pair |"C5|\,|"82|).
+% However, it occurs at slot |"B3| within Latin-2 encoding.
+% In the |T1| font encoding \cite[p.\,449]{LC2} the character glyph name
+% for slot |"B3| is |/scedilla|, which is what shows in Figure~\ref{tldoc-pol}.
+% When the `\l' is pasted directly into a UTF-8 file and shown verbatim,
+% the result is the pair of glyphs |"C5| (|/Aring|) and |"82| (|/Cacute|);
% \emph{viz.} {\UseRawInputEncoding |tłumaczy|}.
%
% As with Figure~\ref{koi8-code} it is not important that the correct characters
% are shown here, but that the metadata in |\jobname.xmpdata| corresponds to what
% is used on the titlepage of the PDF; e.g., the contents of |\Title| and |\title|,
% |\Author| and |\author|, etc.
-%
+%
%
% \subsubsection[Metadata with Greek]{Metadata with Greek}\label{sssec-grk}
%
@@ -1674,7 +1729,7 @@
%|% ... |\\
%| |\\
%|\providecommand{\pdfxopts}{a-2u,LGRxmp,LATxmp}|\\
-%|\begin{filecontents*}{\jobname.xmpdata}|\\
+%|\begin{filecontents}[force]{\jobname.xmpdata}|\\
%|\Title{Writing Greek with the "greek" option of the "babel" package}|\\
%{\color{verbcolor}\texttt{\string\Author\{Apostolos Syropoulos\string\sep\ G\"unter Milde\}}}\\
%|\Subject{This document describes the use of the Latin transliteration for Greek that is |\\
@@ -1690,11 +1745,11 @@
%| \textaristerikeraia\textAlpha\textSampi\textQoppa\textZeta\textdexiakeraia}}|\\
%|\CoverDate{1997-10-15}|\\
%|\CoverDisplayDate{October 15, 1997}|\\
-%|\Copyright{This file is part of the Babel system.\textLF This file may be distributed and/or|\\
+%|\Copyright{This file is part of the Babel system.\textLF This file may be distributed and/or|\\
%| modified under the conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 |\\
%| of this license or (at your option) any later version.}|\\
%|\CopyrightURL{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt}|\\
-%|\end{filecontents*}|\\
+%|\end{filecontents}|\\
%|%|\\
%|\documentclass[11pt]{article}|\\
%|\usepackage[\pdfxopts]{pdfx}[2016/04/13]|\\
@@ -1725,70 +1780,70 @@
%
% Prior to proper support for UTF-8 input, a method for preparing document source
% for the modern Greek language (and also for polytonic Greek), involved the use
-% of LGR encoded fonts. Such a font has Greek (instead of Latin) letters in the
+% of LGR encoded fonts. Such a font has Greek (instead of Latin) letters in the
% slots for |a-zA-Z|, see~\cite[\S9.4.2]{LC2}. Thus ordinary ASCII letters are used
% to produce the Greek characters; the mapping of ASCII to Greek is referred to as
-% a `transliteration' scheme. It serves as \emph{both} an input encoding, and as
-% a font encoding. Accents and diacritic marks are provided through ligatures
-% built-in to the fonts. Various documents can be found on the web\footnote{e.g.,
+% a `transliteration' scheme. It serves as \emph{both} an input encoding, and as
+% a font encoding. Accents and diacritic marks are provided through ligatures
+% built-in to the fonts. Various documents can be found on the web\footnote{e.g.,
% \url{http://milde.users.sourceforge.net/LGR/}} and
% within \TeX\ Live distributions\footnote{%
-% TeXLive: \textcolor{urlcolor}{\texttt{.../2016/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel-greek/}}}.
+% TeXLive: \textcolor{urlcolor}{\texttt{.../2016/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel-greek/}}}.
%
% Indeed the current maintainer G\"unther Milde states
% ``The LGR transliteration does not work for PDF metadata''.
% This is because there is no translation of LGR input into \LaTeX\ LICRs,
% as happens with say |\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}| for UTF-8 input,
-% or when upper 8-bit characters are present using |\usepackage[iso-8859-7]{inputenc}|.
-% With these, LICRs such as |\textAlpha|, |\textOmicron|, \dots, |\textomega|
+% or when upper 8-bit characters are present using |\usepackage[iso-8859-7]{inputenc}|.
+% With these, LICRs such as |\textAlpha|, |\textOmicron|, \dots, |\textomega|
% are produced, which result in the correct characters for metadata and bookmarks,
% perhaps employing Unicode `combining' characters for accented letters.
% Using |pdfx| the UTF-8 characters can be put directly into the |.xmpdata| file;
% LICRs are interpreted provided the |grkxmp| loading option has been specified.
-%
-% Using the methods of |pdfx| the metadata difficulty is remedied, as can be seen in
-% Figure~\ref{greek-meta} using coding as shown in Figure~\ref{greek-code}. This requires
-% the |LGRxmp| option and |\textLGR| `parser' macro. The original document source,
+%
+% Using the methods of |pdfx| the metadata difficulty is remedied, as can be seen in
+% Figure~\ref{greek-meta} using coding as shown in Figure~\ref{greek-code}. This requires
+% the |LGRxmp| option and |\textLGR| `parser' macro. The original document source,
% called |usage.tex|, can be found in the directory specified in the footnote below.
% As this document is essentially an English description of how to use LGR for Greek,
-% we have used the `Keywords' field to provide examples of such usage.
-% Since a macro |\textgreek| can be used for greek portions within such documents,
+% we have used the `Keywords' field to provide examples of such usage.
+% Since a macro |\textgreek| can be used for greek portions within such documents,
% this macro name is aliased to |\textLGR| within the context where metadata is processed.
-% Furthermore, parsing using |\textLGR| generates correct pre-composed characters
+% Furthermore, parsing using |\textLGR| generates correct pre-composed characters
% for letters with accents or diacritics. Bookmarks can also be generated from
% LGR input, using a technique described in Section~\ref{sssec-arm}.
%
% \bigskip\noindent
% The features available with different loading options are summarised here.
% \begin{itemize}
-% \item
+% \item
% no option: all metadata in |.xmpdata| file is in UTF-8 (incl. ASCII)
% \item
-% |grkxmp|: LICRs can be present; e.g. |\textAlpha|, |\textOmega|, etc.
+% |grkxmp|: LICRs can be present; e.g. |\textAlpha|, |\textOmega|, etc.
% \item
% |LGRxmp|: supports LGR-encoded input and |ISO-8859-7| upper range characters,
-% using the |\textLGR| `parser' macro.
+% using the |\textLGR| `parser' macro.
% \end{itemize}
-% With |LGRxmp| specified, the features of |grkxmp| are also available; so any
+% With |LGRxmp| specified, the features of |grkxmp| are also available; so any
% lower-listed option allows data to be mixed with that for higher-listed ones.
%
%
% The final piece to get validation for PDF/A from LGR input, is to specify
-% a Unicode point for the `|v|' used only in the strong `|sv|' ligature to obtain
-% a non-final `sigma' typeset in isolation.
+% a Unicode point for the `|v|' used only in the strong `|sv|' ligature to obtain
+% a non-final `sigma' typeset in isolation.
%\begin{decl}[]
% |\pdfglyphtounicode{internalchar2}{200D}|
%\end{decl}
% This gives an interpretation as `zero-width joiner'.
% There are two instances of this within |usage.tex|. Copy/Paste works as desired.
-% Using \pdftex\ the above command is done automatically.
-% Drivers, such as Xe\LaTeX\ lacking an implementation of |\pdfglyphtounicode|,
+% Using \pdftex\ the above command is done automatically.
+% Drivers, such as Xe\LaTeX\ lacking an implementation of |\pdfglyphtounicode|,
% can fail to produce a valid PDF due to this rather minor deficiency.
-%
+%
% Greek numerals, using |\greeknumeral| or |\Greeknumeral| cannot work directly within
% a |.xmpdata| file. However if such is desired, the following technique allows
-% correct LICRs to be found for use in the metadata.
-% At any convenient place within the \LaTeX\ source; e.g., near where the required
+% correct LICRs to be found for use in the metadata.
+% At any convenient place within the \LaTeX\ source; e.g., near where the required
% number is used, insert coding such as:
% \begin{decl}[]
% |{\pdfxGreeknumeralsHack \textgreek{\edef\num{\greeknumeral{1997}}\show\num}}%|
@@ -1820,7 +1875,7 @@
%
% \def\ArmTeX{Arm\kern -0.15em\TeX}%
% \subsubsection[Metadata with Armenian]{Metadata with Armenian}\label{sssec-arm}
-%
+%
% \begin{figure}[!htbp]
% \centering
% \includegraphics[scale=.42]{armtex-meta}
@@ -1840,20 +1895,20 @@
% \caption{Enriched \LaTeX\ source for the Armenian version of the \ArmTeX\ manual,
% with added metadata demonstrating the \ArmTeX\ transliteration scheme for \texttt{OT6} encoding.
% Also shown is coding used to produce bookmarks from the transliteration.}\label{arm-code}
-% \end{figure}
-%
+% \end{figure}
+%
% The \ArmTeX\ package\footnote{documentation: %
% TeXLive: \textcolor{urlcolor}{\texttt{.../2016/texmf-dist/doc/generic/armenian/}}}
-% provides the method to typeset Armenian, with input being specified in various ways
-% including a transliteration scheme from ASCII input. This transliteration is directed
+% provides the method to typeset Armenian, with input being specified in various ways
+% including a transliteration scheme from ASCII input. This transliteration is directed
% at the use of the |OT6| encoding, developed for this purpose.
% Each way is supported by |pdfx.sty| with appropriate loading options, similar
-% to the support for Greek~(see Section~\ref{sssec-grk}).
+% to the support for Greek~(see Section~\ref{sssec-grk}).
% \begin{itemize}
-% \item
-% no option: all metadata in |.xmpdata| file is in UTF-8 (incl. ASCII)
% \item
-% |armxmp|: using LICR-like macro names; e.g. |\armAyb|, |\armsha|, |\armfe| etc.
+% no option: all metadata in |.xmpdata| file is in UTF-8 (incl. ASCII)
+% \item
+% |armxmp|: using LICR-like macro names; e.g. |\armAyb|, |\armsha|, |\armfe| etc.
% \item
% |AR8xmp|: using the \ArmTeX\ (|OT6|) transliteration scheme or with upper-range
% characters in |ArmSCII8| encoding, using the `parser' macro |\textARM|.
@@ -1866,9 +1921,9 @@
% implemented in the |OT6|-encoded font, or careful parsing of the input into
% LICR-like macros.
% \LaTeX\ source\footnote{TeXLive: %
-% \textcolor{urlcolor}{\texttt{.../2016/texmf-dist/doc/generic/armenian/examples/latex/}}}
-% for the \ArmTeX\ documentation is available in both English and Armenian.
-% Figure~\ref{arm-meta} shows the result of enriching the Armenian version with relevant
+% \textcolor{urlcolor}{\texttt{.../2016/texmf-dist/doc/generic/armenian/examples/latex/}}}
+% for the \ArmTeX\ documentation is available in both English and Armenian.
+% Figure~\ref{arm-meta} shows the result of enriching the Armenian version with relevant
% metadata, using coding as shown in Figure~\ref{arm-code}.
%
% As in earlier examples, that metadata has come from the extensive comments at the head
@@ -1883,18 +1938,18 @@
% process, as follows.
% \begin{enumerate}
% \item
-% conversion of transliterated source into UTF-8.
+% conversion of transliterated source into UTF-8.
% This is done as the |.xmpdata| file is processed, using |\pdfxEnableCommands|
-% to make global definitions; e.g,
+% to make global definitions; e.g,
%\begin{decl}[]
-% |\xdef\sectAtitle{\textARM{Nerac'uthyun}}|
+% |\xdef\sectAtitle{\textARM{Nerac'uthyun}}|
%\end{decl}
% capturing the section title in the form supplied in the \LaTeX\ source.
-% This can be seen in Figure~\ref{arm-code}, near the end of the |{filecontents*}|
+% This can be seen in Figure~\ref{arm-code}, near the end of the |{filecontents}|
% environment, and at the bottom where the |\section| command would occur.
% \item
% conversion of the UTF-8 representation into |UTF16-be|, suitable for bookmark
-% strings within the PDF file. With \pdftex\ thishis is done using
+% strings within the PDF file. With \pdftex\ this is done using
% |\StringEncodingConvert| from Heiko Oberdiek's |stringenc.sty| package.
% Lua\LaTeX\ and Xe\LaTeX\ can use the UTF-8 representation directly.
% \item
@@ -1909,8 +1964,8 @@
% \end{decl}
% Now |\pdfxBookmark| first checks that the macro passed as the 2nd argument
% actually exists. If it does not, an error message is given and upon continuation
-% would just do |\section{Nerac'uthyun}| as normal.
-% When it does exist, then step 2 is done (by \pdftex) storing the result as |\pdfx@temp|.
+% would just do |\section{Nerac'uthyun}| as normal.
+% When it does exist, then step 2 is done (by \pdftex) storing the result as |\pdfx@temp|.
% With Lua\TeX\ and Xe\TeX, |\pdfx@temp| stores a copy of the UTF-8 data.
% Then the commands needing to be executed are essentially
%\begin{decl}[]
@@ -1921,9 +1976,9 @@
% so that the correct section heading is displayed on the page,
% but when |\sectAtitle| is processed to create a bookmark it is replaced
% by the pre-prepared contents of |\pdfx@temp|.
-% There are some technicalities\footnote{In fact a small change is made
-% to how \textcolor{verbcolor}{\texttt{\string\@@writetorep}} is used.}
-% to make this work cleanly,
+% There are some technicalities\footnote{In fact a small change is made
+% to how \textcolor{verbcolor}{\texttt{\string\@@writetorep}} is used.}
+% to make this work cleanly,
% as just doing these commands would interfere with other uses of |\pdfstringdef|.
% In case a long sectioning command has an optional argument, or a $*$-variant
% is needed, then include it this way.
@@ -1933,32 +1988,32 @@
%
%
% \subsubsection[Other Languages]{Other Languages}\label{sssec-other}
-%
+%
% There is support for Metadata using characters from other languages,
-% with corresponding loading options, as follows.
+% with corresponding loading options, as follows.
% \begin{itemize}
-% \item |arbxmp| : Arabic;
+% \item |arbxmp| : Arabic;
% via LICRs |\textarabicalef|, |\textarabicqaf|,\\ |\textarabicaleflowerhamza|, etc.
-% \item |devxmp| : Devanagari;
+% \item |devxmp| : Devanagari;
% via LICRs |\textdevanagaria|, |\textdevanagarivocalicr|,\\ |\textdevanagaricandrabindu|, etc.
% \item |hebxmp| : Hebrew;
% via LICRs |\hebalef|, |\hebsamekh|, |\hebfinalpe| and accent marks |\segol|, |\qubuts|, etc.
-% \item |vnmxmp| : Vietnamese;
+% \item |vnmxmp| : Vietnamese;
% via LICRs |\ABREVE|, |\OCIRCUMFLEX|, |\uhorn| etc. and the combinations of multiple accents
% applied as usual via |\'|, |\`|, |\^|, etc.
% \end{itemize}
% The LICRs include support mapping accented letters to precomposed glyphs, falling back on
% `combining characters' only in unusual situations. Special input conventions or methods,
-% such as transliteration schemes, are \emph{not yet} supported.
-% Indeed, these options are largely untested, so any difficulties encountered should
+% such as transliteration schemes, are \emph{not yet} supported.
+% Indeed, these options are largely untested, so any difficulties encountered should
% be reported to the package authors. Requests to support extra input methods or other
% language blocks should also be directed to the authors, along with pointers to where
-% the desired input methods are fully described.
+% the desired input methods are fully described.
% Sample `real-world' documents would be greatly appreciated.
%
%
% \subsection[L8U pseudo-encoding]{L8U pseudo-encoding}\label{ssec-L8U}
-%
+%
% To understand how |pdfx| handles the translation into UTF-8 of input that is not already
% in that format, we'll briefly discuss \LaTeX's font-encoding mechanism, which is the
% basis for LICR macros~\cite[\S\,7.11]{LC2}. As an example, consider the macro |\textgamma|
@@ -1973,32 +2028,32 @@
% |ucs/data/uni-3.def:\uc@dclc{947}{default}{\textgamma}%|
% \end{decl}
% Here the |\uc@dclc| commands associate UTF-8 input of |Ux0263| (IPA small letter gamma)
-% and |Ux03B3| (Greek small letter gamma) internally with |\textgamma|,
+% and |Ux03B3| (Greek small letter gamma) internally with |\textgamma|,
% whereas the others deal with output formats\footnote{Whereas {\color{verbcolor}\texttt{ucs.sty}}
-% handles UTF-8 input, mapping it to LICRs, with {\color{verbcolor}\texttt{pdfx.sty}}
+% handles UTF-8 input, mapping it to LICRs, with {\color{verbcolor}\texttt{pdfx.sty}}
% we need the reverse mapping into UTF-8, not just from LICRs but also from legacy
-% 8-bit encodings and transliteration schemes.}.
-% In four of these examples there is a number, which refers to a position in an `encoding vector'
+% 8-bit encodings and transliteration schemes.}.
+% In four of these examples there is a number, which refers to a position in an `encoding vector'
% for the particular font used to place the character onto the printable page.
% For example |LGR| refers to greek fonts, encoded as explained in Section~\ref{sssec-grk}.
% IPA phonetics use the |T3| encoding, so |\textgamma| refers to a character
% from a different Unicode block.
%
% With two of these cases there is no specific font.
-% For example, |PU| is used to create bookmark strings,
-% and other PDF string inclusions, using |\pdfstringdef| from the |hyperref| package.
-% With |greek-euenc.def| designed for Xe\TeX\ and Lua\TeX, the encoding can be variable,
-% with the output bytes being those for the UTF-8 encoding of $\gamma$, namely |^^ce^^b3|,
-% shown here as the |T1|-encoded pair |γ|.
-% The term `pseudo-encoding' has been coined by the \LaTeX\ team.
-% Although there is no actual font to determine the encoding, to an author there is essentially
-% no difference in how corresponding macros can be used to get a character placed into
-% an appropriate structure within the PDF.
+% For example, |PU| is used to create bookmark strings,
+% and other PDF string inclusions, using |\pdfstringdef| from the |hyperref| package.
+% With |greek-euenc.def| designed for Xe\TeX\ and Lua\TeX, the encoding can be variable,
+% with the output bytes being those for the UTF-8 encoding of $\gamma$, namely |^^ce^^b3|,
+% shown here as the |T1|-encoded pair |γ|.
+% The term `pseudo-encoding' has been coined by the \LaTeX\ team.
+% Although there is no actual font to determine the encoding, to an author there is essentially
+% no difference in how corresponding macros can be used to get a character placed into
+% an appropriate structure within the PDF.
%
% Thus there are 4 output forms for this character,
% and we've not even considered how $\gamma$ is used in mathematics!
% To handle these concurrently, one has internally-defined control-sequence names
-% \begin{decl}[]
+% \begin{decl}[]
% |\LGR\textgamma=\char"67| \qquad where $6\times 16 + 7 = 103$\\
% |\T3\textgamma=\char"47| \qquad where $4\times 16 + 7 = 71$\\
% |\PU\textgamma=\long macro:->\83\263|\\
@@ -2006,12 +2061,12 @@
% \end{decl}
% where the 2nd `\textbackslash' is part of the name\footnote{%
% obtained using {\color{verbcolor}%
-% \texttt{\string\csname\space LGR\string\string\string\textgamma\string\endcsname}}.}.
+% \texttt{\string\csname\space LGR\string\string\string\textgamma\string\endcsname}}.}.
% The latter macro is explained below.
% To use the specific version of the macro, \LaTeX\ maintains a `font-encoding'
% parameter, set using |\fontencoding{...}| local to the surrounding environment grouping.
%
-% To the above declarations of |\textgamma|, to deal with conversion to UTF-8,
+% To the above declarations of |\textgamma|, to deal with conversion to UTF-8,
% the |pdfx| package adds the following declarations when the |LGRxmp| option is used.
% \begin{decl}[]
% |pdfx/l8ugrk.def:\DeclareTextCommand{\textgamma}{L8U}{γ}|\\
@@ -2019,11 +2074,11 @@
% |pdfx/l8ugrk.def:\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\textLGRenc}{L8U}{g}{γ} |\\
% |pdfx/l8ugrk.def:\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\textLGRenc}{L8U}{^^e3}{γ}|
% \end{decl}
-% The pseudo-encoding name |L8U| indicates \textbf{L}ocal conversion into UTF-\textbf{8} \textbf{U}nicode,
-% as required for metadata, using |pdfx.sty|. Currently this pseudo-encoding is used in one place only;
+% The pseudo-encoding name |L8U| indicates \textbf{L}ocal conversion into UTF-\textbf{8} \textbf{U}nicode,
+% as required for metadata, using |pdfx.sty|. Currently this pseudo-encoding is used in one place only;
% during the interpretation of information supplied through the |\jobname.xmpdata| file.
% This happens as part of the |pdfx| package, \emph{before} it uses |xmpincl.sty|.
-% Such specificity justifies being called a `Local' encoding.
+% Such specificity justifies being called a `Local' encoding.
% However, other tasks may emerge requiring on-the-fly conversion to UTF-8.
% In this case all the functionality of this pseudo-encoding could be shifted into a separate package,
% and the name changed to reflect this more general usage.
@@ -2031,7 +2086,7 @@
% is possibly a sufficient reason to have a separate package. Another possibility is to
% generate on-the-fly creation of UTF-8 strings, to be sent to Xe\TeX\ or Lua\TeX\ running
% as a slave process to generate images of string using OTF fonts, which \pdftex\ currently
-% cannot handle. The result would then be imported back into the running job as an image.
+% cannot handle. The result would then be imported back into the running job as an image.
% The authors invite suggestions of how this |L8U| pseudo-encoding functionality can be put to
% good use.
%
@@ -2041,7 +2096,7 @@
% |\DeclareTextComposite{\`}{T1}{A}{192}|
%\end{decl}
% to get the pre-composed `\`A', rather than a composite built from \`{} and `A'.
-% The last parameter is an index into a font; however the |\DeclareTextCompositeCommand|
+% The last parameter is an index into a font; however the |\DeclareTextCompositeCommand|
% variant allows arbitrary coding as that final parameter, so can be the bytes for the
% UTF-8 representation of a character.
% In the above code lines, macros are defined as follows
@@ -2067,18 +2122,18 @@
% | ... \textLGRenc{#1}\textgreekLGR@i #2\@empty | \quad if |#2| has more tokens\\
% |\textgreekLGR@i #1->\textgreekLGR@ii #1|
%\end{decl}
-% Thus |\textLGRenc| is called on each token in the argument of |\textLGR|.
+% Thus |\textLGRenc| is called on each token in the argument of |\textLGR|.
% Now |\textLGRenc|, which is applicable only when |L8U| pseudo-encoding is in effect,
% has a default expansion of just passing the character through unchanged; \emph{viz.}
%\begin{decl}[]
% |\DeclareTextCommand{\textLGRenc}{L8U}[1]{#1}|
%\end{decl}
% but by using |\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\textLGRenc}{L8U}{...}{...}|,
-% alternate expansions apply with specific arguments, as shown above.
+% alternate expansions apply with specific arguments, as shown above.
% In particular, that final argument can include coding that `looks ahead' to find the next
% character. This is used, for example, with diacritics in Greek, multi-letter sequences
% for Armenian letters, and other special cases related to ligatures and punctuation symbols.
-% To illustrate this Figure~\ref{ex-arm} (below) follows the conversion of a specific word,
+% To illustrate this Figure~\ref{ex-arm} (below) follows the conversion of a specific word,
% given in the transliteration for Armenian~(see Section~\ref{sssec-arm}).
% This conversion occurs using only \TeX's macro-expansion ability.
% Some details relevant to this example are explained there.
@@ -2117,26 +2172,26 @@
%\end{decl}
% The macro |\armen@en| (named for \textbf{e}mpty or \textbf{n}ext),
% looks ahead to see if the 5th-next argument token is |\@empty|,
-% signifying that there is nothing left of the original input.
-% (A closed bracing |{...}| counts as a single argument.) If |\@empty| the tokens in
+% signifying that there is nothing left of the original input.
+% (A closed bracing |{...}| counts as a single argument.) If |\@empty| the tokens in
% the 2nd bracing are substituted, otherwise those in the 3rd bracing.
-% Similarly |\armen@nc| (named for \textbf{n}ext \textbf{c}haracter)
+% Similarly |\armen@nc| (named for \textbf{n}ext \textbf{c}haracter)
% looks to see whether that 5th argument token matches with the character in the
% 1st bracing. If so, the 2nd bracing's tokens are substituted, else those of the 3rd bracing.
-% This is how to cope with `Sh' or `SH', implemented as ligatures in an |OT6| encoded font,
-% denoting a different letter from a single `S'. The macro |\armuh| is used here
+% This is how to cope with `Sh' or `SH', implemented as ligatures in an |OT6| encoded font,
+% denoting a different letter from a single `S'. The macro |\armuh| is used here
% to \emph{prevent} a ligature from |ev| that would otherwise occur.
-% One writes |e\armuh v| to get the separate letters. As the space becomes an active token,
-% we need |\textarmgobblespace| to restart parsing appropriately.
-% Of course |\textarmenARM@i| behaves like |\textgreekLGR@i|
-% as explained earlier, with a test for |\@empty| as the 2nd token.
+% One writes |e\armuh v| to get the separate letters. As the space becomes an active token,
+% we need |\textarmgobblespace| to restart parsing appropriately.
+% Of course |\textarmenARM@i| behaves like |\textgreekLGR@i|
+% as explained earlier, with a test for |\@empty| as the 2nd token.
% At the end, any remaining |\@empty| expand into nothing.
%
% \caption{Partial tracing of the conversion of an Armenian word, indicated by the red oval
% in Figure~\ref{arm-meta}, from {\color{verbcolor}\texttt{OT6}} transliterated form into UTF-8 bytes.
-% In each line, \TeX\ expansion occurs at the position of the left-most `\textbackslash'.
-% The resulting bytes are shown here in {\color{verbcolor}\texttt{T1}} encoding,
-% as in previous examples, with {\color{verbcolor}\texttt{?}} indicating an invisible character
+% In each line, \TeX\ expansion occurs at the position of the left-most `\textbackslash'.
+% The resulting bytes are shown here in {\color{verbcolor}\texttt{T1}} encoding,
+% as in previous examples, with {\color{verbcolor}\texttt{?}} indicating an invisible character
% in the byte range {\color{verbcolor}\texttt{Ox80}--\texttt{Ox9f}}.
% See Figure\,\ref{src-arm} for how this source appears with UTF-8 encoding.
% }\label{ex-arm}
@@ -2147,8 +2202,8 @@
% to an LICR called |\textarmuh|. Since |\armuh| is already defined, not as an LICR,
% it cannot be declared to be one without creating problems.
% Instead, within the environment grouping where |L8U| pseudo-encoding is specified,
-% one uses |\let\armuh\textarmuh| within a `rebinding' macro command
-% |\LIIXUmaparmenianletters|\footnote{The start of the macro name is derived from pseudo-Roman
+% one uses |\let\armuh\textarmuh| within a `rebinding' macro command
+% |\LIIXUmaparmenianletters|\footnote{The start of the macro name is derived from pseudo-Roman
% numerals: IX = 9, IIX = 8}
% to get LICR functionality from user-commands.
%\begin{decl}[]
@@ -2161,7 +2216,7 @@
% | \def\armbf{}%|\\
% | ... }|
%\end{decl}
-% As well as rebinding each command for a letter, the font style-switching commands
+% As well as rebinding each command for a letter, the font style-switching commands
% are aliased to do nothing, as these are not relevant to creating UTF-8 output.
% Being localised by the |L8U| grouping, this causes no problem elsewhere within the document.
% These are similar to macros |\psdaliasnames| and |\psdmapshortnames| from |hyperref.sty|,
@@ -2169,7 +2224,7 @@
%
% \begin{figure}[htb]
% \includegraphics[scale=.625]{Armenian-example-UTF8.png}
-% \caption{Image of part of the source coding for Figure~\ref{ex-arm},
+% \caption{Image of part of the source coding for Figure~\ref{ex-arm},
% viewed as UTF-8 encoded, within editing software.}\label{src-arm}
% \end{figure}
%
@@ -2186,10 +2241,10 @@
% \item |\LIIXUmaplatinchars| and |\LIIXUcancelfontswitches| with |LATxmp|
% \item |\LIIXUmapmathletterlikes| always defined
% \item |\LIIXUmapmathspaces| always defined
-% \item |\LIIXUmapmath...| with |mathxmp| --- see Section~\ref{ssec-math} below.
+% \item |\LIIXUmapmath...| with |mathxmp| --- see Section~\ref{ssec-math} below.
%\end{itemize}
% It may well be that more macro names can be added to some of these commands,
-% to allow macro usage within the metadata.
+% to allow macro usage within the metadata.
% Suggestions for such additions should be sent to the |pdfx| package authors, along
% with example documents. Similarly support for more languages can be requested.
%
@@ -2199,9 +2254,9 @@
% Macro commands for many mathematical symbols can be used directly in metadata without extra
% support; e.g., basic arithmetic operations, letter-like symbols, spacing commands.
% Super- and subscripted letters and numerals can use |\textsuperscript| and |\textsubscript|
-% when there is an appropriate Unicode character (digits, comma, $+$/$-$/$=$, parentheses,
+% when there is an appropriate Unicode character (digits, comma, $+$/$-$/$=$, parentheses,
% many letters but not all).
-%
+%
% When the |mathxmp| loading option is specified, many more symbols become available,
% using `rebinding' macros. These are necessary, as the macros for mathematical symbols
% are generally \emph{not} defined as LICRs, but use |\mathchar|. Thus new LICRs are needed,
@@ -2243,8 +2298,8 @@
% where |\liixu@mathreorder| uses some \TeX\ pattern-matching to allow the |\textmathrmstring|
% parser macro to work on the argument to |\mathrm| before allowing |\textmathnormal| parsing
% to continue afterwards. We refer to this as `nested parsing'.
-%
-% Similarly `nested parsing' can be used with superscripts and subscripts using |^{...}| and |_{...}|
+%
+% Similarly `nested parsing' can be used with superscripts and subscripts using |^{...}| and |_{...}|
% and to specify linebreaks, and even super-/subscripts within styles; viz.
%\begin{decl}[]
% |\Declar...CompositeCommand{\textmathnormal}{L8U}{^}{\liixu@mathreorder\textsuperstring}|\\
@@ -2259,7 +2314,7 @@
% is required to uncover cases which may require special handling.
% An ultimate aim is to be able to just copy the \LaTeX\ source for the `Abstract' of a technical
% paper into the |\Subject{...}| field of the |.xmpdata| file, with a large expectation that
-% it will `just work', or need only trivial edits to make it so.
+% it will `just work', or need only trivial edits to make it so.
%
%
% \subsection[Metadata in a Production Workflow]{Metadata in a Production Workflow}\label{ssec-wflow}
@@ -2273,8 +2328,8 @@
% \noindent
% At Macquarie University, the Mathematics Department produces personalised topmatter
% or coversheets for student assignments and tutorial papers using \LaTeX, incorporating
-% information that has been stored in a database. This is done by writing extra definitions
-% at the top of a copy of the \LaTeX\ source as prepared by the lecturers.
+% information that has been stored in a database. This is done by writing extra definitions
+% at the top of a copy of the \LaTeX\ source as prepared by the lecturers.
% For example information analogous to the following
%\begin{decl}[]
% |\def\thestudentname{\utext{Moore} Ross}|\\
@@ -2286,7 +2341,7 @@
% |\def\theduedate{09/05 2016}|\\
% |...|
%\end{decl}
-% is prepended to the file shown in Figure~\ref{math-wflow},
+% is prepended to the file shown in Figure~\ref{math-wflow},
% for each student downloading their personalised assignment paper.
% The \LaTeX\ source makes use of this information, including recording some of it
% within the Metadata.
@@ -2301,7 +2356,7 @@
% |\def\assigntopics{orbits, stabilisers, groups of matrices}|\\
% |\providecommand{\pdfxopts}{a-1b}|\\
% |%% XMP metadata for PDF/A conformance|\\
-% |\begin{filecontents*}{\jobname.xmpdata}|\\
+% |\begin{filecontents}[force]{\jobname.xmpdata}|\\
% |\Title{\theunitcode\ \theoffering: Assignment \theassignmentnumber}|\\
% |\Author{\assignLecturer}|\\
% |\Copyright{Macquarie University, Mathematics Department}|\\
@@ -2310,7 +2365,7 @@
% |\Keywords{\assigntopics}|\\
% |\Creator{pdfTeX + pdfx.sty with \pdfxopts\space option}|\\
% |\pdfxEnableCommands{\def\utext#1{#1,}}|\\
-% |\end{filecontents*}|\\
+% |\end{filecontents}|\\
% ||\\
% |\documentclass[a4paper,11pt]{article}|\\
% |\RequirePackage{assignments}|\\
@@ -2332,7 +2387,7 @@
% Another way that jobs can be customised using essentially the same \LaTeX\ source,
% is via the command used to initiate the job. For example the file |sample.tex|,
% accompanying the |pdfx| distribution, can be used to test the loading options to create
-% PDFs conforming to the various flavours of PDF/A, PDF/E and PDF/X.
+% PDFs conforming to the various flavours of PDF/A, PDF/E and PDF/X.
% Consider a shell script containing the following (Unix/Linux) commands.
%\begin{decl}[]
% |pdflatex "\def\pdfxopt{a-2b}\input sample.tex"|\\
@@ -2348,11 +2403,11 @@
% from the same \LaTeX\ source, named according to each particular variant.
% A default |\providecommand{\pdfxopt}{a-1b}| at the start of |sample.tex| catches the case
% of normal typesetting, doing nothing when |\pdfxopt| already has an expansion value.
-%
+%
% \goodbreak
% \subsection[Further Developments]{Further Developments}\label{ssec-further}
%
-% Prospects for further development of the |pdfx| package are as follows,
+% Prospects for further development of the |pdfx| package are as follows,
% listed not necessarily in order of perceived importance.
% \begin{itemize}
% \item
@@ -2363,7 +2418,7 @@
% Conformance to multiple PDF standards; e.g. both PDF/A and PDF/E,
% both PDF/A and PDF/X with RGB or CMYK color profile, other combinations.
% \item
-% Explore delaying the processing of metadata until |\begin{document}|,
+% Explore delaying the processing of metadata until |\begin{document}|,
% thereby allowing some fields to be set automatically from other information
% supplied within the document preamble.
% \item
@@ -2384,7 +2439,6 @@
% Support emerging standards based on PDF 2.0~\cite{PDF20}.
% \end{itemize}
%
-%
% \section[Bibliography]{Bibliography}%
% {\let\newpage\relax
% \begin{thebibliography}{999}
@@ -2396,28 +2450,35 @@
%
% \bibitem{XMP-spec}Adobe Systems Inc.;
% XMP Specification, Adding Intelligence to Media. September 2005.
-% Also available as ISO 16684-1:2012\,\cite{XMP-ISO}.\\
+% Also available as ISO 16684-1:2012\,\cite{XMP-ISO}. %\\
% \url{http://www.adobe.com/devnet/xmp/}.
%
% \bibitem{PDFUA1} ANSI\,/\,AIIM\,/\,ISO\,14289-1:2012;
% Document management applications --- Electronic document file format enhancement for accessibility
% --- Part 1: Use of ISO\,32000-1\,(PDF/UA-1);
-% Technical Committee ISO/TC\,171/SC\,2 (July 2012).
-% \url{http://www.iso.org/iso/home/store/catalogue_tc/catalogue_detail.htm?csnumber=54564}.\\
-% Revised as ISO\,14289-1:2014 (December 2014):
-% \url{http://www.iso.org/iso/home/store/catalogue_tc/catalogue_detail.htm?csnumber=64599}.\\
-% Available from ANSI at \url{https://webstore.ansi.org/Standards/ISO/ISO142892014}.
+% Technical Committee ISO/TC\,171/SC\,2 (July 2012 -- withdrawn). %\\
+% Revised as ISO\,14289-1:2014 (Dec. 2014):
+% \url{https://www.iso.org/standard/64599.html}.\\
+% Available from ANSI at \url{https://webstore.ansi.org/standards/iso/iso142892014}.
%
-% \bibitem{PDFUABSI} BS,/\,ISO\,14289-1:2014; Document Management Applications.
-% Electronic Document File Format Enhancement For Accessibility. Use Of ISO 32000-1 (PDF/UA-1) (British Standard)
-% \url{https://webstore.ansi.org/Standards/BSI/BSISO142892014}.
+% \bibitem{PDFUA2} ISO\,14289-2:2024;
+% Document management applications --- Electronic document file format enhancement for accessibility
+% --- Part 2: Use of ISO\,32000-2\,(PDF/UA-2);\\
+% Technical Committee ISO/TC\,171/SC\,2 WG9 (March 2024).
+% \href{https://pdfa.org/iso-14289-2-pdfua-2/}%
+% {\UrlFont https://pdfa.org/iso-\penalty-20 14289-2-pdfua-2/}
+%
+% \bibitem{PDFUABSI} BS,/\,ISO\,14289-1:2014; Document Management Applications.
+% Electronic Document File Format Enhancement For Accessibility.
+% Use Of ISO 32000-1 (PDF/UA-1) (British Standard)
+% \url{https://webstore.ansi.org/standards/bsi/bsiso142892014}.
%
-% \bibitem{pdfaPilot} Callas Software Gmbh.;
+% \bibitem{pdfaPilot} Callas Software Gmbh.;
% \texttt{pdfaPilot}, plug-in or desktop software for PDF/A versions.
% \url{https://www.callassoftware.com/en/products/pdfapilot}.
%
% \bibitem{DC}
-% Dublin Core Metadata Element Set, Version 1.1, October 2010\\
+% Dublin Core Metadata Element Set, Version 1.1, October 2010\\
% \url{http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/}.
%
% \bibitem{BCP47}IETF; Best Current Practice \#47: Tags for Identifying Languages.
@@ -2425,115 +2486,157 @@
% \url{https://tools.ietf.org/pdf/bcp47.pdf}.
%
% \bibitem{PDFX}ISO\,15930-1:2001;
-% Graphic technology --- Prepress digital data exchange --- Use of PDF --- Part 1:
+% Graphic technology --- Prepress digital data exchange --- Use of PDF --- Part 1:
% Complete exchange using CMYK data (PDF/X-1 and PDF/X-1a).
% Technical Committee ISO/TC\,130 (December 2001).
-% \url{http://www.iso.org/iso/home/store/catalogue_tc/catalogue_detail.htm?csnumber=29061}.
+% \url{https://www.iso.org/standard/29061.html}.
%
% \bibitem{PDFX3}ISO\,15930-3:2002;
-% Graphic technology --- Prepress digital data exchange --- Use of PDF --- Part 3:
+% Graphic technology --- Prepress digital data exchange --- Use of PDF --- Part 3:
% Complete exchange suitable for colour-managed workflows (PDF/X-3).
% Technical Committee ISO/TC\,130 (September 2002).
-% \url{http://www.iso.org/iso/home/store/catalogue_tc/catalogue_detail.htm?csnumber=34941}.
+% \url{https://www.iso.org/standard/34941.html}.
%
% \bibitem{PDFX1a}ISO\,15930-4:2003;
-% Graphic technology --- Prepress digital data exchange --- Use of PDF --- Part 4:
+% Graphic technology --- Prepress digital data exchange --- Use of PDF --- Part 4:
% Complete exchange of CMYK and spot colour printing data using PDF 1.4 (PDF/X-1a).
% Technical Committee ISO/TC\,130 (December 2003).
-% \url{http://www.iso.org/iso/home/store/catalogue_tc/catalogue_detail.htm?csnumber=39938}.
+% \url{https://www.iso.org/standard/39938.html}.
%
% \bibitem{PDFX3a}ISO\,15930-6:2003;
-% Graphic technology --- Prepress digital data exchange --- Use of PDF --- Part 6:
+% Graphic technology --- Prepress digital data exchange --- Use of PDF --- Part 6:
% Complete exchange of printing data suitable for colour-managed workflows using PDF 1.4 (PDF/X-3).
% Technical Committee ISO/TC\,130 (December 2003).
-% \url{http://www.iso.org/iso/home/store/catalogue_tc/catalogue_detail.htm?csnumber=39940}.
+% \url{https://www.iso.org/standard/39940.html}.
%
% \bibitem{PDFX4}ISO\,15930-7:2010;
-% Graphic technology --- Prepress digital data exchange --- Use of PDF --- Part 7:
+% Graphic technology --- Prepress digital data exchange --- Use of PDF --- Part 7:
% Complete exchange of printing data (PDF/X-4) and partial exchange of printing data with external profile reference (PDF/X-4p) using PDF 1.6.
% Technical Committee ISO/TC\,130 (July 2010).
-% \url{http://www.iso.org/iso/home/store/catalogue_tc/catalogue_detail.htm?csnumber=55843}.
+% \url{https://www.iso.org/standard/55843.html}.
%
% \bibitem{PDFX5}ISO\,15930-8:2010;
-% Graphic technology --- Prepress digital data exchange --- Use of PDF --- Part 8:
-% Partial exchange of printing data using PDF 1.6 (PDF/X-5). \hfil
-% Technical Committee ISO/TC\,130 (July 2010). \hfil
-% \url{http://www.iso.org/iso/home/store/catalogue_tc/catalogue_detail.htm?csnumber=55844}.
+% Graphic technology --- Prepress digital data exchange --- Use of PDF --- Part 8:
+% Partial exchange of printing data using PDF 1.6 (PDF/X-5).
+% Technical Committee ISO/TC\,130 (July 2010).
+% \url{https://www.iso.org/standard/55844.html}.
% Revision via Corrigendum: ISO\,15930-8:2010/Cor\,1:2011 (August 2011);
-% \url{http://www.iso.org/iso/home/store/catalogue_tc/catalogue_detail.htm?csnumber=60210}.
+% \url{https://www.iso.org/standard/60210.html}.
+%
+% \bibitem{PDFX6}ISO\,15930-9:2020;
+% Graphic technology --- Prepress digital data exchange --- Use of PDF --- Part 9:
+% Complete exchange of printing data (PDF/X-6) and partial exchange of printing data
+% with external profile reference (PDF/X-6p and PDF/X-6n) using PDF 2.0
+% Technical Committee ISO/TC\,130 (November 2020).
+% \url{https://www.iso.org/standard/77103.html}.
+%
%
% \bibitem{PDFVT}ISO\,16612-2:2010;
-% Graphic technology\,---\,Variable data exchange\,---\,Part 2:\hfil
-% Using PDF/X-4 \penalty-5000 and PDF/X-5 (PDF/VT-1 and PDF/VT-2).
-% Technical Committee ISO/TC\,130 (December 2005). \hfil
-% \href{http://www.iso.org/iso/home/store/catalogue_tc/catalogue_detail.htm?csnumber=38013}%
-% {{\small\tt http://www.iso.org/iso/home/store/catalogue\_tc/catalogue\_detail.htm?\penalty-200csnumber=38013}}.
+% Graphic technology\,---\,Variable data exchange---Part\,2:
+% Using PDF/X-4\penalty-5000\ and PDF/X-5 (PDF/VT-1 and PDF/VT-2).
+% Technical Committee ISO/TC\,130 (December 2005).
+% \url{https://www.iso.org/standard/38013.html}.%
+%
+%
+% \bibitem{PDFVT3}ISO\,16612-3:2020;
+% Graphic technology\,---\,Variable data exchange---Part\,3:
+% Using PDF/X-6\penalty-5000\ (PDF/VT-3).
+% Technical Committee ISO/TC\,130 (Edition1, 2020).
+% \url{https://www.iso.org/standard/75218.html}.%
%
% \bibitem{XMP-ISO}ISO\,16684-1:2012;
-% Graphic technology --- Extensible metadata platform (XMP) specification --- Part 1:
+% Graphic technology --- Extensible metadata platform (XMP) specification --- Part 1:
% Data model, serialization and core properties.
-% Technical Committee ISO/TC\,130 (February 2012).
-% \url{http://www.iso.org/iso/home/store/catalogue_tc/catalogue_detail.htm?csnumber=57421}.
+% Technical Committee ISO/TC\,130 (February 2012 -- withdrawn).
+% Revised as ISO\,16684-1:2019; (Edition 2, 2019).
+% \url{https://www.iso.org/standard/75163.html}.
%
-% \bibitem{PDFA}ISO\,19005-1:2005;
+% \bibitem{PDFA}ISO\,19005-1:2005;
% Document Management --- Electronic document file format for long term preservation
% --- Part 1: Use of PDF\,1.4\,(PDF/A-1);
% Technical Committee ISO/TC\,171/SC\,2 (Sept. 2005).
-% Revisions via Corrigenda: ISO\,19005-1:2005/Cor\,1:2007 (March 2007);
-% ISO\,19005-1:2005/Cor\,2:2011 (Dec. 2011). \\
-% \url{http://www.iso.org/iso/catalogue_detail?csnumber=38920}.
+% Revisions via Corrigenda: ISO\,19005-1:2005/Cor\,1:2007 (March 2007);
+% ISO\,19005-1:2005/Cor\,2:2011 (Dec. 2011).
+% \url{https://www.iso.org/standard/38920.html}.
%
% \bibitem{PDFA2}ISO\,19005-2:2011;
% Document Management --- Electronic document file format for long term preservation
% --- Part 2: Use of ISO\,32000-1\,(PDF/A-2); \hfill
-% Technical Committee ISO/\penalty-200 TC\,171/SC\,2 (June 2011).\\
-% \url{http://www.iso.org/iso/catalogue_detail?csnumber=50655}.
+% Technical Committee ISO/\penalty-200 TC\,171/SC\,2 (June 2011).
+% \url{https://www.iso.org/standard/50655.html}.
%
% \bibitem{PDFA3}ISO\,19005-3:2012;
% Document Management --- Electronic document file format for long term preservation
% --- Part 3: Use of ISO\,32000-1 with support for embedded files (PDF/A-3);
-% Technical Committee ISO/TC\,171/SC\,2 (October 2012).\\
-% \url{http://www.iso.org/iso/catalogue_detail?csnumber=57229}.
+% Technical Committee ISO/TC\,171/SC\,2 (October 2012).
+% \url{https://www.iso.org/standard/57229.html}.
+%
+% \bibitem{PDFA4}ISO\,19005-4:2020;
+% Document Management --- Electronic document file format for long term preservation
+% --- Part 4: Use of ISO\,32000-2 (PDF/A-4);
+% Technical Committee ISO/TC\,171/SC\,2 (Edition 1, 2020).
+% \url{https://www.iso.org/standard/71832.html}.
+%
+% \bibitem{PDFDecl} PDF Declarations. A use of ISO\,32000.
+% PDF Association, Berlin, Germany (2019).
+% \url{https://pdfa.org/resource/pdf-declarations/}
%
% \bibitem{PDFE}ISO\,24517-1:2008;
-% Document Management --- Engineering document format using PDF --- Part 1:
+% Document Management --- Engineering document format using PDF --- Part 1:
% Use of PDF 1.6 (PDF/E-1);
% Technical Committee ISO/TC\,171/SC\,2 (May 2008).\\
-% \url{http://www.iso.org/iso/catalogue_detail?csnumber=42274}.
+% \url{https://www.iso.org/standard/42274.html}.
%
% \bibitem{ISO32000}ISO\,32000-1:2008;
% Document management\,---\,Portable document format\,(PDF\,1.7);
-% Technical Committee ISO/TC\,171/SC\,2 (July 2008).
+% Technical Committee ISO/TC\,171/SC\,2 (July 2008).
% Also available as \cite{PDF17}.\\
-% \url{http://www.iso.org/iso/catalogue_detail?csnumber=51502}.
+% \url{https://www.iso.org/standard/51502.html}.
%
% \bibitem{PDF20}ISO\,32000-2:2017;
% Document management --- Portable document format --- Part~2: PDF\,2.0;
-% Technical Committee ISO/TC\,171/SC\,2 Document file formats, EDMS systems
-% and authenticity of information. (July 2017)\\
-% \url{https://www.iso.org/standard/63534.html}.
+% Technical Committee ISO/TC\,171/SC\,2 Document file formats, EDMS systems
+% and authenticity of information. (July 2017 --- withdrawn)
+% Revised as ISO\,32000-2:2020; (Edition 2, 2020)
+% \url{https://www.iso.org/standard/75839.html}.\\
+% Sponsored access available since 5 April 2023, from
+% \href{https://www.pdfa-inc.org/product/iso-32000-2-pdf-2-0-bundle-sponsored-access/}{PDF Association}.
%
% \bibitem{LC2} F.\,Mittelbach, M.\,Goossens with J.\,Braams, D.\,Carlisle, C.\,Rowley;
% The \LaTeX\ Companion --- 2nd edition. Addison--Wesley (now Pearson Education Inc.), 2004.
% ISBN 0-201-36299-6 (paperback).
%
-% \bibitem{TN0009}PDF/A Competence Centre;
-% TechNote 0009: XMP Extension Schemas in PDF/A-1. (March 2008)
+% \bibitem{PDF-LaTeX} \LaTeX\ Project Working Group, PDF Association.
+% \url{https://pdfa.org/community/latex-project-lwg/}
+%
+% \bibitem{LaTeXPDF} \LaTeX\ Tagged PDF\,---\,A blueprint for a large project.
+% Frank Mittelbach, Chris Rowley; TUGboat, Volume 41 (2020), No 3.
+% \url{https://tug.org/TUGboat/tb41-3/tb129mitt-tagpdf.pdf}.
+% Project website \url{https://www.latex-project.org/};
+% \href{https://www.latex-project.org/publications/2020-FMi-TUB-tb129mitt-tagpdf.pdf}{Preprint}.
+%
+% \bibitem{TN0009}PDF/A Competence Centre;\,
+% TechNote\,0009: XMP Extension Schemas in PDF/A-1.\penalty-2000\ (March 2008) \ \
% \href{https://www.pdfa.org/publication/technical-note-tn-0009-xmp-extension-schemas-in-pdfa-1/}%
-% {\small\tt https://www.pdfa.org/publication/technical-note-tn-0009-xmp-extension\penalty-200 -schemas-in-pdfa-1/}.
+% {\UrlFont https://www.pdfa.org/publication/technical-note-tn-0009-xmp-\penalty-20 extension-schemas-in-pdfa-1/}.
%
% \bibitem{PDF-UA}
-% PDF/UA Technical Implementation Guide: Understanding ISO\,14289-1 (PDF/UA-1). \penalty-200
-% AIIM Global Community of Information Professionals. \hfil
+% PDF/UA Technical Implementation Guide: Understanding ISO\,14289-1\penalty-2000\ (PDF/UA-1).
+% AIIM Global Community of Information Professionals.
% \href{http://www.aiim.org/Research-and-Publications/standards/committees/PDFUA/Technical-Implementation-Guide}%
-% {\small\tt http://www.aiim.org/Re\penalty-200 search-and-Publications/standards/committees/PDFUA/Technical-Implementation\penalty-200 -Guide}.
+% {\UrlFont http://\penalty-20 www.aiim.org/Research-and-Publications/standards/committees/PDFUA/Technical\penalty-200 -Implementation-Guide}.
+%
+% \bibitem{WTPDF} Well-Tagged PDF (WTPDF);
+% Using Tagged PDF for Accessibility and Reuse in PDF 2.0.
+% PDF Association; PDF Reuse TWG \& PDF/UA TWG. Version 1.0.0, February 2024.
+% \url{https://pdfa.org/wtpdf/}
%
-% \bibitem{colorp} N.\,Preining;
+% \bibitem{colorp} N.\,Preining;
% \texttt{colorprofiles} \textemdash\ Collection of free ICC profiles.
-% \TeX\ and \LaTeX\ package (by R.\,Moore), distributed with \TeX{}Live. (November 2018)\\
+% \TeX\ and \LaTeX\ package (by R.\,Moore), distributed with \TeX{}Live. (Nov. 2018)
% \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/colorprofiles}.
%
-% \bibitem{PRISM}PRISM; Publishing Requirements for Industry Standard Metadata.
+% \bibitem{PRISM}PRISM; Publishing Requirements for Industry Standard Metadata.
% PRISM Metadata Initiative; Idealliance Working Group.
% \url{http://www.idealliance.org/specifications/prism-metadata-initiative/prism}
%
@@ -2541,16 +2644,24 @@
% Generation of PDF/X- and PDF/A-compliant PDFs with \pdftex --- \texttt{pdfx.sty}.
% TUGboat Vol.\,36, No.\,2; TUG 2015 Conference Proceedings. \TeX\ Users Group, 2015; pp.\,136--142.
%
-% \bibitem{veraPDF} veraPDF. Industry Supported PDF/A Validation.
-% Software, dual-licensed under the GNU General Public License v3 or later (GPLv3+)
+% \bibitem{tagpdf} |tagpdf| -- Tools for experimenting with tagging using pdf\LaTeX\ and Lua\LaTeX.
+% Ulrike Fischer. Available via CTAN repository.
+% \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/tagpdf}.
+%
+% \bibitem{tpdf} |tpdf|; Ross Moore. Unpublished.
+% \LaTeX\ package and macro suite for producing `real-world' standards-conforming PDF documents.
+% Examples available at \url{http://maths.mq.edu.au/~ross/TaggedPDF/}.
+%
+% \bibitem{veraPDF} veraPDF. Industry Supported PDF/A Validation.
+% Software, dual-licensed under the GNU General Public License v3 or later (GPLv3+)
% and Mozilla Public License v2 or later (MPLv2+). \url{https://verapdf.org}.
% Wiki: \url{https://github.com/veraPDF/veraPDF-validation-profiles/wiki}
%
-% \bibitem{RDF} World Wide Web Consortium (W3C);
+% \bibitem{RDF} World Wide Web Consortium (W3C);
% Resource Description Format: RDF 1.1 XML Syntax. W3C Recommendation. (February 2014)
% \url{https://www.w3.org/TR/rdf-syntax-grammar/}.
-%
-% \bibitem{wikiPDF}Wikipedia;
+%
+% \bibitem{wikiPDF}Wikipedia;
% PDF/A: \url{https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/PDF/A}\newline
% PDF/E: \url{https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/PDF/E}\newline
% PDF/VT: \url{https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/PDF/VT}\newline
@@ -2560,7 +2671,7 @@
% \end{thebibliography}
% }\goodbreak
% \section[Implementation]{Implementation}
-%
+%
% \iffalse
%<*package>
% \fi \hfuzz=2.5pt%
@@ -2575,7 +2686,7 @@
}{}%
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
\ProvidesPackage{pdfx}
- [2019/02/27 v1.6.3 PDF/X and PDF/A support (CVR/HTH/RRM/PS)]
+ [2024/06/24 v1.6.5f PDF/X and PDF/A support (CVR/HTH/RRM/PS)]
\newif\ifpdfx@noBOM \pdfx@noBOMfalse % use a BOM in the XMP packet
\newif\ifpdfx@x \pdfx@xfalse % PDF/X mode
@@ -2594,13 +2705,28 @@
\def\xmp@ReleaseDate{2005} % 2001 for PDF/X-1, 2005 for PDF/A-1,
% 2010 for PDF/A-2, 2012 for PDF/A-3.
+%% with Beamer pgf will have written Resource objects already
+\newif\ifpdfx@luacheck@needed
+\@ifpackageloaded{pgfcore}{\pdfx@luacheck@neededtrue}{}
+%% thanks to Ryutaroh Matsumoto for reporting this issue
+
\newcount\pdfx@minorversion
+\newcount\pdfx@majorversion
+\expandafter\ifx\csname pdfmajorversion\endcsname\relax
+%% RRM: 20240614 LuaLaTeX may not have this defined
+ \newcount\pdfmajorversion
+ \pdfmajorversion=1\relax
+\fi
\expandafter\ifx\csname pdfminorversion\endcsname\relax
-\else
- \global\pdfx@minorversion=\the\pdfminorversion
+%% RRM: 20240614 this could be set in luatex85 package
+ \newcount\pdfminorversion
+ \pdfminorversion=3\relax
\fi
+%% options can change these from the defaults
+\global\pdfx@majorversion=\the\pdfmajorversion
+\global\pdfx@minorversion=\the\pdfminorversion
-\def\pdfx@ErrorWarning#1#2#3#4{%
+\def\pdfx@ErrorWarning #1#2#3#4{%
\ifpdfx@noerr \PackageWarning{pdfx}{#1.^^J #2#3.^^J}%
\else \PackageError{pdfx}{#1}{#2#4.^^J
Use option 'noerr' to avoid this message.^^J}%
@@ -2781,6 +2907,9 @@
\DeclareOption{pdf15}{\global\pdfx@minorversion=5 }% 2005 Acrobat 6
\DeclareOption{pdf16}{\global\pdfx@minorversion=6 }% 2006 Acrobat 7 (ISBN 0-321-30474-8)
\DeclareOption{pdf17}{\global\pdfx@minorversion=7 }% 2008 ISO 32000-1:2008
+\DeclareOption{pdf20}{% 2020 ISO 32000-2:2020
+ \global\pdfx@majorversion=2 \relax
+ \global\pdfx@minorversion=0 }%
%% inhibits writing the XMP byte-order marker
\DeclareOption{noBOM}{\pdfx@noBOMtrue}
@@ -2845,6 +2974,13 @@
\ExecuteOptions{noBOM,a-1b}
\ProcessOptions
+\RequirePackage{ifluatex}
+\ifpdfx@luacheck@needed
+ \ifluatex
+ \RequirePackage{luatex85}
+ \fi
+\fi
+
\ifpdfx@ua\ifpdfx@x\else
\expandafter\if\xmp@Conformance A\else
\pdfx@ErrorWarning{PDF/UA requires 'Tagged PDF' for any structure.^^J
@@ -2857,19 +2993,23 @@
\expandafter\ifx\csname pdflastobj\endcsname\relax
\else
- \ifnum\pdflastobj >\z@ % pdftex has already written objects
+ \ifnum\pdflastobj >\z@ % pdf/luatex has already written objects
+ % e.g. by pgfcore , called from Beamer or other class
\ifnum\pdfx@minorversion=\pdfminorversion\else
\PackageError{pdfx}%
{^^J(pdfx) Cannot change the \string\pdfminorversion^^J%
- (pdfx) PDF version remains at 1.\the\pdfminorversion.^^J%
- (pdfx) Use \string\pdfminorversion=\the\pdfx@minorversion\space
+ (pdfx) PDF version remains at \the\pdfmajorversion.\the\pdfminorversion.^^J%
+ (pdfx) Use \string\pdfmajorversion=\the\pdfx@majorversion\space^^J%
+ and \string\pdfminorversion=\the\pdfx@minorversion\space
before \string\documentclass}%
{(pdfx) Another package or document-class has written objects into the PDF.^^J%
- (pdfx) Hit return to continue with PDF version 1.\the\pdfminorversion.%
- }%
+ (pdfx) Hit return to continue with PDF version %
+ \the\pdfmajorversion.\the\pdfminorversion.}%
+ \global\pdfx@majorversion=\the\pdfmajorversion
\global\pdfx@minorversion=\the\pdfminorversion
\fi
\else
+ \global\pdfmajorversion\pdfx@majorversion
\global\pdfminorversion\pdfx@minorversion
\fi
\fi
@@ -2877,6 +3017,7 @@
\expandafter\ifx\csname thepdfminorversion\endcsname\relax
\expandafter\ifx\csname pdfminorversion\endcsname\relax
\else
+ \xdef\thepdfmajorversion{\the\pdfmajorversion}
\xdef\thepdfminorversion{\the\pdfminorversion}
\fi\fi
@@ -2885,16 +3026,21 @@
\def\pdf@minorversion@xetex=#1{\gdef\thepdfminorversion{#1}}%
\let\pdfminorversion\pdf@minorversion@xetex
\else
- \ifnum\pdfminorversion < 4\relax
- \ifpdfx@x
- % more testing needed with PDF/X
- \else
- \pdfminorversion=4\relax % assumed for PDF/A ; options may change this for PDF/X
- \gdef\thepdfminorversion{4}%
- \fi
+ \ifnum\pdfmajorversion > 1\relax
+ \pdfminorversion=3\relax
+ %% else some JPG graphics with DCT encoding will fail
\else
- \ifnum\pdfminorversion<\thepdfminorversion\relax
- \global\pdfminorversion=\thepdfminorversion\relax
+ \ifnum\pdfminorversion < 4\relax
+ \ifpdfx@x
+ % more testing needed with PDF/X
+ \else
+ \pdfminorversion=4\relax % assumed for PDF/A ; options may change this for PDF/X
+ \gdef\thepdfminorversion{4}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifnum\pdfminorversion<\thepdfminorversion\relax
+ \global\pdfminorversion=\thepdfminorversion\relax
+ \fi
\fi
\fi
\fi
@@ -2902,7 +3048,8 @@
\pdfresetpageorigin=0
\fi
-\expandafter\ifx\csname pdfomitcharset\endcsname\relax\else
+\expandafter\ifx\csname pdfomitcharset\endcsname\relax
+\else
\ifpdfx@omitcharset
\pdfomitcharset = 1 %
%% do not create /Charset listings of font glyphs;
@@ -2940,8 +3087,10 @@
\RequirePackage{iftex}
\RequirePackage{ifpdf}
+%\expandafter\show\csname ifpdf\endcsname
%% Support for pdfTeX primitives when using XeTeX:
\RequirePackage{ifxetex}
+%\expandafter\show\csname ifpdf\endcsname
\ifxetex
\def\pdfx@pages@xetex#1{\special{pdf:put @pages <<#1>>}}
\def\pdfx@pageattr@xetex#1{\special{pdf:put @thispage <<#1>>}}
@@ -2971,7 +3120,10 @@
}%
\RequirePackage{pdftexcmds}%
\let\pdfx@mdfivesum\pdf@mdfivesum
- \let\pdfescapestring\pdf@escapestring
+% \let\pdfescapestring\pdf@escapestring
+ \long\def\pdf@escapestring@byte #1{%
+ \directlua {oberdiek.pdftexcmds.escapestring("\luaescapestring {#1}", "byte")}}%
+ %\let\pdf@escapestring\pdf@escapestring@byte
\else
\ifxetex
\expandafter\ifx\csname mdfivesum\endcsname\relax
@@ -3021,6 +3173,13 @@
\pdfgeninterwordspace=0 \relax
\fi
\begingroup
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname stockwidth\endcsname\relax\else
+ \ifdim\stockwidth=\z@ %% 20240528
+ \else
+ %% 20231023 support for memoir's stockwidth/height
+ \let\paperwidth\stockwidth
+ \let\paperheight\stockheight
+ \fi \fi
\dimen0=0.996264009963\paperwidth\relax
\edef\pdfx@mwidth{\strip@pt\dimen0}%
\advance\dimen0 -25\p@
@@ -3049,7 +3208,7 @@
\expandafter\immediate\pdfx@pageattr@xetex{\pdfx@everypage@xetex}}%
\EveryShipout{%
\expandafter\immediate\pdfx@pageattr@xetex{\pdfx@everypage@xetex}}%
- \else
+ \else
\EveryShipout{%
\expandafter\ifx\expandafter\relax\the\pdfpageattr\relax
\immediate\pdfpageattr\expandafter{\the\pdfpagesattr}%
@@ -3068,7 +3227,8 @@
\else
\ifnum\thepdfminorversion >3 \relax
\expandafter\ifx\csname pdfsuppresswarningdupmap\endcsname\relax
- \expandafter\ifx\csname pdfmapline\endcsname\relax\else
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname pdfmapline\endcsname\relax
+ \else
\pdfmapline{+dummy-space <dummy-space.pfb}
\fi
\else
@@ -3098,16 +3258,46 @@
\@namedef{M@L8U}{}%
%% adjust to LaTeX's 2018 change to the default encoding
+\def\pdfx@utfencodingname{utf8}%
+\def\pdfx@RawInputEncoding{%
+% \begingroup
+% \@tempcnta=0
+% % print out the catcodes of chars < 32
+% \loop
+% \typeout{\the\@tempcnta: \expandafter\the\catcode\@tempcnta}%
+% \advance\@tempcnta\@ne
+% \ifnum\@tempcnta<32
+% \repeat
+% \endgroup
+ \UseRawInputEncoding
+}
\expandafter\ifx\csname inputencodingname\endcsname\relax
\else
\def\pdfx@restoreencoding#1{%
- \@tempcnta=128
+ \@tempcnta=1\relax
+ \loop
+% \catcode\@tempcnta=13\relax
+ \advance\@tempcnta\@ne
+ \ifnum\@tempcnta<8\relax
+ \repeat
+ \catcode11=13 \relax
+ \@tempcnta=14\relax
+ \loop
+% \catcode\@tempcnta=13\relax
+ \advance\@tempcnta\@ne
+ \ifnum\@tempcnta<31 \relax
+ \repeat
+ \@tempcnta=128\relax
\loop
- \catcode\@tempcnta=13
+% \catcode\@tempcnta=13\relax
\advance\@tempcnta\@ne
\ifnum\@tempcnta<256
\repeat
- \inputencoding{#1}%
+% {\tracingall
+% \ifx\inputencodingname\pdfx@utfencodingname\else
+ \let\inputencodingname\relax %% kill previous
+% \fi
+ \inputencoding{#1}%}%
\let\LastDeclaredEncoding\pdfx@LastDeclaredEncoding
\let\DeclareFontEncoding@\pdfx@DeclareFontEncoding@
\let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\pdfx@DeclareUnicodeCharacter
@@ -3116,7 +3306,18 @@
\let\pdfx@inputencodingname\inputencodingname
\global\let\pdfx@DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacter
\global\let\pdfx@DeclareFontEncoding@\DeclareFontEncoding@
- \UseRawInputEncoding
+% \@tempcnta=0
+% \loop
+% \typeout{\the\@tempcnta: \expandafter\the\catcode\@tempcnta}%
+%% \expandafter\showthe\catcode\@tempcnta
+% \advance\@tempcnta\@ne
+% \ifnum\@tempcnta<32
+% \repeat
+%\show\UseRawInputEncoding
+%% if the encoding is utf8 then don't change it here – wrong!
+% \ifx\inputencodingname\pdfx@utfencodingname\else
+% \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\pdfx@RawInputEncoding %\fi
\fi
\InputIfFileExists{\pdfx@encodingfile}{}{}
\expandafter\ifx\csname pdfx@inputencodingname\endcsname\relax
@@ -3243,6 +3444,10 @@
\ifx\relax#1\relax\else\gdef\xmp@lang@Identifier{#1}\fi
\def\afterxmp@parse{\let\Identifier\pdfx@extraIdentifier}%
\xmp@parse{\global\let\xmp@Identifier\@this}}
+\newcommand{\pdfx@Nickname}[1][]{%
+ \ifx\relax#1\relax\else\gdef\xmp@lang@Nickname{#1}\fi
+% \def\afterxmp@parse{\let\Identifier\pdfx@extraNickname}%
+ \xmp@parse{\global\let\xmp@Nickname\@this}}
\newcommand{\pdfx@Thumbnails}{%
\def\afterxmp@parse{\let\Thumbnails\pdfx@extraThumbnails}%
\xmp@parse{\global\let\xmp@Thumbnails\@this}}
@@ -3443,6 +3648,28 @@
\xmp@parse{\global\let\xmp@extraIdentifier\@this}%
}%
+%% Nickname only supports a single usage, for PDF/X
+%\newcommand{\pdfx@extraNickname}[1][]{%
+% \ifx\relax#1\relax
+% \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\gdef
+% \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\xmp@Nickname
+% \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
+% \expandafter\xmp@Nickname\pdfx@insert@sep}%
+% \else
+% \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\gdef
+% \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\xmp@Nickname
+% \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
+% \expandafter\xmp@Nickname\pdfx@insert@sep[#1]}%
+% \fi
+% \def\afterxmp@parse{%
+% \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\gdef
+% \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\xmp@Nickname
+% \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
+% \expandafter\xmp@Nickname\xmp@extraNickname}%
+% }%
+% \xmp@parse{\global\let\xmp@extraNickname\@this}%
+% }%
+
\newcommand{\pdfx@extraThumbnails}[1][]{%
\ifx\relax#1\relax
\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\gdef
@@ -3737,7 +3964,7 @@
%\let\sep\pdfx@sep
%% Note: '\ ', \&, \copyright are already predefined by hyperref.
%% allow LICRs to expand into PDF strings
- \def\cf@encoding{PU}%
+ \def\cf@encoding{PU}%
\def\9##1{\ifcase##1\string\0\or\string\1\or\string\2\or\string\3\fi}%
\def\8{\string\00}%
\def\0{\string\0}\def\1{\string\1}\def\2{\string\2}\def\3{\string\3}%
@@ -3798,6 +4025,9 @@
%%----------------------------------------------------------------------
%% Alternative way to get the CreationDate using Lua for XeTeX
\ifdefined\pdfcreationdate\else
+ \ifdefined\creationdate %% added to XeTeX in 2019
+ \let\pdfcreationdate\creationdate
+ \else
\begingroup %% ensure correct catcodes, not done by \dospecials
\catcode`\:=12 \catcode`\.=12
\begin{filecontents*}{creationdate.lua}
@@ -3833,7 +4063,7 @@
\def\noexpand\pdfcreationdate{\string D:20181028075445+10'00'}}%
\x
\fi
-\fi
+\fi \fi
%%----------------------------------------------------------------------
\def\pdfx@findUUID#1{\edef\pdfx@tmpstring{\pdfx@mdfivesum{#1}}
@@ -4004,7 +4234,7 @@
\fi\fi
}%
\fi\fi
-\hypersetup{pdfencoding=auto}% unicode
+%\hypersetup{pdfencoding=auto}% 2019-12-08 No; this writes 8-bit bookmarks.
\expandafter\ifx\csname KV@Hyp@psdextra\endcsname\relax\else
\hypersetup{psdextra}
\fi
@@ -4370,7 +4600,7 @@
%% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
\begingroup
- \catcode`\_ 12 \catcode`\" 12 \catcode`\' 12
+ \catcode`\_ 12 \catcode`\" 12 \catcode`\' 12
\catcode`\< 12 \catcode`\> 12 \catcode`\/ 12 \catcode`\[ 12 \catcode`\] 12
\edef\@pctchar{\expandafter\@gobble\string\%}
\edef\@bchar{\expandafter\@gobble\string\\}
@@ -4733,22 +4963,24 @@
\fi
}% end of \catcode
+
%% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%% \pdfx@topdfstring\toka\tokb: Convert the string in \tokb to a format
%% appropriate for PDF /Info strings, i.e., PDFDoc encoding or UTF-16
%% encoding, and store the result in \toka As a special case, if \tokb
%% is \@empty, set \toka to \@empty.
-\def\pdfx@topdfstring#1#2{%
- \ifx#2\@empty
+\RequirePackage{stringenc}% prevent it loading later inside a group
+\def\pdfx@topdfstring #1#2{%
+ \ifx #2\@empty
\global\let#1\empty
\else
\begingroup
\ifluatex\else\ifxetex\else
\inputencoding{utf8}%
\fi\fi
- \hypersetup{pdfencoding=auto}%
- \pdfstringdef#1{#2}%
+ \@ifl@t@r\fmtversion{2022/06/01}{}{\hypersetup{pdfencoding=auto}}%
+ \pdfstringdef #1{#2}%
\endgroup
\fi
}
@@ -4858,7 +5090,7 @@
\RequirePackage{stringenc}%
\begingroup
\catcode`\| 0
- \catcode `\\ 12
+ \catcode `\\ 12
|gdef |pdfx@parsebackslash#1{%
|begingroup
|def |pdfx@parsemacro{#1}%
@@ -4873,7 +5105,7 @@
|edef |pdfx@parseout{|pdfx@parseout \\}%
|def |next{|pdfx@doparsebackslash#2|pdfx@endparse}%
|fi |next
- }
+ }
|endgroup
\def\pdfx@parseend{%
\edef\next{\endgroup\def\expandafter\noexpand\pdfx@parsemacro{\pdfx@parseout}}%
@@ -5018,7 +5250,7 @@
\spacefactor\accent@spacefactor
}
%% same for named accents in math-mode
-\def\pdfx@mathaccentV#1#2#3#4#5{%
+\def\pdfx@mathaccentV #1#2#3#4#5{%
#5{\mathsurround=\z@\relax
\everymath{}%
\mathchoice
@@ -5027,12 +5259,74 @@
{\setbox\z@\hbox{$\scriptstyle #5$}\kern-\wd\z@}%
{\setbox\z@\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle #5$}\kern-\wd\z@}%
}%
+% \pdfx@AMS@mathaccentV{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
\AMS@mathaccentV{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{\phantom{#5}}%
}
+
+%%% the original AMS coding:
+%%\mathaccentV=macro: #1#2#3#4#5->\ifmmode
+%% \gdef \macc@tmp {\macc@depth \@ne }%
+%% \setbox \z@ \hbox {\let\mathaccentV \macc@test
+%% \let \use@mathgroup \@gobbletwo
+%% \let \select@group \@gobblethree \frozen@everymath {}$#5$}\macc@tmp
+%% \ifnum \macc@depth =\@ne
+%% \global \let \macc@nucleus \@empty
+%% \mathaccent "\accentclass@
+%% \else \@xp \macc@nested
+%% \fi #2#3#4{#5}\macc@nucleus
+%% \else
+%% \@xp \nonmatherr@ \csname #1\endcsname \fi .
+
+\def\pdfx@AMS@mathaccentV #1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \ifmmode
+ \gdef \macc@tmp {\macc@depth \@ne }%
+ \setbox \z@ \hbox {\let\mathaccentV \macc@test
+ \let \use@mathgroup \@gobbletwo
+ \let \select@group \@gobblethree \frozen@everymath {}$\phantom{#5}$}\macc@tmp
+ \ifnum \macc@depth =\@ne
+ \global \let \macc@nucleus \@empty
+ \mathaccent "\accentclass@
+ \else \@xp \macc@nested
+ \fi #2#3#4{#5}\macc@nucleus
+ \else
+ \@xp \nonmatherr@ \csname #1\endcsname
+ \fi
+}
+
+
+%% code supplied by Yuwsuke Kieda, 7 May 2019 :
+%% https://gist.github.com/yuw/a31936370647d0044eeb4e47f3ae913f
+%%
+\@ifpackageloaded{amsmath}{%
+ \def\pdfx@macc@a #1#2{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\macc@style#1\relax
+ \def\macc@palette ##1{##1\macc@style}%
+ \advance\macc@depth\m@ne
+ \ifnum\macc@depth=\z@
+ \gdef\macc@nucleus{\phantom{#2}}%% <<< here
+ \setbox\z@\hbox{$#1#2\@empty{}\macc@skewchar$}%
+ \setbox\tw@\hbox{$#1#2\@empty\macc@skewchar$}%
+ \dimen@\tw@\wd\tw@ \advance\dimen@-\tw@\wd\z@
+ \xdef\macc@kerna{\the\dimen@\relax}%
+ \setbox4\hbox{$#1#2\acc@check\@empty$}%
+ \global\setbox\@ne\hbox to\wd4{}%
+ \ht\@ne\ht4 \dp\@ne\dp4
+ \xdef\macc@kernb{\the\wd4\relax}%
+ \mathaccent\macc@code{\box\@ne\kern\macc@kerna}%
+ \else
+ \mathaccent\macc@code{\let\macc@adjust\@empty #1#2\@empty}%
+ \macc@adjust
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+ }}\relax
+%
\AtBeginDocument{%
\@ifpackageloaded{amsmath}{%
\let\AMS@mathaccentV\mathaccentV
- \let\mathaccentV\pdfx@mathaccentV}%
+% \let\mathaccentV\pdfx@mathaccentV
+% \let\macc@a\pdfx@macc@a
+ }%
}%
%% How to support XeTeX here ?
@@ -5284,10 +5578,25 @@
%% it should be loaded outside the grouping, else biblatex may barf
%%
\RequirePackage{ifthen}
-\begingroup
+
+%% 2024-04-05: from July 2024 LaTeX will not allow packages to load
+%% within a grouping, so reorganise a bit.
+%%
%% override the \ifpdf check of xmpincl package, inside the grouping
- \pdftrue
- \RequirePackage{xmpincl}
+%% after saving its current value:
+\let\pdfx@ifpdf\ifpdf
+\pdftrue
+%% now load the packages, then enter the grouping:
+\RequirePackage{xmpincl}
+%%
+\begingroup
+%%% 20240405 revert the value of \ifpdf ...
+\pdfx@ifpdf
+\else
+ %% 20240624 ... outside the grouping
+ \aftergroup\pdffalse
+\fi
+
%% combine coding from xmpincl and hyperxml to support XeTeX
\def\pdfx@xmpincl@xetex#1{%
\IfFileExists{#1.xmp}{%
@@ -5343,6 +5652,13 @@
%%----------------------------------------------------------------------
\begingroup
+%% 20210706 we need a pointer to unexpandable \par
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname tex_par:D\endcsname \relax
+ \let\pdfx@par\par
+ \else
+%% using LaTeX 2021-06 or later
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\pdfx@par\csname tex_par:D\endcsname
+ \fi
\ifpdfx@x
\ifpdfx@vt
\def\xmp@template{pdfvt}%
@@ -5396,9 +5712,11 @@
%% beware 128 space characters -- for padding end of XMP packet
\gdef\paddingline{ }%
\typeout{Using XMP template file: \xmp@template.xmp}%
+ %% 20210706 ensure \par is unexpandable
+ \let\par\pdfx@par
\includexmp{\xmp@template}%
\endgroup
-
+%%%
%%
%% revert active characters to previous encoding
%%
@@ -5462,13 +5780,27 @@
%%
%% controls the color model and conversions with xcolor package
%%
+\def\pdfx@selectcolormodel@doing #1{%% Warning
+ \PackageWarning{pdfx}{Setting all color commands to #1,^^J%
+ consistent with the Color Model for PDF/%
+ \ifpdfx@x X \else \ifpdfx@e E \else A \fi\fi}%
+ }%% 20240528 inhibit any changes
+\def\pdfx@selectcolormodel@done #1{%% Warning
+ \PackageWarning{pdfx}{Color Model already set for PDF/%
+ \ifpdfx@x X\else \ifpdfx@e E\else A\fi\fi,^^Jcannot change to #1 }%
+ }%% 20240528 inhibit any changes
+%%
\ifpdfx@cmyk
%
% this will have been done already for PDF/X
%
\PassOptionsToPackage{cmyk,hyperref}{xcolor}
- \def\pdfx@handlexcolor{\def\@@mod{cmyk}\selectcolormodel{cmyk}%
- \convertcolorsUtrue\convertcolorsDtrue}
+ \def\pdfx@handlexcolor{\def\@@mod{cmyk}%
+ \pdfx@selectcolormodel@doing{cmyk}%
+ \selectcolormodel{cmyk}%
+ \convertcolorsUtrue\convertcolorsDtrue
+ \let\selectcolormodel\pdfx@selectcolormodel@done
+ }
\ifpdfx@x
\else
%% \AtBeginDocument{%
@@ -5491,8 +5823,12 @@
\fi
\else
\PassOptionsToPackage{rgb,hyperref}{xcolor}
- \def\pdfx@handlexcolor{\def\@@mod{rgb}\selectcolormodel{rgb}%
- \convertcolorsUtrue\convertcolorsDtrue}
+ \def\pdfx@handlexcolor{\def\@@mod{rgb}%
+ \pdfx@selectcolormodel@doing{rgb}%
+ \selectcolormodel{rgb}%
+ \convertcolorsUtrue\convertcolorsDtrue
+ \let\selectcolormodel\pdfx@selectcolormodel@done
+ }
\fi
\@ifpackageloaded{xcolor}{\pdfx@handlexcolor
\ifpdfx@cmyk\else\color{black}\fi}{%
@@ -5628,7 +5964,9 @@
%</package>
% \fi
% \Finale
-% \let\newpage\relax
% \PrintIndex
+% \let\realGlossaryParms\GlossaryParms \let\realsubitem\subitem
+% \long\def\GlossaryParms{\realGlossaryParms \def\hdpindex ##1##2{}%
+% \long\def\subitem ##1:\ ##2\pfill{\par\hangindent 30pt\hspace*{15pt}##2\hfil}}%
% \PrintChanges
% \endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/pdfx/pdfx.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/pdfx/pdfx.ins
index afd943fbb59..88defbfee80 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/pdfx/pdfx.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/pdfx/pdfx.ins
@@ -4,9 +4,9 @@
\preamble
- Copyright (c) 2019, CV Radhakrishnan <cvr@river-valley.org>,
+ Copyright (c) 2019-2024, CV Radhakrishnan <cvr@river-valley.org>,
Han The Thanh <thanh@river-valley.org>,
- Ross Moore <ross.moore@mq.edu.au>,
+ Ross Moore <ozross@icloud.com> - primary contact,
Peter Selinger <selinger@mathstat.dal.ca>
This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/preview/preview.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/preview/preview.dtx
index f8b72e05220..cafb03636d0 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/preview/preview.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/preview/preview.dtx
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
% Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor,
% Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
% \fi
-% \CheckSum{1758}
+% \CheckSum{1770}
% \GetFileInfo{preview.sty}
% \date{\filedate}
% \author{David Kastrup\thanks{\texttt{bug-auctex@gnu.org}}}
@@ -437,8 +437,8 @@
%<*style>
%<*!active>
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
-\def\pr@version{13.3}
-\def\pr@date{2024/01/17}
+\def\pr@version{14.0.6}
+\def\pr@date{2024/06/30}
\ProvidesPackage{preview}[\pr@date\space \pr@version\space (AUCTeX/preview-latex)]
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
@@ -1427,11 +1427,17 @@ Please complain to your document class author}%
%<auccfg>\PreviewMacro*[?[{@{[]}}{}][#1]\item
%<auccfg>\PreviewMacro*\emph
%<auccfg>\PreviewMacro*\textrm
+%<auccfg>\PreviewMacro*\textbf
%<auccfg>\PreviewMacro*\textit
%<auccfg>\PreviewMacro*\textsc
%<auccfg>\PreviewMacro*\textsf
%<auccfg>\PreviewMacro*\textsl
%<auccfg>\PreviewMacro*\texttt
+%<auccfg>\PreviewMacro*\textulc
+%<auccfg>\PreviewMacro*\textmd
+%<auccfg>\PreviewMacro*\textnormal
+%<auccfg>\PreviewMacro*\textup
+%<auccfg>\PreviewMacro*\textsw
%<auccfg>\PreviewMacro*\textcolor
%<auccfg>\PreviewMacro*\mbox
%<auccfg>\PreviewMacro*[][#1{}]\author
@@ -1891,7 +1897,7 @@ Please complain to your document class author}%
% \Finale{}
% \iffalse
% Local Variables:
-% mode: doctex
+% mode: docTeX
% TeX-master: "preview.drv"
% End:
% \fi
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/se2thesis/se2colors.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/se2thesis/se2colors.dtx
index dd4b9da06cb..09e6523a9eb 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/se2thesis/se2colors.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/se2thesis/se2colors.dtx
@@ -231,7 +231,7 @@
%
% Identify the package and give the overall version information.
% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvidesExplPackage {se2colors} {2024-06-07} {4.1.0}
+\ProvidesExplPackage {se2colors} {2024-06-25} {4.2.0}
{A colour support package for the se2thesis bundle}
% \end{macrocode}
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/se2thesis/se2fonts.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/se2thesis/se2fonts.dtx
index 6915bcd2a81..bfc3210cc01 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/se2thesis/se2fonts.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/se2thesis/se2fonts.dtx
@@ -151,7 +151,7 @@
%
% Identify the package and give the overall version information.
% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvidesExplPackage {se2fonts} {2024-06-07} {4.1.0}
+\ProvidesExplPackage {se2fonts} {2024-06-25} {4.2.0}
{A font-selection support package for the se2thesis bundle}
% \end{macrocode}
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/se2thesis/se2packages.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/se2thesis/se2packages.dtx
index 8d3baeed708..4c915c3eb54 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/se2thesis/se2packages.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/se2thesis/se2packages.dtx
@@ -470,7 +470,7 @@
%
% Identify the package and give the overall version information.
% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvidesExplPackage {se2packages} {2024-06-07} {4.1.0}
+\ProvidesExplPackage {se2packages} {2024-06-25} {4.2.0}
{Supporting packages for the se2thesis bundle}
% \end{macrocode}
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/se2thesis/se2thesis.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/se2thesis/se2thesis.dtx
index 7764429e06f..0a6705aaa5b 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/se2thesis/se2thesis.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/se2thesis/se2thesis.dtx
@@ -247,7 +247,7 @@
% a bachelor thesis, |master| for a master thesis, |masterproposal| for
% a proposal to a master thesis, |phdproposal| for a proposal to a PhD thesis,
% |phd| for a PhD thesis in the natural sciences, |phdeng| for a PhD thesis
-% in engineering, and |phdphil| for a PhD thesis in philosophy.
+% in engineering, and |phdphil| for a PhD thesis in natural philosophy.
% \end{function}
%
% \begin{function}{colormode}
@@ -607,7 +607,7 @@
%
% Identify the class and give the overall version number.
% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvidesExplClass {se2thesis} {2024-06-07} {4.1.0}
+\ProvidesExplClass {se2thesis} {2024-06-25} {4.2.0}
{A thesis class for the Chair of Software Engineering II}
% \end{macrocode}
%
@@ -1283,7 +1283,7 @@
\tl_if_eq:NnTF \l_@@_thesis_type_tl { phdphil }
{
Dissertation~ zur~ Erlangung~ des~ Doktorgrades\\
- der~ Philosophie~ (Dr.\,phil.)\\
+ der~ Naturphilosophie~ (Dr.\,phil.\,nat.)\\
eingereicht~ an~ der~ Fakultät~ für~ Informatik~ und~ Mathematik\\
der~ Universität~ Passau\\
\rule{\textwidth}{.1pt}\\
@@ -1291,7 +1291,7 @@
the~ Faculty~ of~ Computer~ Science~ and~ Mathematics\\
of~ the~ University~ of~ Passau\\
in~ partial~ fulfillment~ of~ obtaining\\
- the~ degree~ of~ a~ Doctor~ of~ Philosophy
+ the~ degree~ of~ a~ Doctor~ of~ Natural~ Philosophy
} {
\tl_if_eq:NnT \l_@@_thesis_type_tl { bachelor }
{ \GetTranslation{Bachelor-thesis} }
@@ -1678,7 +1678,7 @@
% We provide the following English translations.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvideDictionaryFor{English}{se2translations}[2024/06/07]
+\ProvideDictionaryFor{English}{se2translations}[2024/06/25]
\ProvideDictTranslation{abstract}{abstract}
\ProvideDictTranslation{Abstract}{Abstract}
\ProvideDictTranslation{acknowledgement}{acknowledgement}
@@ -1729,7 +1729,7 @@
% We provide the following German translations.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvideDictionaryFor{German}{se2translations}[2024/06/07]
+\ProvideDictionaryFor{German}{se2translations}[2024/06/25]
\ProvideDictTranslation{abstract}{Zusammenfassung}
\ProvideDictTranslation{Abstract}{Zusammenfassung}
\ProvideDictTranslation{acknowledgement}{Danksagung}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/siunitx/siunitx-table.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/siunitx/siunitx-table.dtx
index b4791ce47bc..03fe45441ed 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/siunitx/siunitx-table.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/siunitx/siunitx-table.dtx
@@ -364,6 +364,7 @@
\@@_collect_search:NnF #1
{
\unskip { \@@_collect_loop: }
+ \textonly@unskip { \@@_collect_loop: }
\end { \tabularnewline \end }
\relax { \@@_collect_relax:N #1 }
\tabularnewline { \tabularnewline }
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/siunitx/siunitx.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/siunitx/siunitx.dtx
index ca2b7822aa8..bd97dc57500 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/siunitx/siunitx.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/siunitx/siunitx.dtx
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@
%
% Identify the package and give the over all version information.
% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvidesExplPackage {siunitx} {2024-06-14} {3.3.18}
+\ProvidesExplPackage {siunitx} {2024-06-24} {3.3.19}
{A comprehensive (SI) units package}
% \end{macrocode}
%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/sjtutex/sjtutex.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/sjtutex/sjtutex.dtx
index ab429d6850d..bcf46b7fbec 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/sjtutex/sjtutex.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/sjtutex/sjtutex.dtx
@@ -216,7 +216,7 @@
Please update your TeX distribution}{}}
%</class>
%<*!(driver|install)>
-%<+!driver>\GetIdInfo$Id: sjtutex.dtx 6d52363 2024-04-05 19:40:30 +0800 Alexara Wu <alexarawu@outlook.com> $
+%<+!driver>\GetIdInfo$Id: sjtutex.dtx 78f11bc 2024-06-29 23:01:32 +0800 Alexara Wu <alexarawu@outlook.com> $
%<class&thesis> {Thesis document class for Shanghai Jiao Tong University (SJTUTeX)}
%<class&thesis>\ProvidesExplClass{sjtuthesis}
%<class&report> {Report document class for Shanghai Jiao Tong University (SJTUTeX)}
@@ -335,7 +335,7 @@
%<font&cjk&founder&zh>\ProvidesExplFile{sjtu-cjk-font-founder-zh.def}
%<font&cjk&founder&ja> {Founder CJK fonts definition for Japanese (SJTUTeX)}
%<font&cjk&founder&ja>\ProvidesExplFile{sjtu-cjk-font-founder-ja.def}
-%<!driver> {\ExplFileDate}{2.1.2}{\ExplFileDescription}
+%<!driver> {\ExplFileDate}{2.1.3}{\ExplFileDescription}
%</!(driver|install)>
%
%<*driver>
@@ -343,7 +343,7 @@
\documentclass{ctxdoc}
\newcommand{\sjtutex}{SJTU\TeX}
\expandafter\def\csname ver@\jobname.dtx\endcsname
- {2024/04/05 v2.1.2 SJTUTeX}
+ {2024/06/29 v2.1.3 SJTUTeX}
\usepackage{float}
\usepackage{multirow}
\usepackage{longtable}
@@ -1638,6 +1638,14 @@
% \urlprefix\url{https://ctan.org/pkg/ctex}
% \urlprefix\CTANurl[文档及源代码:]{language/chinese/ctex/ctex.pdf}
%
+% \bibitem{zhlineskip}
+% 张瑞熹.
+% \newblock \textit{zhlineskip 宏包}\allowbreak[EB/OL].
+% \newblock version 1.0e,
+% \newblock (2019-05-15).
+% \urlprefix\url{https://ctan.org/pkg/zhlineskip}
+% \urlprefix\CTANurl[文档:]{language/chinese/zhlineskip/zhlineskip.pdf}
+%
% \bibitem{fduthesis}
% 曾祥东.
% \newblock \textit{fduthesis: 复旦大学论文模板}\allowbreak[EB/OL].
@@ -4076,6 +4084,11 @@
%<thesis> \exp_not:N \zihao { \g_@@_zihao_tl }
%<!thesis> equation-font .initial:V = \c_empty_tl
}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% 借用 \pkg{zhlineskip} 宏包的代码设置行间公式字体。
+% \begin{macrocode}
\clist_map_inline:nn
{
array, matrix, pmatrix, bmatrix, Bmatrix, vmatrix, Vmatrix,
@@ -4101,7 +4114,6 @@
\spread@equation
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{数学环境}
%
@@ -5318,23 +5330,24 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \changes{v2.1.2}{2024/03/31}{改用 \pkg{titletoc} 设置目录格式。}
+% \changes{v2.1.3}{2024/06/28}{更新目录样式。}
% \begin{macrocode}
\tl_set:Nn \SJTU@leaders { \titlerule* [ 4bp ] { . } }
\contentsmargin [ 2.55 em ] { 0 pt }
%<article>\titlecontents { section }
%<!article>\titlecontents { chapter }
[ 0 pt ] { \addvspace { 6 bp } \bfseries }
- { \contentspush { \thecontentslabel \quad } } { }
+ { \contentspush { \thecontentslabel \enskip } } { }
{ \SJTU@leaders \thecontentspage }
%<article>\titlecontents { subsection }
%<!article>\titlecontents { section }
[ 2 em ] { }
- { \contentspush { \thecontentslabel \quad } } { }
+ { \contentspush { \thecontentslabel \enskip } } { }
{ \SJTU@leaders \thecontentspage }
%<article>\titlecontents { subsubsection }
%<!article>\titlecontents { subsection }
[ 4 em ] { }
- { \contentspush { \thecontentslabel \quad } } { }
+ { \contentspush { \thecontentslabel \enskip } } { }
{ \SJTU@leaders \thecontentspage }
% \end{macrocode}
%
@@ -5357,7 +5370,7 @@
{ \SJTU@listof {#4} {#2} }
\titlecontents {#2}
[ 0 pt ] { }
- { \contentspush { #3 \space \thecontentslabel \quad } } { }
+ { \contentspush { #3 \space \thecontentslabel \enskip } } { }
{ \SJTU@leaders \thecontentspage }
\exp_args:Nnv \contentsuse {#2} { ext@ #2 }
}
@@ -6044,7 +6057,7 @@
{ address } { Shanghai,~ P.R.~ China } ,
{ author } { Author } ,
{ supervisor } { Supervisor } ,
- { assoc_supervisor } { Assoc.~ Supervisor } ,
+ { assoc_supervisor } { Assoc.\ Supervisor } ,
{ co_supervisor } { Co-supervisor } ,
{ title_page } { Title~ Page } ,
{ declaration } { Statutory~ Declaration } ,
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/spelatex/spelatex.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/spelatex/spelatex.dtx
index b906fd628b8..bdedc84d70b 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/spelatex/spelatex.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/spelatex/spelatex.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,5 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-%
% Copyright (C) 2024 by Walter Daems <walter.daems@uantwerpen.be>
% and Paul Levrie
%
@@ -34,10 +33,10 @@
\ProvidesFile{spelatex.dtx}
%</driver>
%<*package>
- [2024/06/12 v0.9 SpeLaTeX - Speech-enabled LaTeX (DMW and LVP)]
+ [2024/06/21 v0.91 SpeLaTeX - Speech-enabled LaTeX (DMW and LVP)]
%</package>
-\def\fileversion{0.9}
-\def\filedate{2024/06/12}
+\def\fileversion{0.91}
+\def\filedate{2024/06/21}
%<*driver>
\documentclass[10pt]{ltxdoc}
\usepackage{makeidx}
@@ -79,7 +78,11 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
%
-% \changes{v0.9}{2024/06/12}{. Birth}
+% \changes{v0.90}{2024/05/31}{. Birth}
+% \changes{v0.91}{2024/06/21}{. First overhaul:\\
+% - avoided big active link areas\\
+% - sketched bigger picture, leading to
+% the three project phases.}
%
% \GetFileInfo{spelatex.dtx}
%
@@ -104,14 +107,14 @@
% \spelmacad{CPAN}{see-pan}
% \newrobustcmd\POD{POD}
% \spelmacad{POD}{pod}
-% \newrobustcmd\spelwizardmodule{\texttt{SpeL::Wizard}}
-% \spelmacad{spelwizardmodule}{spel double colon wizard}
%
% \maketitle
% \fvset{gobble=2}
%
% \section{Preface}
%
+% \subsection{Background}
+%
% \begin{spelchunk}
% At our institute, the University of Antwerp in Belgium, the number
% of students with reading and/or writing disorders (or at least
@@ -138,46 +141,152 @@
% group of students. Yes, economic laws also govern teaching!
% \end{spelchunk}
%
+% \subsection{State of the art}
+%
+% \subsubsection{In general}
+%
% \begin{spelchunk}
% Therefore, reverting to readily available text-to-speech software
-% os an obvious choice. Nowadays, special software exists that
+% is an obvious choice. Nowadays, special software exists that
% provides the functionality of reading out loud the contents of
-% electronic documents. For nontechnical subjects,
-% this works fine. However, when it comes to technical course
-% syllabi that are loaded with non-trivial mathematics, the standard
-% text-to-speech packages fail to meet our expectations. In
-% addition, they cannot read a sensible textual description of
-% figures or tables.
+% electronic documents, e.g. NVDA \cite{NVDA} or
+% SprintPlus~\cite{SPRINT}. Moreover, more and more standard PDF
+% readers (such
+% as Acrobat Reader~\cite{ADOBEREADER} have the facility of
+% performing text-to-speech). For nontechnical subjects, this works
+% fine. However, when it comes to technical course syllabi that are
+% loaded with non-trivial mathematics, the standard text-to-speech
+% packages fail to meet our expectations. In addition, they cannot
+% read a sensible textual description of figures or tables.
+% \end{spelchunk}
+%
+% \begin{spelchunk}
+% The issue with reading mathematics will be solved in the future,
+% by enforcing mathematical equations to follow a specific standard
+% that can be parsed and converted, not only into a visual
+% representation, but also into proper text. MathML will be one of
+% the candidates for that format.
+% \end{spelchunk}
+%
+% \begin{spelchunk}
+% The issue with figures and tables can be solved by using the tag
+% infrastructure of PDF. The format provides a system of tags that
+% allow you to provide extra information about the content of a
+% document, in much the same way as you can specify an 'alt' key for
+% an image in HTML. This tag could contain a proper textual
+% description of the figure or the table.
% \end{spelchunk}
%
+% \subsubsection{For \LaTeX}
+%
+% \begin{spelchunk}
+% Currently, the \LaTeX project is investing in enabling \LaTeX{} to
+% partially automate the tagging of PDFs with the \texttt{tagpdf}
+% package~\cite{TAGPDF}, such that the user only has to do a minimal
+% job (adding tags for figures and tables). The goal is to maximize
+% the accessibility of \LaTeX-produced documents.
+% \end{spelchunk}
+%
% \begin{spelchunk}
-% \LaTeX{} is one of the better choices when it comes to typesetting
-% technical subjects, so why not extend \LaTeX{} to provide
-% mathematics-capable text-to-speech facilities? Our \spelatex{}
-% prototype does exactly that. Admittedly, using it causes a
-% significant overhead in writing your text. Therefore we also
-% provide you the \spelbox{} extension for the Org-mode
+% So all is well? Not quite. Though I'm confident that with enough
+% time the community will solve the issue completely, there are
+% still some gaps:
+% \end{spelchunk}
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \spelitem{The tagpdf package is still not a part of the mainstream
+% \LaTeX{}-kernel.}
+% \spelitem{MathML reading support in PDF readers is still in its
+% infancy.}
+% \spelitem{Many PDF readers do not fully support tags yet.}
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \subsection{This package}
+%
+% \begin{spelchunk}
+% This package aims to overcome these problems in the meantime and
+% also to contribute to the longterm goal: making perfectly tagged
+% PDFs that are read by any PDF-reader.
+% \end{spelchunk}
+%
+% \begin{spelchunk}
+% In the \emph{first phase} of this package (i.e. the version you are
+% looking at right now), this package reads your \LaTeX{} source,
+% converts the text and the formulas to audio files and equips your
+% PDF with hyperlinks to these files, such that with a few clicks
+% you can listen to your document.
+% The audio files are external files that should be packaged with
+% your PDF to allow a reader to use the document with the available
+% audio.
+% How does it read the formulas? It parses your \LaTeX{} constructs and
+% makes the best of it. This will probably be the part that might
+% survive up until the very last phase of this package.
+% \end{spelchunk}
+%
+% \begin{spelchunk}
+% In a \emph{second phase} of this package, the audio files will be embedded
+% into the PDF. Currently, there are not enough PDF readers that
+% support this feature. Therefore, we decided to keep using the
+% external audio files for now.
+% \end{spelchunk}
+%
+% \begin{spelchunk}
+% In a \emph{third phase}, the audio files \emph{may be} abandoned
+% alltogether, fully switching to tags. And we do think that this
+% should be the end goal. The reasons why we say
+% \emph{'may be'}, are:
+% \end{spelchunk}
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \spelitem{The voices of the current PDF-readers are still not of the
+% same quality as the ones available online. And quality does matter.}
+% \spelitem{The better voices may require cloud access, and probably
+% will not be free, therefore (me) paying for them at document creation
+% time, makes more sense to me than having my students pay
+% for these voices whenever they read the document.}
+% \spelitem{The industry standard Adobe reader is not easily available
+% on open-source operating systems (like UNIX/BSD/Linux-derived
+% platforms). You might consider using emulation using
+% wine~\cite{WINE}, but in that case you can forget about audio. Free
+% access to software is something we consider to be a must-have,
+% rather than a nice-to-have. In addition, Walter feels miserable when
+% he's forced to use anything else than GNU/Linux, because then he
+% keeps moaning that his productivity is ruined.}
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \begin{spelchunk}
+% Admittedly, in this first phase, using the \spelatex{} package
+% causes a significant overhead in writing your text. Therefore we
+% also provide you the \spelbox{} extension for the Org-mode
% \cite{ORGMODE} of \GNU{} Emacs \cite{EMACS}. To satisfy your
% curiosity: \spelbox{} stands for ``Speech-Enabled \LaTeX{} By
% Org-mode eXport''.
% \end{spelchunk}
%
% \begin{spelchunk}
-% Will AI take over the role of this package in the future?
-% Undoubtedly so. But for the time being, and also to avoid wasting
-% the enormous amount of energy AI costs us, we hope that you enjoy
+% Will \spelatex{} become obsolete in the future?
+% Undoubtedly so. But for the time being, it answers our desire to
+% provide our students with good audio support when studying their
+% engineering courses. That is now, not only in five years time.
+% \end{spelchunk}
+
+% \begin{spelchunk}
+% We hope that you enjoy
% using our software, or that --- if you are not pleased with it ---
% it triggers you to give us feedback or to come up with a better
-% solution.
+% solution. We especially would like to thank Ulrike Fischer (of the
+% \LaTeX-project and the maintainer of the tagpdf package) for
+% trying to use this package and reaching out to give us feedback.
+% One of her suggestions (not to use big hyperlink-areas) was almost
+% instantly implemented and has been adopted as the standard way of
+% linking.
% \end{spelchunk}
%
% \begin{spelchunk}
% You are free to use our software but kindly ask you to provide a
% mention ``The audio materials of this text have been prepared with
% \spelatex{}/\spelbox{}'' in the section treating copyrights,
-% bibliographic data or any other spot that is suited. I'd also
+% bibliographic data or any other spot that is suited. We'd also
% welcome a short mail of yours telling that you make use of the
-% package. The pleasure of receiving such an e-mail makes my day.
+% package. The pleasure of receiving such an e-mail makes our day.
% \end{spelchunk}
%
% \begin{spelchunk}
@@ -215,8 +324,8 @@
% \spelatex{}.\footnote{Note that multitasking is not reserved for persons
% without visual impairment. Also visually impaired persons can
% benefit from listening to an audiobook while doing other
-% things.} Personally, I often use \spelatex{} to proofread texts as I
-% hear language errors more easily than I spot them while reading.
+% things.} Personally, we often use \spelatex{} to proofread texts as we
+% hear language errors more easily than we spot them while reading.
% \end{spelchunk}
%
% \subsection{The magic under the hood}
@@ -228,9 +337,9 @@
% ecosystem. It consists of three components:
% \end{spelchunk}
% \begin{itemize}
-% \spelitem{An Org-mode exporter called \texttt{ox-spelatex} \cite{OXSPELATEX}}
+% \spelitem{An Org-mode exporter called \texttt{ox-spel} \cite{OXSPELATEX}}
% \spelitem{This \LaTeX{}-package \spelatex{} \cite{SPEL}}
-% \spelitem{A script embeded in the Perl module \spelwizardmodule~\cite{SPELWIZARD}}
+% \spelitem{A script embeded in the Perl module \texttt{SpeL::Wizard} \cite{SPELWIZARD}}
% \end{itemize}
%
% \subsubsection{The overall picture}
@@ -249,7 +358,7 @@
% \end{spelchunk}
%
% \begin{spelchunk}
-% By loading the |spelatex.sty| package in your source
+% By loading the |spel.sty| package in your source
% document, \LaTeX{} will produce a PDF file that references audio
% files that will be generated later (see below). In
% addition, it generates text chunks (i.e. small portions of
@@ -294,11 +403,11 @@
% tool/.style={rectangle,draw,align=center}]
% \node [doc] (utext) at (0,9) {text.org\\\footnotesize(unprepped
% source)};
-% \node [tool] (instrument) at (0,6) {Org-mode exporter\\\footnotesize(\texttt{ox-spelatex})};
+% \node [tool] (instrument) at (0,6) {Org-mode exporter\\\footnotesize(\spelbox)};
% \node [doc] (text) at (0,3) {text.tex\\\footnotesize(prepped source)};
% \draw[->] (utext) -- (instrument);
% \draw[->] (instrument) -- (text);
-% \node [doc] (R) at (-3,0) {spelatex.sty\\\footnotesize(package)};
+% \node [doc] (R) at (-3,0) {spel.sty\\\footnotesize(package)};
% \node [tool] (latex) at (0,0) {\LaTeX\\\footnotesize(compiler)};
% \node [doc] (pdf) at (0,-3) {text.pdf\\\footnotesize(PDF with\\\footnotesize hyperlinks)};
% \node [doc] (spelidx) at (6,-3) {text.spelidx\\\footnotesize(index file)};
@@ -313,7 +422,7 @@
% \draw[->] (latex) edge[out=10,in=90] (aux);
% \draw[->] (latex) edge[out=-10,in=90] (files);
% \node [tool] (engine) at (6,-6) {\spelpl{}\\
-% \footnotesize(\spelwizardmodule{} engine)};
+% \footnotesize(\spelatex{} engine)};
% \node [tool] (t2s) at (1.5,-6) {text-to-speech\\engine};
% \draw[->] (files) -- (engine);
% \draw[->] (spelidx) -- (engine);
@@ -339,13 +448,13 @@
% unprepped source. Read the Orgmode
% documentation on \LaTeX{} and \spelatex{}-exporting to get to know
% the format. The Orgmode \spelatex{} exporter, creates a fully
-% equipped \LaTeX{} file of your text. We call this the prepped source. You can
+% equiped \LaTeX{} file of your text. We call this the prepped source. You can
% also start by composing this file yourself.
-% If your prepped source file uses the \spelatex{} style file, then
+% If you prepped source file uses the \spelatex{} style file, than
% your compiler will generate a PDF file with hyperlinks, a
% dot aawks-file and a dot spellindex-file together with a directory full of
-% dot tech files containing the text chunks to be processed by
-% \spelpl. This is a perl script that converts the chunks into
+% dot tex files containing the text chunks to be processed by the
+% \spelpl-engine. This is a perl script that converts the chunks into
% plain text readable spel files. The script is called spel dash
% wizard dot pl. It also creates a playlist and audio files using a
% text-to-speech engine. In this case, these are
@@ -363,6 +472,28 @@
% \label{fig:setup}
% \end{figure}
%
+% \begin{spelchunk}
+% You might wonder: where are the links? Well, there are three
+% variants:
+% \end{spelchunk}
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \spelitem{\emph{area links}, which are almost exclusively
+% used for equations, tables or figures. These links make an entire
+% rectangle active, linking to the corresponding audio file.}
+% \spelitem{\emph{group links}, indicated by small right-pointing
+% triangles next to section headers. These cause all blocks in the
+% section to be read one by one.}
+% \spelitem{\emph{hidden links}, wich are, as the name suggests,
+% hidden to avoid visual disturbance of the text; every
+% paragraph, footnote and list is activated by a link on the
+% whitespace before the first line of the chunk. Try it! Once you
+% are aware that these regions are active, you'll find them
+% easily. In addition, not using the full paragraph as an active
+% region, allows existing hyperlinks (like for citations, references
+% or URLs) to still function.}
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+%
% \subsubsection{Implicit spelchunks}
% \spelmacad{usepackage}[1]{the usepackage #1 macro}
% \spelmacad{title}{the title macro}
@@ -390,7 +521,7 @@
% that follows as a first explicit argument, i.e. |\item blabla|
% should be replaced by |\spelitem{blabla}|.
% We call these \LaTeX-fragments \emph{defunct implicit
-% spelchunks}. They should have been implicit, but I could not get
+% spelchunks}. They should have been implicit, but we could not get
% that to work without problems. Therefore you need to mark them
% explicitly as |\spelitem| constructs.
% \end{spelchunk}
@@ -400,7 +531,7 @@
% One would hope that displaymath environments are also implicit
% spelchunks. However, overriding environments in \LaTeX{} is a tricky
% business. In view of this, the \spelatex{} package keeps away from
-% this, and I've chosen to treat displaymath environments (like
+% this, and we've chosen to treat displaymath environments (like
% |equation|, |eqnarray|, |gather|, |align|, |alignat|) the same way
% as tables or figures, i.e. you need to embed the in a |spelchunk|
% environment. The only difference between math environments and
@@ -472,7 +603,7 @@
% This brings us to the two top boxes in the diagram of
% Fig.~\ref{fig:setup}. If you prepare your manuscript in Org-mode,
% and use the Org-mode exporter, you don't have to worry about explicit
-% spelchunks, or defunct implicit spelchunks. Therefore, I encourage
+% spelchunks, or defunct implicit spelchunks. Therefore, we encourage
% you to use Emacs as your editor. The learning
% curve is steep, but the rewards regarding ease-of-use are huge.
% In that way, you can focus on providing textual descriptions for
@@ -485,7 +616,7 @@
% independent of Org-mode. It also shows that if you don't
% want to use Emacs and Org-mode, you will suffer some considerable
% pain in equipping your manuscript with an overload of |spelchunk|
-% environments. I have only one advice: don't use the \spelatex{}
+% environments. We have only one advice: don't use the \spelatex{}
% outside \spelbox{}. Outside a proper boxed confinement,
% spells easily become curses\ldots
% \end{spelchunk}
@@ -518,8 +649,8 @@
% \subsection{Added value}
%
% \begin{spelchunk}
-% Why would it make sense to use \spelatex? I think there are many
-% selling points. I can mention a few:
+% Why would it make sense to use \spelatex? We think there are many
+% selling points. We can mention a few:
% \end{spelchunk}
% \begin{description}
% \spelitem[Minimal overhead]{
@@ -533,7 +664,7 @@
% the effort of preparing your manuscript. There are no license
% costs involved.\\
% You could also consider to use an online paying text-to-speech
-% service. As an example, I incorporated a connection to Amazon's
+% service. As an example, We incorporated a connection to Amazon's
% Polly \cite{AWSPOLLY}.\\
% In addition, if your user has a better-quality (maybe
% commercial) text-to-speech system, he/she can reconvert the text
@@ -553,15 +684,27 @@
% \section{Installation}
%
% \subsection{The \spelatex{} package}
-
% \begin{spelchunk}
-% Most \LaTeX{} distributions use \CTAN{} as their main package source
-% and therefore will include \spelatex.
+% If you are a package manager then you'll know how to
+% prepare an installation package for \spelatex.
+% \end{spelchunk}
+%
+% \begin{spelchunk}
+% If you are a normal user then you have two options. First,
+% check if there is a package that your favorite \LaTeX{}
+% distributor has prepared for you. Most of the major distributions
+% (like e.g. \TexLive{} or \MikTeX{}) do so.\\
+% Second, grab the TDS package
+% from \CTAN{} \cite{CTAN} (spel.TDS.zip) and unzip it somewhere in your
+% own TDS tree, regenerate your filename database and off you go.
+% In any case, make sure that \LaTeX{} finds the file |spel.sty|.
% \end{spelchunk}
%
-% %\begin{spelchunk}
-% If this is not the case, contact me. I'll be glad to provide you
-% with TDS file that you can unpack in your local TDS tree.
+% \begin{spelchunk}
+% The \spelatex{} package uses a number of auxiliary packages, fetch them
+% from \CTAN{} \cite{CTAN} if your \TeX{} distributor does not provide
+% them. The ones used are: |expl3|, |hyperref|, |ifthen|,
+% |fancyvrb|, |newfile|, |rotating|, |babel|, |kvoptions|.
% \end{spelchunk}
%
% \subsection{The \spelpl{} speech generator}
@@ -576,9 +719,9 @@
% \end{spelchunk}
%
% \begin{spelchunk}
-% The only thing to do is to install the
-% \spelwizardmodule~module. You can do this with the perl pacakge
-% manager for your interpreter.
+% The only thing to do is to install the |SpeL::Wizard|
+% module. You can do this with the perl pacakge manager for your
+% interpreter.
% \end{spelchunk}
%
% \begin{spelchunk}
@@ -588,8 +731,8 @@
%
% \begin{spelchunk}
% On \GNU/Linux and MAC: |$ cpanm SpeL::Wizard|\\
-% When using Strawberry perl: |$ cpan SpeL::Wizard|\\
-% When using ActiveState perl: |$ ppm install SpeL-Wizard|
+% On Strawberry perl: |$ cpan SpeL::Wizard|\\
+% On ActiveState perl: |$ ppm install SpeL-Wizard|
% \end{spelchunk}
%
% \begin{spelchunk}
@@ -600,7 +743,7 @@
% \subsubsection{The configuration file}
% \begin{spelchunk}
% Finally, you need to provide \spelpl{} with an appropriate
-% config-file that sets up the text-to-speech conversion.
+% config-file, named |tts.conf| that sets up the text-to-speech conversion.
% Below you can find a setup for Festival \cite{FESTIVAL}:
% \begin{Verbatim}
% [engine]
@@ -615,6 +758,21 @@
% english=en1_mbrola
% \end{Verbatim}
% \end{spelchunk}
+%
+% \begin{spelchunk}
+% And additionally, for the Microsoft users a setup for Balabolka \cite{BALABOLKA}:
+% \begin{Verbatim}
+% [engine]
+% tts=balabolka
+%
+% [languagetags]
+% english=en-us
+%
+% [voices]
+% english=Zira
+% \end{Verbatim}
+% \end{spelchunk}
+%
% \begin{spelchunk}
% The tts configuration parameter defines the speech engine to use.
% The languagetags section defines how the babel languages are mapped to
@@ -630,20 +788,28 @@
% \end{Verbatim}
% \end{spelchunk}
% \begin{spelchunk}
+% If that variable is not set, the script will look in a subdirectory
+% |.spel_wizard| of your home-folder (or |%userprofile%| in
+% MS-Windows), or it will take the default that came with the
+% |SpeL::Wizard| module.
+% \end{spelchunk}
+%
+% \begin{spelchunk}
% Be aware that you need to install your text-to-speech tool yourself
-% according to the documentation provided by the tool provider. In
+% according to the documentation provided by the tool provider.
+% In addition, make sure it the executable is in your search path. In
% case you are using an online text-to-speech service provider you
% will need to get an account on their cloud platform and setup
% credentials and whatever is needed to get going. Providing
-% assistance for this is beyond the aim of this manual.%
+% assistance for this is beyond the aim of this manual.
% \end{spelchunk}
%
% \subsection{The PDF viewer}
%
% \begin{spelchunk}
% You need to make sure you have a PDF-viewer that supports links
-% containing 'run:' tags. E.g., xpdf does not \cite{XPDF}, evince
-% complains about security risks \cite{EVINCE}, but okular
+% containing 'run' tags. E.g., xpdf \cite{XPDF} does not, evince
+% \cite{EVINCE} complains about security risks, but okular
% \cite{OKULAR} and Adobe Reader \cite{ADOBEREADER} do. So does
% PDF-XChange Viewer \cite{PDFXCHANGE}.
% \end{spelchunk}
@@ -652,13 +818,16 @@
% \begin{spelchunk}
% When clicking a \spelatex-enabled item in your PDF-file, your media
-% player is started to play the |.ogg| or |.m3u|-file. On \GNU/Linux
-% most media players work fine (SoX, totem, vlc, \ldots).\\
-% On windows, I'd recommend using vlc. It works out of the box.
+% player is started to play the |.ogg| or |.m3u|-file. On GNU/Linux
+% most media players work fine (SoX, totem, vlc, \ldots).
+% \end{spelchunk}
+%
+% \begin{spelchunk}
+% On windows, we recommend using vlc. It works out of the box.
% When usign the stock Windows Media Player, you will need to add
% every folder that contains a PDF you'd like to have read, to your
% Media Player library. Search the internet to find instructions on
-% that and be prepared: in line with Microsoft standard practice it
+% that and be prepared: in line with Microsoft's standard practice it
% is well hidden in the interface.
% \end{spelchunk}
%
@@ -691,7 +860,7 @@
% required macros.
% \end{spelchunk}
%
-% \subsubsection{Treating the implicit spelchunks}
+% \subsubsection{Treat the implicit spelchunks}
% \begin{spelchunk}
% The texts of chapter, (sub)section titles, a.s.o. will be formatted
% automatically such that they are hyperlinked to the appropriate
@@ -710,7 +879,7 @@
% \begin{spelchunk}
% Example:
% \begin{Verbatim}
-% I like
+% We like
% \begin{itemize}
% \spelitem{apples,}
% \spelitem{pears, and}
@@ -732,12 +901,15 @@
% boilerplate work.
% \end{spelchunk}
%
-% \subsubsection{Treating the explicit spelchunks}
+% \subsubsection{Treat the explicit spelchunks}
%
% \begin{spelchunk}
% \DescribeEnv{spelchunk}
% Use this environment to embed the chunks of text in that you want
-% to generate audio for.
+% to generate audio for. In case the content is an equation, a
+% figure or a table, we recommend specifying |arealink| as the
+% optional argument to the |spelchunk| environment. It makes the
+% entire equation an active hyperlink.
% \end{spelchunk}
%
% \begin{spelchunk}
@@ -748,10 +920,12 @@
% \begin{Verbatim}
% \begin{spelchunk}
% An orderinary paragraph must be embedded in this environment.
-% The same holds for equations!
+% The same holds for equations! However, then we recommend using
+% the |arealink| option, as that makes the full area of the
+% equation clickable and avoids an empty white line before the
+% equation.
% \end{spelchunk}
-%
-% \begin{spelchunk}
+% \begin{spelchunk}[arealink]
% \begin{align}
% E &= m c^2\\
% e^{j\pi} &= -1
@@ -760,7 +934,7 @@
% \end{Verbatim}
%
%
-% \subsubsection{Manually providing text to read when needed}
+% \subsubsection{Manually provide text to read when needed}
% \begin{spelchunk}
% \DescribeEnv{spelchunkad}
% If you want a different text to be used for the previous
@@ -778,7 +952,7 @@
%
% \begin{spelchunk}
% Example:\\
-% {\footnotesize (note: the example below is not \spelatex{}-enabled because it also
+% {\footnotesize (note: the example below is not \spelatex{}-enabled because it
% generates internal package problems)}
% \end{spelchunk}
% \begin{Verbatim}
@@ -802,7 +976,7 @@
% \begin{spelchunk}
% Example:\\
% {\footnotesize (note: the example below is not \spelatex{}-enabled because it
-% generates internal package problems also)}
+% generates internal package problems)}
% \end{spelchunk}
% \begin{Verbatim}
% \begin{spelchunk}
@@ -874,9 +1048,9 @@
% \begin{spelchunk}
% This allows easy specification of an illustration as:
% \begin{Verbatim}
-% \begin{proof}[Illustration]{solving a quadratic equation}
-% blabla
-% \end{proof}
+% \begin{proof}[Illustration]{solving a quadratic equation}
+% blabla
+% \end{proof}
% \end{Verbatim}
% \end{spelchunk}
% \begin{spelchunk}
@@ -943,15 +1117,17 @@
% This macro typesets an enumeration set and makes sure \spelpl{}
% can read it properly.
% \end{spelchunk}
+% \begin{spelchunk}
% \begin{Verbatim}
% \begin{equation}
% P = \setenum{ 2, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, \ldots }
% \end{equation}
% \end{Verbatim}
+% \end{spelchunk}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\setdesc}
% \begin{spelchunk}
-% This macro typesets a descriptive set and makes sure \spelpl{}
+% This macro typesets an enumeration set and makes sure \spelpl{}
% can read it properly.
% \end{spelchunk}
% \begin{spelchunk}
@@ -1043,8 +1219,7 @@
% Consider the following simple definition of a polynomial function and
% check its spoken version by clicking on it.
% \end{spelchunk}
-%
-% \begin{spelchunk}
+% \begin{spelchunk}[arealink]
% \begin{equation}
% f(x) = x^{5}- x^4 + 7 x^3 + 3 x^2 - 8 x + 23
% \end{equation}
@@ -1066,7 +1241,7 @@
% equal to $\tan\alpha = -\frac{t}{2}$, the equation of the
% reflected ray is given by
% \end{spelchunk}
-% \begin{spelchunk}
+% \begin{spelchunk}[arealink]
% \[
% y-9+\frac{t^2}{4} = -\frac{4t}{4-t^2} \cdot (x-t)
% \]
@@ -1079,9 +1254,9 @@
% voorleesstem de geselecteerde taal zal volgen.
% \end{spelchunk}
%
-% \begin{spelchunk}
+% \begin{spelchunk}[arealink]
% \[
-% y-9+\frac{t^2}{4} = -(x-t) \cdot \frac{4t}{4-t^2}
+% y-9+\frac{t^2}{4} = -\frac{4t}{4-t^2} \cdot (x-t)
% \]
% \end{spelchunk}
@@ -1113,7 +1288,7 @@
% \newblock \url{http://www.cpan.org}.
% \newblock online, accessed in August 2021.
%
-% \end{thebibliography}{99}
+% \end{thebibliography}
%
% \end{document}
% \end{VerbatimOut}
@@ -1134,8 +1309,7 @@
% \end{spelchunk}
%
% \subsection{Numbers}
-%
-% \begin{spelchunk}
+% \begin{spelchunk}[arealink]
% \begin{align}
% \pi\\
% -31415\\
@@ -1149,7 +1323,7 @@
%
% \subsection{Fractions}
% \subsubsection{A fraction only containg numbers}
-% \begin{spelchunk}
+% \begin{spelchunk}[arealink]
% \begin{align}
% x &= - \frac{1}{2} \\
% y &= - \sqrt{\frac{\pi}{2}}
@@ -1157,7 +1331,7 @@
% \end{spelchunk}
%
% \subsubsection{A fraction with a little more under the hood}
-% \begin{spelchunk}
+% \begin{spelchunk}[arealink]
% \begin{align}
% u &= - \frac{x^2+35}{\sqrt{12}} \\
% v &= - \frac{\sqrt{\frac{\pi}{2}}}{-3x^2+3}
@@ -1166,8 +1340,8 @@
%
%
% \subsection{Simple expressions}
-% \subsubsection{A polynomial function}
-% \begin{spelchunk}
+% \subsubsection{A polynomial function}%
+% \begin{spelchunk}[arealink]
% \begin{equation}
% f(x) = x^{5}- x^4 + 7 x^3 + 3 x^2 - 8 x + 23
% \end{equation}
@@ -1177,7 +1351,7 @@
% \begin{spelchunk}
% Here's de Moivre's formula:
% \end{spelchunk}
-% \begin{spelchunk}
+% \begin{spelchunk}[arealink]
% \begin{equation}
% \left(\cos x+j\sin x\right)^n=\cos(nx)+j\sin(nx)
% \end{equation}
@@ -1186,7 +1360,7 @@
% \begin{spelchunk}
% Euler's relationship:
% \end{spelchunk}
-% \begin{spelchunk}
+% \begin{spelchunk}[arealink]
% \begin{equation}
% e^{j \phi} = \cos \phi + j \sin \phi
% \end{equation}
@@ -1214,7 +1388,7 @@
% \texttt{\textbackslash{}setenum} and
% \texttt{\textbackslash{}setdesc}:
% \end{spelchunk}
-% \begin{spelchunk}
+% \begin{spelchunk}[arealink]
% \begin{align}
% P &= \setenum{ 2, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, \ldots }\\
% P &= \setdesc{ n \in N \mid n \text{~is prime}}
@@ -1224,6 +1398,8 @@
% \subsection{Matrices}
% \begin{spelchunk}
% How about some linear algebra?
+% \end{spelchunk}
+% \begin{spelchunk}[arealink]
% \begin{align}
% \begin{bmatrix}
% 3 & 4 \\
@@ -1372,7 +1548,7 @@
% \section{Implementation}
% \begin{spelchunk}
% To ease the implementation work and because raw \LaTeX{} code is
-% difficult to read on itself, I took the liberty of not providing
+% difficult to read on itself, We took the liberty of not providing
% this section with speech chunks (except for this introduction
% text).
% \end{spelchunk}
@@ -1425,6 +1601,8 @@
bookmarksopen=true,
urlcolor=black}
\RequirePackage{kvoptions}
+\RequirePackage{xkeyval}
+\RequirePackage{marginnote}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Options}
@@ -1633,9 +1811,6 @@
\spel@registerelement{author}
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% \subsubsection{Boxed material}
-% by redefining the makebox, mbox and usebox commands, we can create
-%
% \subsubsection{Table of contents}
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifspel@disabled\else
@@ -1748,7 +1923,7 @@
\setcounter{spel@chunk}{0}% need this because counter resetting fails
\spel@@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}[#7]{%
\href{run:\audiodir/\spel@@optpart\thesubparagraph.\spel@format}{#8}\hfill%
- \href{run:\audiodir/\spel@@optpart\thesubparagraph.m3u}{\textcolor{black!50}{\triangleright}}}%
+ \href{run:\audiodir/\spel@@optpart\thesubparagraph.m3u}{\textcolor{black!25}{$\triangleright$}}}%
\def\spel@@label{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\else#1 \csname the#1\endcsname\fi}
\spel@idxwrite{\spel@@label}{\spel@@optpart\thesubparagraph}%
\spel@chunkwrite{\spel@@optpart\thesubparagraph}{#8}%
@@ -1786,8 +1961,9 @@
\let\spel@@fntext\@footnotetext
\long\def\@footnotetext#1{%
\stepcounter{spel@footnote}%
+ \settowidth\spel@mptboxwidth{\usebox\spel@mptbox}%
\spel@@fntext{%
- \href{run:\audiodir/footnote-\thespel@footnote.\spel@format}{#1}}
+ \hspace*{-\spel@mptboxwidth}\href{run:\audiodir/footnote-\thespel@footnote.\spel@format}{\usebox\spel@mptbox}#1}%
\spel@idxwrite{footnote}{footnote-\thespel@footnote}%
\spel@chunkwrite{footnote-\thespel@footnote}{#1}%
}
@@ -1825,10 +2001,10 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\spelitem@intone#1{%
\stepcounter{spel@chunk}%
+ \settowidth\spel@mptboxwidth{\usebox\spel@mptbox}%
\spel@idxwrite{item}{\spel@@optpart\thesubparagraph-\thespel@chunk}%
\spel@chunkwrite{\spel@@optpart\thesubparagraph-\thespel@chunk}{#1}%
- \item \href{run:\audiodir/\spel@@optpart\thesubparagraph-\thespel@chunk.\spel@format}{#1}
-}
+ \item \hspace*{-\spel@mptboxwidth}\href{run:\audiodir/\spel@@optpart\thesubparagraph-\thespel@chunk.\spel@format}{\usebox\spel@mptbox}#1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
@@ -1838,10 +2014,10 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\spelitem@inttwo#1#2{%
\stepcounter{spel@chunk}%
+ \settowidth\spel@mptboxwidth{\usebox\spel@mptbox}%
\spel@idxwrite{item}{\spel@@optpart\thesubparagraph-\thespel@chunk}%
\spel@chunkwrite{\spel@@optpart\thesubparagraph-\thespel@chunk}{#1 . #2}%
- \item[#1] \href{run:\audiodir/\spel@@optpart\thesubparagraph-\thespel@chunk.\spel@format}{#2}
-}
+\item[#1] \hspace*{-\spel@mptboxwidth}\href{run:\audiodir/\spel@@optpart\thesubparagraph-\thespel@chunk.\spel@format}{\usebox\spel@mptbox}#2}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
@@ -1868,6 +2044,11 @@
% \begin{environment}{spelchunk}
% The |spelchunk| environment is used to define explicit speech chunks.
% \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength\spel@mptboxwidth
+\newsavebox\spel@mptbox
+\savebox\spel@mptbox{\textcolor{black!25}{$\qquad$}}
+\newif\ifspel@chunkarealink
+\define@key{spelchunk}{arealink}[]{\spel@chunkarealinktrue}
\ifspel@disabled\def\spelchunk{}\else
\def\spelchunk{%
\catcode`\^^M=\active%
@@ -1879,7 +2060,13 @@
\def\endspelchunk{%
\end{VerbatimOut}%
\catcode`\^^M=5\relax%
- \href{run:\audiodir/\spel@@optpart\thesubparagraph-\thespel@chunk.\spel@format}{\input{./\chunkdir/\spel@@optpart\thesubparagraph-\thespel@chunk}\leavevmode}%
+ \ifspel@chunkarealink%
+ \href{run:\audiodir/\spel@@optpart\thesubparagraph-\thespel@chunk.\spel@format}{\input{./\chunkdir/\spel@@optpart\thesubparagraph-\thespel@chunk}}%
+ \else%
+ \settowidth\spel@mptboxwidth{\usebox\spel@mptbox}%
+ \hspace*{-\spel@mptboxwidth}\href{run:\audiodir/\spel@@optpart\thesubparagraph-\thespel@chunk.\spel@format}{\usebox\spel@mptbox}\input{./\chunkdir/\spel@@optpart\thesubparagraph-\thespel@chunk}%
+ \fi%
+ \spel@chunkarealinkfalse%
}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -1891,7 +2078,7 @@
% This is macro that deals with the optional arguments of the
% |spelchunk| envronment.
% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\spelchunk@opt[#1]{\fvset{#1}\spelchunk@int}
+\def\spelchunk@opt[#1]{\setkeys{spelchunk}{#1}\spelchunk@int}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
@@ -1905,7 +2092,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
-% \subsubsection{Provideing an explicit audiodescription for a spelchunk}
+% \subsubsection{Explicit spelchunks}
%
% \begin{environment}{spelchunkad}
% The |spelchunkad| environment is used to override a previous speech
@@ -2052,10 +2239,10 @@
% We immediately provide some standard constructs, which are to be
% ignored:
% \begin{macrocode}
-\spelmacad{spelatex}{spee-laytech}
+\spelmacad{spelatex}{spee-lay-tech}
\spelmacad{spelbox}{spel-box}
\spelmacad{spelpl}{spel wizzard dot pl}
-\spelmacad{LaTeX}{laytech}
+\spelmacad{LaTeX}{lay-tech}
\spelmacad{TeX}{tech}
\spelmacad{textsf}[1]{#1}
\spelmacad{texttt}[1]{#1}
@@ -2107,7 +2294,7 @@
\spelenvad{center}{}{}
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% \subsection{Implementing the extra math commands}
+% \subsection{Extra math commands}
%
% The commands are only loaded if the package option |extramath| is
% provided:
@@ -2145,35 +2332,71 @@
%</package>
% \end{macrocode}
% \fi
-
+%
+% \section{TODO}
+% \begin{spelchunk}[arealink]
+% As long as there are things on my todo list, We have a reason to
+% live.
+% \end{spelchunk}
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \spelitem{provide enable/disable switch to disable certain ranges in
+% text, e.g. the implementation range in this document}
+% \spelitem{enable bibliography and citation stuff}
+% \end{itemize}
%
% \bibliographystyle{alpha}
%
% \begin{thebibliography}{99}
%
-% \bibitem{EMACS}
-% The Emacs An extensible, customizable, free text editor --- and
-% more.
-% \newblock \url{https://www.gnu.org/software/emacs/}.
+% \bibitem{NVDA}
+% NVDA from NV Access, empowering lives through non-visual access to technology
+% \newblock \url{https://www.nvaccess.org}
+% \newblock online, accessed in June 2024.
+%
+% \bibitem{SPRINT}
+% SprintPlus, helping people with dyslexia
+% \newblock \url{https://www.sprintplus.be/en}
+% \newblock online, accessed in June 2024.
+%
+% \bibitem{ADOBEREADER}
+% Adobe Reader, a PDF reader from Adobe.
+% \newblock \url{https://get.adobe.com/}
% \newblock online, accessed in May 2024.
%
+% \bibitem{TAGPDF}
+% TagPDF - Tools for experimenting with tagging using pdfLaTeX and
+% LuaLaTeX.
+% \newblock \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/tagpdf}
+% \newblock online, accessed in June 2024.
+%
+% \bibitem{WINE}
+% Wine - Wine Is Not an Emulator - running windows applications on POSIX-compliant systems.
+% \newblock \url{https://www.winehq.org}
+% \newblock online, accessed in June 2024.
+%
% \bibitem{ORGMODE}
% Org Mode --- your life in plain text.
% \newblock \url{https://orgmode.org/}.
% \newblock online, accessed in May 2024.
%
+% \bibitem{EMACS}
+% The Emacs An extensible, customizable, free text editor --- and
+% more.
+% \newblock \url{https://www.gnu.org/software/emacs/}.
+% \newblock online, accessed in May 2024.
+%
% \bibitem{OXSPELATEX}
% Org Mode SpeLaTeX Exporter --- SpeLaTeX made easy.
% \newblock \url{https://www.melpa.org/#/ox-spelatex}
% \newblock (not yet online)
%
% \bibitem{SPEL}
-% SpeL --- Speech-enabled LaTeX.
+% SpeL --- Speech-enabled \LaTeX.
% \newblock \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/spel}
% \newblock online, accessed in June 2024.
%
% \bibitem{SPELWIZARD}
-% SpeL::Wizard --- Incantating LaTeX into natural lanuage
+% SpeL::Wizard --- Incantating \LaTeX{} into natural lanuage
% \newblock \url{https://metacpan.org/pod/SpeL::Wizard}
% \newblock online, accessed in June 2024.
%
@@ -2222,11 +2445,6 @@
% \newblock \url{https://okular.kde.org}.
% \newblock online, accessed in May 2024.
%
-% \bibitem{ADOBEREADER}
-% Adobe Reader, a PDF reader from Adobe.
-% \newblock \url{https://get.adobe.com/}
-% \newblock online, accessed in May 2024.
-%
% \bibitem{PDFXCHANGE}
% PDF XChange Viewer, a PDF reader from Tracker Software.
% \newblock \url{https://www.pdf-xchange.com/}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/texvc/Makefile b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/texvc/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d32d473d3bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/texvc/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+PACKAGE = texvc
+all: $(PACKAGE).pdf
+
+$(PACKAGE).sty: $(PACKAGE).dtx $(PACKAGE).ins
+ pdflatex $(PACKAGE).ins
+
+$(PACKAGE).idx: $(PACKAGE).dtx $(PACKAGE).sty
+ pdflatex $(PACKAGE).dtx
+
+$(PACKAGE).ind: $(PACKAGE).idx $(PACKAGE).sty
+ makeindex -s gind.ist $(PACKAGE).idx
+
+$(PACKAGE).gls: $(PACKAGE).idx $(PACKAGE).sty
+ makeindex -s gglo.ist -o $(PACKAGE).gls $(PACKAGE).glo
+
+$(PACKAGE).pdf: $(PACKAGE).dtx $(PACKAGE).sty $(PACKAGE).ind $(PACKAGE).gls
+ pdflatex $(PACKAGE).dtx
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/texvc/texvc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/texvc/texvc.dtx
index 429a1a5e6e1..7309d0266f7 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/texvc/texvc.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/texvc/texvc.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright (C) 2015 by Moritz Schubotz
+% Copyright (C) 2015-2018 by Moritz Schubotz
% -----------------------------------
%
% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[2005/12/01]
%<package>\ProvidesPackage{texvc}
%<*package>
-[2018/03/04 v1.1 Bugfixes]
+[2020/02/09 v1.2 Document deprecations]
%</package>
%<package>
%<package>\RequirePackage{amsmath}
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@
%<package>
%<*driver>
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\usepackage{texvc}[2018/03/04]
+\usepackage{texvc}[2020/02/09]
\EnableCrossrefs
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
@@ -75,19 +75,21 @@
%
% \changes{v1.0}{2015/11/09}{Initial version}
% \changes{v1.1}{2018/03/04}{Fix bug with varcoppa, document usage of or}
+% \changes{v1.2}{2020/02/09}{Document deprecations}
% \GetFileInfo{texvc.sty}
-%
+% \newcommand{\deprecated}{\emph{This command is deprecated.}}
% \DoNotIndex{\newcommand,\newenvironment}
%
% \title{The \textsf{texvc} package\thanks{This document
% corresponds to \textsf{texvc}~\fileversion,
% dated \filedate.}}
-% \author{Moritz Schubotz \\ \texttt{moritz.schubotz@uni-konstanz.de}}
-%
+% \author{Moritz Schubotz \\ \texttt{moritz.schubotz@fiz-karlsruhe.de}}
+% \date{\filedate}
+%
% \maketitle
%
% \begin{abstract}
-% This package provides all\footnote{The command \texttt{\textbackslash or} is only availible if custom code is copied into your \LaTeX-file. See page \pageref{cmd.or} for details.} LaTeX command availible in MediaWiki.
+% This package provides all\footnote{The command \texttt{\textbackslash or} is only available if custom code is copied into your \LaTeX-file. See page \pageref{cmd.or} for details.} LaTeX command available in MediaWiki.
% This includes several packages like amsmath, and adds some specific
% commands such as \texttt{\textbackslash Reals}.
% \end{abstract}
@@ -95,7 +97,7 @@
% \section{Provided Macros}
%
% \subsection{Arrows}
-% The first group of MediaWiki coustom command (other\_delimiters2) defines short hand notations for some arrorws.
+% The first group of MediaWiki custom command (other\_delimiters2) defines short hand notations for some arrows.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\darr} Short hand notation for arrow $\downarrow.$
%
@@ -122,12 +124,12 @@
%
% \subsection{Literals}
%
-% The second group of MediaWiki coustom commands (other\_litereals3) defines short hand notations for some literals.
+% The second group of MediaWiki custom commands (other\_litereals3) defines short hand notations for some literals.
%
-% \DescribeMacro{\C} Short hand notation for literal $\mathbb{C}.$
+% \DescribeMacro{\C} Short hand notation for literal $\mathbb{C}.$ \deprecated
%
%
-% \DescribeMacro{\H} Short hand notation for literal $\mathbb{H}.$
+% \DescribeMacro{\H} Short hand notation for literal $\mathbb{H}.$ \deprecated
%
%
% \DescribeMacro{\N} Short hand notation for literal $\mathbb{N}.$
@@ -151,10 +153,10 @@
% \DescribeMacro{\Alpha} Short hand notation for literal $\mathrm{A}.$
%
%
-% \DescribeMacro{\and} Short hand notation for literal $\land.$
+% \DescribeMacro{\and} Short hand notation for literal $\land.$ \deprecated
%
%
-% \DescribeMacro{\ang} Short hand notation for literal $\angle.$
+% \DescribeMacro{\ang} Short hand notation for literal $\angle.$ \deprecated
%
%
% \DescribeMacro{\Beta} Short hand notation for literal $\mathrm{B}.$
@@ -277,10 +279,10 @@
% \DescribeMacro{\Omicron} Short hand notation for literal $\mathrm{O}.$
%
%
-% \DescribeMacro{\or} Short hand notation for literal $\lor.$
+% \DescribeMacro{\or} Short hand notation for literal $\lor.$ \deprecated
%
%
-% \DescribeMacro{\part} Short hand notation for literal $\partial.$
+% \DescribeMacro{\part} Short hand notation for literal $\partial.$ \deprecated
%
%
% \DescribeMacro{\plusmn} Short hand notation for literal $\pm.$
@@ -342,7 +344,21 @@
%
% \DescribeMacro{\Zeta} Short hand notation for literal $\mathrm{Z}.$
%
-%
+% \section{Deprecations}
+% According to the decision of \emph{Wikimedia Community User Group Math}\footnote{\url{https://meta.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?oldid=19705444}} the following macros have been deprecated\footnote{See \url{https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T197842} for the discussion.}:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item \verb|$|
+% \item \verb|%|
+% \item \verb|\and|
+% \item \verb|\or|
+% \item \verb|\part|
+% \item \verb|\ang|
+% \item \verb|\C|
+% \item \verb|\H|
+% \item \verb|\bold|
+% \item \verb|\Bbb|
+% \end{enumerate}
+% The commands 1,2,4,9,10 have never been part of this package, but were available from within Wikipedia.
% \StopEventually{}
%
% \section{Implementation}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/texvc/texvc.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/texvc/texvc.ins
index 5343a6a94fb..0c12dd61eb8 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/texvc/texvc.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/texvc/texvc.ins
@@ -1,42 +1,42 @@
-%%
-%% Copyright (C) 2015 by Moritz Schubotz
-%%
-%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
-%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
-%% version. The latest version of this license is in:
-%%
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%%
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
-%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
-%%
-\input docstrip.tex
-\keepsilent
-\usedir{tex/latex/texvc}
-\askforoverwritefalse
-\preamble
-This is a generated file.
-Copyright (C) 2015 by Moritz Schubotz
-This file may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
-version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
-version. The latest version of this license is in:
-http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
-LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
-\endpreamble
-\generate{\file{texvc.sty}{\from{texvc.dtx}{package}}}
-\Msg{*********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the}
-\Msg{* following file into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space texvc.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the file texvc.dtx}
-\Msg{* through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing!}
-\Msg{*********************************************************}
-\endbatchfile
+%%
+%% Copyright (C) 2015-2018 by Moritz Schubotz
+%%
+%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+%% version. The latest version of this license is in:
+%%
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%%
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+%% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%%
+\input docstrip.tex
+\keepsilent
+\usedir{tex/latex/texvc}
+\askforoverwritefalse
+\preamble
+This is a generated file.
+Copyright (C) 2015-2018 by Moritz Schubotz
+This file may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+version. The latest version of this license is in:
+http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+\endpreamble
+\generate{\file{texvc.sty}{\from{texvc.dtx}{package}}}
+\Msg{*********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the}
+\Msg{* following file into a directory searched by TeX:}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* \space\space texvc.sty}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the file texvc.dtx}
+\Msg{* through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing!}
+\Msg{*********************************************************}
+\endbatchfile
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/thuthesis/thuthesis.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/thuthesis/thuthesis.dtx
index ea4ac03f229..e6f3e46ad82 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/thuthesis/thuthesis.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/thuthesis/thuthesis.dtx
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
%
% \iffalse
%<*driver>
-\ProvidesFile{thuthesis.dtx}[2024/05/20 7.5.1 Tsinghua University Thesis Template]
+\ProvidesFile{thuthesis.dtx}[2024/07/01 7.5.2 Tsinghua University Thesis Template]
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\usepackage{dtx-style}
@@ -251,7 +251,7 @@
% $ bibtex thuthesis-example.aux # 生成 bbl 文件
% $ bibtex thuthesis-example-appendix-a.aux # 附录 A 的的参考文献
% $ bibtex thuthesis-example-appendix-b.aux # 附录 B 的的参考文献……
-% $ bibtex thuthesis-example-index.aux # 本科生的书面翻译对应的原文索引
+% $ bibtex thuthesis-example-index-1.aux # 本科生的书面翻译对应的原文索引
% $ xelatex thuthesis-example.tex # 解决引用
% $ xelatex thuthesis-example.tex # 生成论文 PDF
%
@@ -813,7 +813,7 @@
% }
% \end{latex}
%
-% 用户也可以逐项修改数学样式。
+% 用户也可以逐项修改数学样式,包括:
% \newcommand\dif{\mathop{}\!\mathrm{d}}
% \begin{enumerate}
% \item \DescribeOption{uppercase-greek}
@@ -885,12 +885,16 @@
% 模板作了处理,用户可以直接使用这些宏包的命令,如 \cs{bm}、\cs{mathscr}、
% \cs{uppi}。
%
-% 另外,模板还为 `math-font` 提供了传统的 Type 1 字体 \option{newtx}。
+% 另外,模板还为 |math-font| 提供了传统的 Type 1 字体 \option{newtx}。
% 该选项会调用 \pkg{newtxmath} 宏包。
% 但是,如果西文字体已经使用了 OpenType 的 Times New Roman,
% 混用 Type 1 字体可能会导致问题,尤其是使用 \pkg{siunitx} 宏包时。
% 该选项还处于测试阶段,需要谨慎使用。
%
+% \DescribeOption{eqn-paren-style}
+% 控制中文论文中,数学公式编号两边的括号样式。可选项包括:\option{full}(全角,默认) / \option{half}(半角)。
+% 在语言为英语(|language = english|)时,此选项无效,仅使用半角括号。
+%
% \subsubsection{定理环境}
% \label{sec:theorem}
% \thuthesis{} 定义了常用的数学环境:
@@ -1269,7 +1273,7 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
%<cls>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[2017/04/15]
%<cls>\ProvidesClass{thuthesis}
-%<cls>[2024/05/20 7.5.1 Tsinghua University Thesis Template]
+%<cls>[2024/07/01 7.5.2 Tsinghua University Thesis Template]
% \end{macrocode}
%
% 报错
@@ -1330,7 +1334,7 @@
%<*cls>
\hyphenation{Thu-Thesis}
\def\thuthesis{ThuThesis}
-\def\version{7.5.1}
+\def\version{7.5.2}
\RequirePackage{kvdefinekeys}
\RequirePackage{kvsetkeys}
\RequirePackage{kvoptions}
@@ -1658,6 +1662,17 @@
},
default = print,
},
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% 数学公式编号的括号使用全角还是半角。
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ eqn-paren-style = {
+ name = eqn@paren@style,
+ choices = {
+ full,
+ half,
+ }
+ },
}
\newif\ifthu@degree@graduate
\newcommand\thu@set@graduate{%
@@ -3511,10 +3526,23 @@
% 中文模板的公式编号使用中文括号。需要修改 \pkg{amsmath} 的 \cs{tagform@}。
% 这里中文的 \cs{unskip} 是为了“|式~\eqref|”这样的写法不产生额外的空格。
% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\thu@eqn@left@paren{(}
+\newcommand\thu@eqn@right@paren{)}
+\newcommand\thu@set@eqn@paren@style{%
+ \ifthu@eqn@paren@style@full
+ \renewcommand\thu@eqn@left@paren{(}%
+ \renewcommand\thu@eqn@right@paren{)}%
+ \else
+ \renewcommand\thu@eqn@left@paren{(}%
+ \renewcommand\thu@eqn@right@paren{)}%
+ \fi
+}
+\thu@set@eqn@paren@style
+\thu@option@hook{eqn-paren-style}{\thu@set@eqn@paren@style}
\newcommand\thu@put@parentheses[1]{%
\ifthu@language@chinese
\unskip
- (#1)%
+ \thu@eqn@left@paren#1\thu@eqn@right@paren
\else
(#1)%
\fi
@@ -6347,9 +6375,11 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{translation-index}{}{}
\AtEndOfPackageFile*{bibunits}{
+ \newcounter{thu@translation@index}%
\renewenvironment{translation-index}{%
+ \global\advance\c@thu@translation@index\@ne
\begin{bibunit}%
- \renewcommand\@bibunitname{\jobname-index}%
+ \renewcommand\@bibunitname{\jobname-index-\arabic{thu@translation@index}}%
\renewcommand\bibname{书面翻译对应的原文索引}%
\thu@set@survey@bibheading
}{%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/uantwerpendocs/uantwerpendocs.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/uantwerpendocs/uantwerpendocs.dtx
index 141b590a991..acddbf252f9 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/uantwerpendocs/uantwerpendocs.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/uantwerpendocs/uantwerpendocs.dtx
@@ -35,11 +35,11 @@
%<le>\ProvidesClass{uantwerpenletter}
%<ex>\ProvidesClass{uantwerpenexam}
%<bmr>\ProvidesPackage{beamerthemeuantwerpen}
-%<cls|ct|bmt|pt|rp|le|ex|bmr> [2024/04/09 v4.6 .dtx skeleton file]
+%<cls|ct|bmt|pt|rp|le|ex|bmr> [2024/06/04 v4.7 .dtx skeleton file]
%<*driver>
\documentclass[a4paper]{ltxdoc}
-\def\fileversion{4.6}
-\def\filedate{2024/04/09}%
+\def\fileversion{4.7}
+\def\filedate{2024/06/24}%
\usepackage{makeidx}
\usepackage{alltt}
\usepackage{longtable}
@@ -127,6 +127,7 @@
% multiple degree programs for exams and course texts, corrected
% disclaimers, replaced 'basic usage' in documentation by heavily
% commented examples}
+% \changes{v4.7}{2024/06/13}{\@ Minor bugfixes}
%
% \DoNotIndex{\newcommand,\newenvironment,\begin,\bfseries,\draw,\clip,\else,\fi,\if,\fill,\filldraw,\ifthenelse,\ifx,\textwidth,\node,\\,\@empty,\@tempdima,\@tempdimb,\@tempswatrue,\{,\},\ ,\bf,\BODY,\break,\Alph,\and,\define@key,\color,\dx,\dy,\g,\gdef,\hbox,\tiny,\scriptsize,\footnotesize,\small,\normalsize,\large,\Large,\LARGE,\huge,\Huge,\l,\LaTeX,\let,\p@,\relax,\renewcommand,\Requirepackage,\textbf,\textsf,\texttt,\textbackslash,\vspace,\hspace,\hfill,\hskip,\vskip,\hline,\vrule,\typeout,\usebox,\end,\paperheight,\paperwidth,\par,\NewDocumentCommand,\seq}
% \setlength{\parindent}{0em}
@@ -1043,6 +1044,7 @@
\@author
\end{center}
]
+
\kant[11]
\kant[12]
@@ -1216,8 +1218,8 @@
\titlepageimage{Images/uantwerpen-keyboard.jpg}
%% some data about your manuscript
-\isbn{987-90-57285-34-7} %% don't specify this if you don't want one
-\depot{D/2024/12.293/03} %% idem
+%% \isbn{987-90-57285-34-7} %% only secify one if you have obtained one!
+%% \depot{D/2024/12.293/03} %% idem
\begin{document}
@@ -1370,8 +1372,8 @@
\titlepageimage{Images/uantwerpen-keyboard.jpg}
%% some data about your manuscript
-\isbn{987-90-57285-34-7} %% don't specify this if you don't want one
-\depot{D/2024/12.293/03} %% idem
+%% \isbn{987-90-57285-34-7} %% only secify one if you have obtained one!
+%% \depot{D/2024/12.293/03} %% idem
\begin{document}
@@ -4654,8 +4656,8 @@ we-nl-ma-wiftw = Master of Science in wiskunde: financiële en toegepaste wiskun
xshift=1pt]
at (3.5cm,\paperheight-6.4cm)
{\sethlcolor{maincolor}%
- \textsf{\textbf{\reversevideo{\@title}}}\\
- \textsf{\reversevideo{\@subtitle}}};
+ \textsf{\textbf{\reversevideo{\@title}}}%
+ \ifx\@subtitle\empty\else\\\textsf{\reversevideo{\@subtitle}}\fi};
\node
[anchor=north west,font=\LARGE,yshift=-1cm,xshift=-1pt]
at (title.south west)
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/ulthese/ulthese.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/ulthese/ulthese.dtx
index 0d790808812..58da90e888d 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/ulthese/ulthese.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/ulthese/ulthese.dtx
@@ -1,340 +1,490 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
+% \iffalse meta-comment -*- mode: doctex -*-
%
-% Copyright (C) 2021 Universite Laval
+% Thesis class for Universite Laval
+%
+% Copyright (C) 2012-2024 Universite Laval
%
% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions
% of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c of this
% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version
% of this license is in:
%
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%
-% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2006/05/20 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Universite Laval
-% <ulthese-dev@bibl.ulaval.ca>.
-%
-% This work consists of the files ulthese.dtx and ulthese.ins
-% and the derived files listed in the README.md file.
+% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
%
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is Vincent Goulet for
+% Universite Laval <ulthese-dev@bibl.ulaval.ca>.
% \fi
%
% \iffalse
%<*dtx>
\ProvidesFile{ulthese.dtx}
%</dtx>
-%<class>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[2009/09/24]
+%<class>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[2021/06/01]
%<class>\ProvidesClass{ulthese}%
%<*class>
- [2021/08/09 v5.3a Universite Laval thesis and memoir class]
+ [2024/07/02 v6.0 Thesis class for Universite Laval]
%</class>
%<*driver>
-\documentclass[11pt,english,french]{ltxdoc}
- \usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
- \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
- \usepackage{natbib}
+\documentclass[article,oneside,11pt,x11names,english,french]{memoir}
\usepackage{babel}
\usepackage[autolanguage]{numprint}
- \usepackage{microtype}
- \usepackage[scaled=0.92]{helvet}
- \usepackage[scaled=1.02]{inconsolata}
- \usepackage[sc]{mathpazo}
- \usepackage{fontawesome}
+ \usepackage[round,semicolon,authoryear,sectionbib]{natbib}
\usepackage{metalogo}
- \usepackage{tabularx,booktabs,caption}
+ \usepackage{enumitem}
+ \usepackage{relsize}
+ \usepackage{awesomebox}
+
+ %% Le chargement de doc.sty cause des conflits avec memoir. Il faut:
+ %%
+ %% - annuler la définition de l'environnement 'glossary' de memoir;
+ %% - remettre en place les définitions standards des commandes pour
+ %% le glossaire sur lesquelles se base doc.sty (nécessaire aussi
+ %% pour l'index, mais il n'est pas utilisé).
+ \let\theglossary\relax % avoid conflict with doc.sty
+ \let\endtheglossary\relax % avoid conflict with doc.sty
+ \makeatletter
+ \def\makeglossary{%
+ \newwrite\@glossaryfile
+ \immediate\openout\@glossaryfile=\jobname.glo
+ \def\glossary{\@bsphack\begingroup
+ \@sanitize
+ \@wrglossary}\typeout
+ {Writing glossary file \jobname.glo }%
+ \let\makeglossary\@empty
+ }
+ \@onlypreamble\makeglossary
+ \def\@wrglossary#1{%
+ \protected@write\@glossaryfile{}%
+ {\string\glossaryentry{#1}{\thepage}}%
+ \endgroup
+ \@esphack}
+ \def\glossary{\@bsphack\begingroup\@sanitize\@index}
+ \@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse % turn off twoside option
+ \makeatother
+ \usepackage{doc}
+ \def\changes#1#2#3{\glossary{#1>#3}} % simplification
\DisableCrossrefs
\CodelineNumbered
\RecordChanges
- \GlossaryPrologue{\section*{Historique des versions}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Historique des versions}}
+ %\OnlyDescription
+ \DontCheckModules
+
+ %% Polices de caractères
+ \iftutex
+ \usepackage[babel=true]{microtype}
+ \usepackage{fontspec}
+ \usepackage{unicode-math}
+ \setmainfont{STIXTwoText}
+ [
+ Extension = .otf,
+ UprightFont = *-Regular,
+ BoldFont = *-SemiBold,
+ ItalicFont = *-Italic,
+ BoldItalicFont = *-SemiBoldItalic,
+ Numbers = {Proportional,OldStyle},
+ Scale = 1,
+ Ligatures = TeX
+ ]
+ \setsecheadstyle{\normalfont\Large\sffamily\bfseries\raggedright}
+ \setsubsecheadstyle{\normalfont\large\sffamily\bfseries\raggedright}
+ \setsubsubsecheadstyle{\normalfont\sffamily\bfseries\raggedright}
+ \else
+ \usepackage[babel=true]{microtype}
+ \usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+ \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+ \usepackage[stix2]{newtxmath}
+ \fi
+ \usepackage[book,medium,proportional,oldstyle,scale=0.92]{FiraSans}
+ \usepackage[medium,lining,scale=0.90]{FiraMono}
%% Couleurs
\usepackage{xcolor}
- \definecolor{link}{rgb}{0,0.4,0.6} % ~RoyalBlue de dvips
- \definecolor{url}{rgb}{0.6,0,0} % rouge foncé
- \definecolor{citation}{rgb}{0,0.5,0} % vert foncé
-
- %% Liste description alignée à gauche
- \usepackage{enumitem}
- \setlist[description]{leftmargin=*,align=left}
-
- %% Environnement pour remarques
- \usepackage{amsthm}
- \theoremstyle{definition}
- \newtheorem*{rem}{Remarque}
+ \definecolor{link}{rgb}{0,0.4,0.6} % liens internes
+ \definecolor{url}{rgb}{0.6,0,0} % liens externes
+ \definecolor{citation}{rgb}{0,0.5,0} % citations
%% Hyperliens
- \usepackage{hyperref}
- \hypersetup{%
- pdfauthor = {Faculté des études supérieures et postdoctorales},
- pdftitle = {Guide de l'utilisateur de la classe ulthese},
- colorlinks = {true},
- linktocpage = {true},
- urlcolor = {url},
- linkcolor = {link},
- citecolor = {citation},
- pdfpagemode = {UseOutlines},
- pdfstartview = {Fit},
- bookmarksopen = {true},
- bookmarksnumbered = {true},
- bookmarksdepth = {subsubsection}}
- \addto\extrasfrench{%
- \def\appendixautorefname{annexe}%
- \def\tableautorefname{tableau}%
- \def\subsectionautorefname{section}%
+ \AtEndPreamble{%
+ \usepackage{bookmark} % charge hyperref
+ \hypersetup{%
+ pdftitle = {Guide d'utilisation de la classe ulthese},
+ pdfauthor = {Faculté des études supérieures et postdoctorales},
+ colorlinks = {true},
+ urlcolor = {url},
+ linkcolor = {link},
+ citecolor = {citation}}
+ \bookmarksetup{%
+ open = true,
+ depth = 3,
+ numbered = true}
+ \addto\extrasfrench{%
+ \def\subsectionautorefname{section}%
+ }
}
%% Paramétrage de babel
- \frenchbsetup{%
- StandardItemizeEnv=true, % listes standards
+ \frenchsetup{%
+ SmallCapsFigTabCaptions=false, % pas de petites capitales
ThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers=true, % espace fine dans les nombres
og=«, fg=» % « et » sont les guillemets
}
- \def\frenchtablename{{\scshape Tab.}}
+ \renewcommand*\frenchtablename{Tab.}
+ \renewcommand*\frenchfigurename{Fig.}
+ \renewcommand*\generalname{Général} % mot clé du glossaire
+
+ %% Désactiver le niveau des chapitres de memoir
+ \let\chapter\relax
+ \counterwithout{section}{chapter}
+
+ %% Utiliser une numérotation des sections à trois niveaux
+ \setsecnumdepth{subsubsection}
+ \maxsecnumdepth{subsubsection}
+
+ % Les annexes sont des sections, ici. Redéfinir la
+ % commande \appendix comme dans la classe article.
+ \makeatletter
+ \renewcommand*\appendix{\par
+ \setcounter{section}{0}
+ \gdef\thesection{\@Alph\c@section}}
+ \makeatother
+
+ %% Aligner à gauche l'environnement description
+ \setlist[description]{leftmargin=*,align=left}
+
+ %% Configurer le glossaire
+ \addto\extrasfrench{%
+ \def\glossaryname{Historique des versions}}
+ \GlossaryPrologue{\section*{\glossaryname}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\glossaryname}}
+ \setcounter{GlossaryColumns}{2}
+ \setlength{\GlossaryMin}{5cm}
- %% Commandes de mise en forme spéciales
- \newcommand{\class}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
- \newcommand{\pkg}[1]{\textbf{#1}}
+ %% Nouvel environnement de type \DescribeMacro pour les options de
+ %% la classe
+ \NewDocElement[envlike,notoplevel,printtype=\emph{option}]{Option}{option}
- %% Commandes pour les liens vers la documentation
- \newcommand{\link}[2]{\href{#1}{#2~\raisebox{-0.2ex}{\faExternalLink}}}
- \newcommand{\doc}[2][documentation]{\link{#2}{#1}}
+ %% Commandes sémantiques additionnelles
+ \let\class\textsf
+ \let\pkg\textbf
+ \makeatletter
+ \renewcommand\code{\bgroup\@makeother\_\@makeother\~\@makeother\$\code@}
+ \def\code@#1{{\normalfont\ttfamily\hyphenchar\font=-1 #1}\egroup}
+ \makeatother
+ \newcommand*\ulthesename{ulthese}
+ \newcommand*\ulclass{\class{\ulthesename}}
+ \newcommand*\btx{\textsc{Bib}\TeX}
- %% Francisation d'un mot clé de l'historique des commandes
- \def\generalname{Général}
+ %% Redéfinir \year pour utiliser l'information de \filedate plutôt
+ %% que la date de compilation
+ \def\parsedate#1/#2/#3\relax{\def\year{#1}}
+
+ %% Convertir la date en format ISO
+ \def\isodate#1/#2/#3\relax{#1-#2-#3}
+
+ \MakeShortVerb{\|}
\begin{document}
\DocInput{ulthese.dtx}
\end{document}
%</driver>
% \fi
-% \CheckSum{914}
% \DoNotIndex{\',\^,\`,\ ,\ae}
% \DoNotIndex{\RequirePackage,\ExecuteOptions,\ProcessOptions}
% \DoNotIndex{\newcommand,\newcommand*}
% \DoNotIndex{\setlength}
+% \changes{6.0}{2024-05-22}{Prise en compte des règles de présentation
+% entrées en vigueur à l'automne 2023 qui n'exigent plus une
+% bibliographie par chapitre pour les thèses et mémoire par
+% intégration d'articles.}
+% \changes{6.0}{2024-05-22}{Suppression des options
+% \texttt{bibchapitre} et \texttt{bibsection}.}
+% \changes{6.0}{2024-07-02}{Ajout du grade de maître en travail
+% social.}
+% \changes{6.0}{2024-07-02}{Retrait du grade de maître en
+% physiothérapie.}
+% \changes{6.0}{2024-05-24}{Utilisation du codage de caractères UTF-8
+% par défaut dans la classe. Modification des gabarits en
+% conséquence.}
+% \changes{6.0}{2024-06-17}{Révision exhaustive de la documentation.}
% \changes{4.4}{2017-05-16}{Prise en charge des bibliographies
-% multiples pour les thèses et mémoires par articles.}
+% multiples pour les thèses et mémoires par articles.}
+% \changes{4.4}{2017-05-15}{Ajout de l'option \texttt{bibchapitre}.}
+% \changes{4.4}{2017-05-15}{Ajout de l'option \texttt{bibsection}.}
% \changes{4.4}{2017-05-16}{Documentation révisée, principalement ce
-% qui touche à la préparation de la bibliographie.}
+% qui touche à la préparation de la bibliographie.}
% \changes{4.3}{2017-03-01}{Nouvelles options pour les titres de
-% docteur en musique, maître en architecture, maître en
-% ergothérapie, maître en physiothérapie et maître en
-% psychoéducation.}
-% \changes{4.3}{2017-03-01}{Modifications à la composition des sigles de
-% grades.}
+% docteur en musique, maître en architecture, maître en ergothérapie,
+% maître en physiothérapie et maître en psychoéducation.}
+% \changes{4.3}{2017-03-01}{Modifications à la composition des sigles
+% de grades.}
% \changes{4.3}{2017-03-01}{Vérification de la compatibilité entre le
-% grade et les options multifacultaire, cotutelle, bidiplomation et
-% extension.}
+% grade et les options \texttt{multifacultaire}, \texttt{cotutelle},
+% \texttt{bidiplomation} et \texttt{extension}.}
% \changes{4.3}{2017-03-01}{Améliorations à la documentation.}
-% \changes{4.2}{2016-03-29}{Ajout de l'option «examen».}
+% \changes{4.2}{2016-03-29}{Ajout de l'option \texttt{examen}.}
% \changes{4.1}{2016-02-13}{Paquetage geometry déclaré incompatible
-% avec la classe.}
-% \changes{4.0}{2015-06-12}{Nouvelles règles de présentation matérielle
-% de la FESP: recto seulement, page frontispice.}
-% \changes{3.1}{2014-05-23}{Prise en charge de la maîtrise en bidiplomation.}
+% avec la classe.}
+% \changes{4.0}{2015-06-12}{Nouvelles règles de présentation
+% matérielle de la FESP: recto seulement, page frontispice.}
+% \changes{3.1}{2014-05-23}{Prise en charge de la maîtrise en
+% bidiplomation.}
% \changes{3.0a}{2014-03-24}{Modifications et corrections à la
-% documentation, notamment relativement à la configuration de natbib.}
+% documentation, notamment relativement à la configuration de
+% \textbf{natbib}.}
% \changes{3.0}{2014-01-06}{Déclaration du grade en option de la
-% classe.}
-% \changes{3.0}{2014-01-06}{Moteur XeLaTeX supporté.}
-% \changes{3.0}{2014-01-06}{Ajout de l'option nobabel.}
+% classe.}
+% \changes{3.0}{2014-01-06}{Moteur {\XeLaTeX} supporté.}
+% \changes{3.0}{2014-01-06}{Ajout de l'option \texttt{nobabel}.}
% \changes{2.1}{2013-01-16}{Utilisation transparente de la police
-% Helvetica pour la page de titre.}
+% Helvetica pour la page de titre.}
% \changes{2.0}{2013-01-13}{Traitement automatique des longs titres.}
% \changes{1.0b}{2012-11-11}{Ajouts et corrections mineures dans la
-% documentation.}
+% documentation.}
% \changes{1.0a}{2012-10-17}{Précisions dans la documentation.}
% \changes{1.0}{2012-09-30}{Version initiale.}
% \GetFileInfo{ulthese.dtx}
-% \title{\class{ulthese}: la classe pour les thèses et mémoires de
-% l'Université Laval\thanks{Ce document décrit la classe
-% \class{ulthese}~\fileversion, datée du \filedate.}}
+%
+% \title{Guide d'utilisation de la classe {\ulclass} \\ pour les thèses et
+% mémoires \\ de l'Université Laval}
% \author{Faculté des études supérieures et postdoctorales\thanks{%
% Cette classe et sa documentation ont été rédigées par Vincent
% Goulet~(Faculté des sciences et de génie) avec la collaboration de
% Koassi D'Almeida~(Faculté des études supérieures et postdoctorales) et
-% de Pierre Lasou~(Bibliothèque).}}
-% \date{}
+% Pierre Lasou~(Bibliothèque).}}
+% \date{Version {\fileversion} du {\expandafter\isodate\filedate\relax}}
% \maketitle
%
% \section{Introduction}
%
-% La classe \class{ulthese} permet de composer avec {\LaTeX} ou
-% {\XeLaTeX} des thèses et mémoires immédiatement conformes aux règles
-% générales de présentation matérielle de la Faculté des études
-% supérieures et postdoctorales (FESP) de l'Université Laval. Ces
-% règles définissent principalement la présentation des pages de titre
-% des thèses et mémoires ainsi que la disposition du texte sur la
-% page. La classe en elle-même est donc relativement simple.
-%
-% Cependant, \class{ulthese} est basée sur la classe \class{memoir}
-% \citep{memoir}, une extension de la classe standard \class{book}
-% facilitant à plusieurs égards la préparation de documents d'allure
-% professionnelle dans {\LaTeX}. La classe \class{memoir} incorpore
-% d'office plus de 30 des paquetages les plus populaires\footnote{%
-% Consulter la section~18.24 de la documentation de \class{memoir}
-% pour la liste ou encore le journal de la compilation (\emph{log})
-% d'un document utilisant la classe \class{ulthese}.}. %
-% L'intégralité des fonctionnalités de \class{memoir} se retrouve donc
-% dans \class{ulthese}.
-%
-% La classe \class{memoir} fait partie des distributions {\LaTeX}
-% modernes; elle devrait donc être installée et disponible sur votre
-% système. Elle est livrée avec une %
-% \doc{http://texdoc.net/pkg/memoir} %
-% exhaustive: le guide de l'utilisateur fait près de 600~pages!
-% N'hésitez pas à vous y référer pour réaliser une mise en page
-% particulière.
-%
-% L'autre compagnon naturel de la présente documentation est
-% \doc[Rédaction avec {\LaTeX}]{http://texdoc.net/pkg/formation-latex-ul} ^^A
-% \citep{formation-latex-ul}, la formation {\LaTeX} de l'Université Laval.
-% Vous y trouverez des informations additionnelles sur l'utilisation des
-% classes \class{ulthese} et \class{memoir}.
+% La classe {\ulclass} permet de composer des thèses et mémoires
+% immédiatement conformes aux règles générales et complémentaires de
+% présentation de la Faculté des études supérieures et postdoctorales
+% (FESP) de l'Université Laval. Ces règles définissent principalement
+% la présentation des pages de titre des thèses et mémoires, ainsi que
+% la disposition du texte sur la page.
+%
+% La composition d'un manuscript avec la classe {\ulclass} requiert une
+% distribution {\TeX} récente et à jour. Nous recommandons les
+% distributions %
+% \href{https://tug.org/texlive}{{\TeX}~Live}~---%
+% ou sa variante pour macOS %
+% \href{https://tug.org/mactex}{Mac{\TeX}}~--- %
+% et %
+% \href{https://miktex.org}{MiK{\TeX}}. %
+% Vous pouvez également avoir recours à une plateforme de rédaction en
+% ligne comme %
+% \href{https://overleaf.com}{Overleaf}; %
+% leurs distributions {\TeX} satisfont généralement les conditions
+% ci-dessus.
+%
+% La classe {\ulclass} fait partie des distributions {\TeX} standards via
+% le paquetage %
+% \href{https://ctan.org/pkg/ulthese}{\pkg{ulthese}}. %
+% Dans la mesure où votre distribution est
+% à jour, vous devriez pouvoir l'utiliser sans autre intervention.
+%
+% Le compagnon naturel de la présente documentation est \emph{Rédaction
+% avec {\LaTeX}}, la formation {\LaTeX} de l'Université Laval. Vous y
+% trouverez sans doute une foule d'informations utiles pour la
+% préparation de votre thèse ou de votre mémoire. L'ouvrage fait
+% lui aussi partie des distributions {\TeX} standards, via le
+% paquetage %
+% \href{https://ctan.org/pkg/formation-latex-ul}{\pkg{formation-latex-ul}}. %
%
% \section{Démarrage rapide (pour les impatients)}
% \label{sec:utilisation:rapide}
%
-% La classe est livrée avec les distributions {\TeX}~Live, Mac{\TeX} et
-% MiK{\TeX}. Si vous utilisez l'une ou l'autre de ces distributions et
-% qu'elle est à jour\footnote{%
-% Validez à l'aide de l'assistant de mise à jour de votre
-% distribution.}, %
-% vous devriez pouvoir utiliser \class{ulthese} sans autre
-% intervention.
-%
-% Il est recommandé de segmenter tout document d'une certaine ampleur
-% dans des fichiers |.tex| distincts pour chaque partie ---
-% habituellement un fichier par chapitre. Le document complet est alors
-% composé à l'aide d'un fichier maître qui contient le préambule
-% {\LaTeX} et un ensemble de commandes \cmd{\include} pour réunir les
-% parties dans un tout.
+% La classe {\ulclass} est livrée avec un ensemble de gabarits sur
+% lesquels se baser pour le document maître de divers types de thèses
+% et de mémoires (standard, par articles, en cotutelle, en
+% bidiplomation), ainsi que pour les parties les plus usuelles
+% (résumés français et anglais, remerciements, avant-propos,
+% introduction, chapitres, conclusion, annexe). Les noms des fichiers
+% devraient permettre de facilement identifier leur contenu. Dans la
+% distribution {\TeX}~Live, les gabarits sont classés avec la
+% documentation.
%
-% La classe \class{ulthese} est livrée avec un ensemble de gabarits sur
-% lesquels se baser pour:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item le document maître de divers types de thèses et de mémoires
-% (standard, par articles, en cotutelle, en bidiplomation);
-% \item les fichiers des parties les plus usuelles (résumés français
-% et anglais, avant-propos, introduction, chapitres, conclusion,
-% etc.).
-% \end{itemize}
-% Les noms des fichiers devraient permettre de facilement identifier
-% leur contenu (c'est là une bonne pratique: le nom |rappels.tex|
-% parle de lui-même et résiste mieux aux changements à l'ordre des
-% chapitres que |chapitre1.tex|).
+% Pour débuter rapidement la rédaction de votre manuscrit, copiez les
+% gabarits appropriés dans votre dossier de travail et suivez les
+% directives qui s'y trouvent. Nous recommandons de compiler votre
+% manuscript avec {\XeLaTeX}.
%
-% Dans {\TeX}~Live, les gabarits sont classés avec la documentation de
-% la classe. Pour les utiliser, copiez les fichiers appropriés dans votre
-% dossier de travail.
+% La classe utilise le codage de caractères
+% \href{https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/UTF-8}{UTF-8}. Vous devez donc
+% obligatoirement utiliser ce type codage quand un fichier contient
+% des caractères non-ASCII (comme des lettres accentuées).
%
-% Pour débuter la rédaction, renommez le gabarit de document maître
-% approprié d'après votre numéro de dossier. Par exemple, l'étudiante
-% dont le numéro de dossier est 111555555 et qui entame la rédaction
-% d'une thèse par articles renommera le fichier
-% \begin{quote}
-% |gabarit-doctorat-articles.tex|
-% \end{quote}
-% en
-% \begin{quote}
-% |111555555.tex|.
-% \end{quote}
+% Le reste de ce guide contient les informations détaillées sur les
+% caractéristiques et fonctionnalités de la classe.
%
-% Les gabarits comportent des commentaires succincts pour vous guider
-% dans la préparation de votre document. La \autoref{sec:gabarits}
-% fournit les informations détaillées.
+% \changes{5.3a}{2021-08-09}{Ajout à la documentation de la
+% disponibilité d'une archive pour les personnes qui ne disposent pas
+% d'une installation de {\TeX} locale.}
+% \tipbox{Si vous n'avez pas accès aux gabarits parce qu'ils ne sont
+% pas inclus dans votre distribution ou parce que vous utilisez une
+% plateforme de rédaction en ligne, poursuivez votre lecture à la
+% \autoref{sec:installation}.}
%
% \section{Installation}
+% \label{sec:installation}
%
-% Cette section explique comment installer la classe \class{ulthese}
+% Cette section explique comment installer la classe {\ulclass}
% si elle n'est pas disponible sur votre système ou si la version
% n'est pas à jour.
%
-% La classe est distribuée sous forme d'une archive |ulthese.zip| via
-% le réseau de sites \emph{Comprehensive {\TeX} Archive Network} (CTAN):
+% La classe {\ulclass} est distribuée dans le paquetage %
+% \href{https://ctan.org/pkg/ulthese}{\pkg{ulthese}} %
+% via le réseau de sites \emph{Comprehensive {\TeX} Archive Network}
+% (CTAN). Celui-ci fait partie des distributions {\TeX} standards telles
+% que {TeX}~Live, Mac{\TeX} et MiK{\TeX}. Nous recommandons fortement
+% d'installer ou de mettre à jour \pkg{ulthese} à l'aide du
+% gestionnaire de paquetages de votre distribution {\TeX}. Par
+% exemple, avec {\TeX}~Live, vous pouvez effectuer ces opérations dans
+% l'assistant graphique, ou encore avec l'une ou l'autre des commandes
+% ci-dessous:
% \begin{quote}
-% \url{https://www.ctan.org/pkg/ulthese}
+% \code{tlmgr install ulthese}
+% \end{quote}
+% ou
+% \begin{quote}
+% \code{tlmgr update ulthese}
% \end{quote}
%
-% L'installation de la classe consiste à créer le fichier
-% |ulthese.cls| et les gabarits |.tex| à partir du code source
-% documenté se trouvant dans le fichier |ulthese.dtx|. Il est
-% recommandé de simplement créer ces fichiers dans le dossier de
-% travail de la thèse ou du mémoire.
-%
-% Pour procéder à l'installation, décompressez l'archive |ulthese.zip|
-% dans votre dossier de travail, puis compilez avec {\LaTeX} le fichier
-% |ulthese.ins| en exécutant la commande suivante depuis une invite
-% de commande:
+% S'il vous est impossible d'installer des paquetages ou de mettre à
+% jour la distribution {\TeX}~--- notamment si vous utilisez une
+% plateforme de rédaction en ligne~--- vous pouvez procéder à une
+% installation simplifiée de la classe dont la portée sera limitée à
+% votre projet. Pour ce faire, téléchargez l'archive %
% \begin{quote}
-% |latex ulthese.ins|
+% \code{ulthese-installation-projet.zip}
% \end{quote}
-% Vous pouvez aussi ouvrir le fichier |ulthese.ins| dans votre éditeur
-% de texte favori et lancer depuis celui-ci la compilation avec
-% {\LaTeX}, pdf{\LaTeX}, {\XeLaTeX} ou un autre moteur {\TeX}.
+% depuis le
+% \href{https://gitlab.com/vigou3/ulthese/-/releases}{dépôt du projet ulthese}
+% et décompressez celle-ci dans le répertoire de votre document. Vous
+% disposerez alors de tous les fichiers essentiels de la classe à
+% l'intérieur de ce projet.
%
-% \changes{5.3a}{2021-08-09}{Ajout à la documentation de la
-% disponibilité d'une archive pour les personnes qui ne disposent
-% pas d'une installation de {\TeX} locale.}
-% \begin{rem}
-% Si vous ne disposez pas d'une version de {\TeX} sur votre poste de
-% travail --- vraisemblablement parce que vous utilisez une
-% plateforme de rédaction en ligne --- téléchargez
-% l'archive |ulthese-sans-tex-local.zip| depuis le
-% \link{https://gitlab.com/vigou3/ulthese/-/releases}{dépôt du
-% projet}. Celle-ci contient tous les fichiers
-% normalement créés lors de l'installation de la classe.
-% \end{rem}
+% Si votre expertise {\TeX} vous pousse à préférer une installation
+% manuelle avec accès à l'intégralité du code source de la classe,
+% consultez les instructions qui se trouvent dans le fichier
+% \code{README.md} du paquetage.
%
% \section{Utilisation}
+% \label{sec:utilisation}
+%
+% La classe {\ulclass} est basée sur la classe %
+% \href{https://ctan.org/pkg/memoir}{\class{memoir}}, %
+% une extension de la classe standard \class{book} facilitant à
+% plusieurs égards la préparation de documents d'allure
+% professionnelle dans {\LaTeX}. L'intégralité des fonctionnalités de
+% \class{memoir} se retrouve donc dans {\ulclass}.
+%
+% La classe \class{memoir} fait partie des distributions {\TeX}
+% récentes; elle devrait donc être installée et disponible sur votre
+% système. La classe est livrée avec une documentation exhaustive: le
+% guide de l'utilisateur fait près de 600~pages! N'hésitez pas à vous
+% y référer pour réaliser une mise en page particulière.
+%
+% La classe {\ulclass} est compatible avec le moteur pdf{\LaTeX}.
+% Cependant, pour faciliter la gestion du codage des fichiers et des
+% polices de caractères, nous recommandons de compiler votre
+% manuscript avec le plus moderne moteur {\XeLaTeX}.
+%
+% \subsection{Gabarits}
+% \label{sec:utilisation:gabarits}
+%
+% La classe est livrée avec un ensemble de gabarits sur lesquels vous
+% baser pour:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item le document maître de divers types de thèses et de mémoires
+% (standard, par articles, en cotutelle, en bidiplomation);
+% \item les fichiers des parties les plus usuelles (résumés français
+% et anglais, remerciements, avant-propos, introduction, chapitres,
+% conclusion, annexe).
+% \end{itemize}
+% Vous pourriez devoir combiner les caractéristiques de deux gabarits
+% de document maître, par exemple pour une thèse en cotutelle par
+% articles.
+%
+% Les gabarits vous incitent à adopter le mode d'organisation des
+% fichiers de tout document d'une certaine ampleur, soit: un fichier
+% |.tex| par partie; un fichier maître contenant le préambule {\LaTeX}
+% et un ensemble de commandes \cmdprint{\include} pour réunir les
+% parties dans un tout.
+%
+% Si vous utilisez la version de la classe fournie avec votre
+% distribution {\TeX}, les gabarits peuvent être classés avec la
+% documentation (c'est le cas dans {\TeX}~Live). Si vous avez plutôt
+% effectué une installation locale de la classe, ou si vous l'avez
+% installée manuellement, les gabarits se trouvent dans votre
+% dossier de travail.
%
-% La classe est compatible avec les moteurs {\LaTeX} traditionnels
-% ainsi qu'avec le plus récent moteur {\XeLaTeX}.
+% Nous recommandons fortement de rédiger votre manuscript à partir des
+% gabarits. Il peut aussi s'avérer utile de suivre un gabarit en lisant
+% la présente section.
+%
+% \tipbox{Il n'y a pas de gabarit spécifique pour un examen de
+% doctorat, pour un essai de maîtrise, pour un projet de recherche ou
+% pour un rapport de stage. Utilisez un gabarit de thèse ou de
+% maîtrise avec l'une ou l'autre des options |examen|, |essai|,
+% |projet| ou |stage|.}
+%
+% \changes{6.0}{2024-05-24}{Documentation: nouvelle section sur le
+% codage de caractères du code source.}
+% \subsection{Codage de caractères du code source}
+% \label{sec:utilisation:codage}
+%
+% La classe utilise le codage de caractères
+% \href{https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/UTF-8}{UTF-8}
+% tant avec pdf{\LaTeX} qu'avec {\XeLaTeX}. Les fichiers
+% contenant du texte avec des accents ou tout autre symbole non-ASCII
+% doivent donc obligatoirement être enregistrés dans ce codage de
+% caractères\footnote{%
+% L'UTF-8 n'étant pas le codage par défaut sous Windows, portez une
+% attention toute particulière à ce point si vous utilisez ce système
+% d'exploitation.}.
+%
+% \subsection{Déclaration de la classe et options}
+% \label{sec:utilisation:options}
%
% On charge la classe avec la commande
% \begin{quote}
-% |\documentclass|\oarg{options}|{ulthese}|
+% |\documentclass|\oarg{options}|{ulthese}|
% \end{quote}
% Les marges, l'interligne et la numérotation des pages sont adaptées
-% aux règles de présentation matérielle de la FESP. Les sections
-% suivantes décrivent les options et les commandes définies par la
-% classe.
+% aux règles de présentation de la FESP. La classe ne crée pas de page
+% de titre par défaut\footnote{%
+% Depuis la version 5.0 de la classe.}, %
+% sa production étant prise en charge par la FESP pour les thèses et
+% les mémoires. Si vous utilisez la classe pour un document qui
+% nécessite une page de titre, un examen de doctorat, un essai de
+% maitre
%
% \changes{5.0}{2018-04-24}{La classe ne crée plus de page de titre
-% suite à une nouvelle directive de la FESP.}
-% \begin{rem}
-% Depuis la version 5.0, la classe ne crée plus de page de titre
-% par défaut, sa production étant désormais prise en charge par la
-% FESP. Néanmoins, les fonctionnalités de composition d'une page
-% de titre demeurent disponibles dans la classe. Les commandes
-% pertinentes sont regroupées à l'\autoref{sec:pagetitre}.
-% \end{rem}
-%
-% \subsection{Options de la classe}
-% \label{sec:utilisation:options}
+% suite à une nouvelle directive de la FESP.}
+% \tipbox{Les fonctionnalités de composition d'une page de titre
+% demeurent disponibles dans la classe. Si votre document en nécessite
+% une, consultez l'\autoref{sec:pagetitre}.}
%
% Cette section passe en revue les \meta{options} que l'on peut
% spécifier au chargement de la classe. Les commandes mentionnées
% ci-dessous font quant à elles l'objet de la
% \autoref{sec:utilisation:commandes}.
%
-% \begin{DescribeMacro}{PhD,MSc,MA, ...}
-% Identifie le type de grade; consulter le \autoref{tab:grades} pour
-% la liste complète des options et les grades correspondants. La
-% déclaration d'un type de grade est obligatoire, sauf en cas de
-% l'utilisation de l'option |projet| (voir ci-dessous).
-% \end{DescribeMacro}
+% \begin{DescribeOption}{PhD,MSc,MA, ...}
+% Les options telles que |PhD|, |MSc| ou |MA| identifient le type de
+% grade; le \autoref{tab:grades} fournit la liste complète des
+% options et les grades correspondants. La déclaration d'un type de
+% grade est obligatoire, sauf en cas de l'utilisation de l'option
+% |projet| (voir ci-dessous).
+% \end{DescribeOption}
%
% \begin{table}[t]
% \centering
% \caption{Options de la classe pour la déclaration du grade et libellés
% correspondants}
% \label{tab:grades}
-% \begin{tabularx}{0.85\linewidth}{lX}
+% \begin{tabularx}{0.9\linewidth}{l>{\raggedright\arraybackslash}X}
% \toprule
% Option & Nom du grade (sigle) \\
% \midrule
@@ -355,145 +505,138 @@
% |MArch|
% & Maître en architecture
% (M.~Arch.) \\
-% |MA|
-% & Maître ès arts (M.A.) \\
% |LLM|
% & Maître en droit (LL.~M.) \\
% |MErg|
% & Maître en ergothérapie (M.~Erg.) \\
% |MMus|
% & Maître en musique (M.~Mus.) \\
-% |MPht|
-% & Maître en physiothérapie (M.~Pht.) \\
-% |MSc|
-% & Maître ès sciences (M.~Sc.) \\
+% |MPsEd|
+% & Maître en psychoéducation (M.~Ps.~éd.) \\
% |MScGeogr|
% & Maître en sciences géographiques (M.~Sc.~géogr.) \\
% |MServSoc|
% & Maître en service social (M.~Serv.~soc.) \\
-% |MPsEd|
-% & Maître en psychoéducation (M.~Ps.~éd.) \\
+% |MTravSoc|
+% & Maître en travail social (M.~Trav.~soc.) \\
+% |MA|
+% & Maître ès arts (M.A.) \\
+% |MSc|
+% & Maître ès sciences (M.~Sc.) \\
% \bottomrule
% \end{tabularx}
% \end{table}
%
-% \begin{DescribeMacro}{cotutelle}
-% Identifie une thèse effectuée en cotutelle avec une autre
-% université. Valide uniquement avec un grade de doctorat.
-% \end{DescribeMacro}
-%
-% \begin{DescribeMacro}{bidiplomation}
-% Identifie un mémoire effectué en bidiplomation avec une autre
-% université. Valide uniquement avec un grade de maîtrise.
-% \end{DescribeMacro}
-%
-% \begin{DescribeMacro}{examen}
-% Identifie un examen de doctorat. Cette option permet d'utiliser la
-% classe pour la rédaction d'un examen de doctorat respectant les
-% règles de présentation matérielle de la FESP. Elle a pour effet de
-% changer l'appellation «Thèse» sur la page de titre pour «Examen
-% de doctorat». Elle supprime également la page frontispice.
+% \begin{DescribeOption}{cotutelle}
+% L'option |cotutelle| identifie une thèse effectuée en cotutelle
+% avec une autre université. Valide uniquement avec un grade de
+% doctorat.
+% \end{DescribeOption}
+%
+% \begin{DescribeOption}{bidiplomation}
+% L'option |bidiplomation| identifie un mémoire effectué en
+% bidiplomation avec une autre université. Valide uniquement avec un
+% grade de maîtrise.
+% \end{DescribeOption}
+%
+% \begin{DescribeOption}{examen}
+% L'option |examen| identifie un examen de doctorat. Elle permet
+% d'utiliser la classe pour la rédaction d'un examen de doctorat
+% respectant les règles de présentation de la FESP. L'option a pour
+% effet de changer l'appellation «Thèse» sur la page de titre pour
+% «Examen de doctorat». Elle supprime également la page frontispice.
% L'option n'est compatible qu'avec l'une des options de grade de
% doctorat.
-% \end{DescribeMacro}
-%
-% \changes{5.0}{2018-05-09}{Ajout d'une option «essai» pour les
-% maîtrises analogue à «examen» pour les doctorats.}
-% \changes{5.2}{2019-05-06}{L'option «essai» n'empêche plus
-% l'utilisation d'une page frontispice.}
-% \begin{DescribeMacro}{essai}
-% Identifie un essai de maîtrise. Cette option permet d'utiliser la
-% classe pour la rédaction d'un essai de maîtrise respectant les
-% règles de présentation matérielle de la FESP. Elle a pour effet de
-% changer l'appellation «Maîtrise» sur la page de titre pour
-% «Essai». L'option n'est compatible qu'avec l'une des options de
+% \end{DescribeOption}
+%
+% \changes{5.0}{2018-05-09}{Ajout d'une option \texttt{essai} pour les
+% maîtrises analogue à \texttt{examen} pour les doctorats.}
+% \changes{5.2}{2019-05-06}{L'option \texttt{essai} n'empêche plus
+% l'utilisation d'une page frontispice.}
+% \begin{DescribeOption}{essai}
+% L'option |essai| identifie un essai de maîtrise. Elle permet
+% d'utiliser la classe pour la rédaction d'un essai de maîtrise
+% respectant les règles de présentation de la FESP. L'option a pour
+% effet de changer l'appellation «Maîtrise» sur la page de titre
+% pour «Essai». Elle n'est compatible qu'avec l'une des options de
% grade de maîtrise. Pour un essai de maîtrise, l'utilisation
% simultanée de l'option |article| de la classe \class{memoir} peut
% s'avérer tout indiquée.
-% \end{DescribeMacro}
-%
-% \changes{5.2}{2019-05-06}{Ajout d'une option «projet» pour les
-% cours de projet de recherche.}
-% \begin{DescribeMacro}{projet}
-% Identifie un projet de recherche. Cette option permet d'utiliser
-% la classe pour la rédaction d'un rapport de projet de recherche
-% respectant les règles de présentation matérielle de la FESP. Elle
-% a pour effet d'inscrire l'appellation «Projet de recherche» sur la
-% page de titre et de supprimer la mention du grade. L'utilisation
-% de cette option rend d'ailleurs non obligatoire la déclaration de
-% grade qui, si elle est présente, est simplement ignorée. Comme
-% pour un essai de maîtrise, l'utilisation simultanée de l'option
-% |article| de la classe \class{memoir} peut s'avérer tout indiquée
-% avec les cette option.
-% \end{DescribeMacro}
-%
-% \changes{5.3}{2019-11-29}{Ajout d'une option «stage» pour les
-% rapports de stage.}
-% \begin{DescribeMacro}{stage}
-% Identifie un rapport de stage. L'effet de cette option est
-% identique à celui de l'option |projet| à deux exceptions près:
-% l'inscription sur la page de titre est «Rapport de stage» et la
-% page frontispice est supprimée.
-% \end{DescribeMacro}
-%
-% \begin{DescribeMacro}{10pt,11pt,12pt}
-% Sélectionne une taille de police de 10, 11 ou 12~points. Par
-% défaut la classe utilise une police de 11~points. Ces options
-% n'ont aucun effet sur la taille des polices des pages de titre.
-% \end{DescribeMacro}
-%
-% \changes{4.4}{2017-05-15}{Ajout de l'option bibchapitre.}
-% \changes{4.4}{2017-05-15}{Ajout de l'option bibsection.}
-% \begin{DescribeMacro}{bibchapitre}
-% \begin{DescribeMacro}{bibsection}
-% Permettent de composer une bibliographie distincte après chaque
-% fichier inséré dans le document avec \cmd{\include},
-% habituellement un chapitre; voir la
-% \autoref{sec:bibliographie:multiples}. Ces options sont
-% principalement utiles pour les thèses et mémoires par articles.
-% La bibliographie se présente sous la forme d'un chapitre non
-% numéroté avec |bibchapitre|, et sous la forme d'une section
-% numérotée avec |bibsection|.
-% \end{DescribeMacro}
-% \end{DescribeMacro}
-%
-% \begin{DescribeMacro}{nonatbib}
-% Empêche le chargement du paquetage \pkg{natbib}. La paquetage est
-% normalement chargé par la classe; voir la
+% \end{DescribeOption}
+%
+% \changes{5.2}{2019-05-06}{Ajout d'une option \texttt{projet} pour
+% les cours de projet de recherche.}
+% \begin{DescribeOption}{projet}
+% L'option |projet| identifie un projet de recherche. Elle permet
+% d'utiliser la classe pour la rédaction d'un rapport de projet de
+% recherche respectant les règles de présentation de la FESP.
+% L'option a pour effet d'inscrire l'appellation «Projet de
+% recherche» sur la page de titre et de supprimer la mention du
+% grade. Son utilisation rend d'ailleurs non obligatoire la
+% déclaration de grade qui, si elle est présente, est simplement
+% ignorée. Comme pour un essai de maîtrise, l'utilisation simultanée
+% de l'option |article| de la classe \class{memoir} peut s'avérer
+% tout indiquée avec cette option.
+% \end{DescribeOption}
+%
+% \changes{5.3}{2019-11-29}{Ajout d'une option \texttt{stage} pour les
+% rapports de stage.}
+% \begin{DescribeOption}{stage}
+% L'option |stage| identifie un rapport de stage. L'effet de cette
+% option est identique à celui de l'option |projet| à deux
+% exceptions près: l'inscription sur la page de titre est «Rapport
+% de stage» et la page frontispice est supprimée.
+% \end{DescribeOption}
+%
+% \begin{DescribeOption}{10pt,11pt,12pt}
+% Les options |10pt|, |11pt| et |12pt| sélectionnent une taille de
+% police de 10, 11 ou 12~points. Par défaut la classe utilise une
+% police de 11~points. Ces options n'ont aucun effet sur la taille
+% des polices des pages de titre.
+% \end{DescribeOption}
+%
+% \begin{DescribeOption}{nonatbib}
+% L'option |nonatbib| empêche le chargement du paquetage %
+% \href{https://ctan.org/pkg/natbib}{\pkg{natbib}}. %
+% Celui-ci est normalement chargé par la classe; voir la
% \autoref{sec:bibliographie}. L'option |nonatbib| permet d'empêcher
-% le chargement pour modifier les options du paquetage ou en cas de
-% conflit avec un autre paquetage de mise en forme de la
-% bibliographie.
-% \end{DescribeMacro}
-%
-% \begin{DescribeMacro}{nobabel}
-% Empêche le chargement du paquetage \pkg{babel}. La classe utilise
-% par défaut ce paquetage pour le traitement des langues dans le
-% document; voir la \autoref{sec:langues}. L'option |nobabel| permet
-% d'empêcher son chargement si un autre paquetage devait être
-% utilisé --- on pense ici principalement à \pkg{polyglossia} pour
-% un document produit avec le moteur {\XeLaTeX}.
-% \end{DescribeMacro}
-%
-% \changes{5.1}{2018-09-30}{Ajout de l'option nohyperref.}
-% \begin{DescribeMacro}{nohyperref}
-% Empêche le chargement du paquetage \pkg{hyperref}. L'interaction
-% de ce paquetage avec les autres est parfois --- voire souvent ---
-% délicate. La classe se charge de le charger en tout dernier tel
-% que généralement recommandé. L'option |nohyperref| permet
-% d'empêcher son chargement s'il est absolument nécessaire de
+% son chargement pour vous permettre de modifier les options du
+% paquetage ou en cas de conflit avec un autre paquetage de mise en
+% forme de la bibliographie.
+% \end{DescribeOption}
+%
+% \begin{DescribeOption}{nobabel}
+% L'option |nobabel| empêche le chargement du paquetage %
+% \href{https://ctan.org/pkg/babel}{\pkg{babel}}. %
+% La classe utilise par défaut ce paquetage pour le traitement des
+% langues dans le document; voir la \autoref{sec:langues}. L'option
+% |nobabel| permet d'empêcher son chargement si un autre paquetage
+% devait être utilisé~--- on pense ici principalement à %
+% \href{https://ctan.org/pkg/polyglossia}{\pkg{polyglossia}} %
+% pour un document produit avec le moteur {\XeLaTeX}.
+% \end{DescribeOption}
+%
+% \changes{5.1}{2018-09-30}{Ajout de l'option \texttt{nohyperref}.}
+% \begin{DescribeOption}{nohyperref}
+% L'option |nohyperref| empêche le chargement du paquetage %
+% \href{https://ctan.org/pkg/hyperref}{\pkg{hyperref}}. %
+% L'interaction de ce paquetage avec les autres est parfois~---
+% voire souvent~--- délicate. La classe tâche de le charger en tout
+% dernier, tel que généralement recommandé. L'option |nohyperref|
+% permet d'empêcher son chargement s'il est absolument nécessaire de
% charger d'autres paquetages avant \pkg{hyperref}. Si vous utilisez
% cette option, vous devez obligatoirement charger \pkg{hyperref}
% dans le préambule du document.
-% \end{DescribeMacro}
-%
-% \begin{DescribeMacro}{english, french, ...}
-% Déclare les langues utilisées dans le document. Ces options sont
-% transférées au paquetage \pkg{babel} (dans la mesure où |nobabel|
-% n'est pas spécifié, bien entendu). Le libellé des langues devrait
-% donc correspondre aux options de \pkg{babel}. La dernière langue
+% \end{DescribeOption}
+%
+% \begin{DescribeOption}{english, french, ...}
+% Les options telles que |english|, |french| ou autres déclarent les
+% langues utilisées dans le document. Ces options sont transférées
+% au paquetage \pkg{babel} (dans la mesure où |nobabel| n'est pas
+% spécifié, bien entendu). Le libellé des langues devrait donc
+% correspondre aux options de \pkg{babel}. La dernière langue
% spécifiée est la langue active par défaut dans le document.
-% \end{DescribeMacro}
+% \end{DescribeOption}
%
% Toute autre option sera passée à la classe \class{memoir} dont,
% entre autres, le format du papier. Le format lettre nord-américain
@@ -505,14 +648,14 @@
% \subsection{Commandes de la classe}
% \label{sec:utilisation:commandes}
%
-% La classe \class{ulthese} définit quelques nouvelles commandes
+% La classe {\ulclass} définit quelques nouvelles commandes
% servant principalement à créer la page frontispice et des éléments
% des pages liminaires. Le sommaire des commandes se trouve dans le
% \autoref{tab:commandes} et les descriptions détaillées, ci-dessous.
%
% \begin{table}[t]
% \centering
-% \caption{Sommaire des commandes de la classe \class{ulthese}.
+% \caption{Sommaire des commandes de la classe {\ulclass}.
% Celles marquées d'une étoile $^\star$ sont obligatoires.}
% \label{tab:commandes}
% \begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{lX}
@@ -533,12 +676,13 @@
% \end{table}
%
% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\titre}
-% Titre principal de la thèse ou du mémoire. Ne pas utiliser la
-% commande \cmd{\title} de {\LaTeX} pour ce faire.
+% La commande \cmdprint{\titre} sert à spécifier le titre principal
+% du manuscrit. Vous ne devez pas utiliser la commande \cmd{\title}
+% de {\LaTeX} pour ce faire.
%
-% Vous devez couper manuellement avec |\\| ou \cmd{\newline} un
-% titre très long. Par exemple, la déclaration d'un titre d'une
-% seule ligne est:
+% Coupez manuellement avec {\bs\bs} ou \cmd{\newline} un titre très
+% long. Par exemple, la déclaration d'un titre d'une seule ligne
+% est:
% \begin{quote}
% |\titre{Ceci est un titre d'une seule ligne}|
% \end{quote}
@@ -550,48 +694,51 @@
% \end{DescribeMacro}
%
% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\soustitre}
-% Sous-titre de la thèse ou du mémoire, le cas échéant. Les remarques
-% sur un long titre principal s'appliquent également au sous-titre.
+% La commande \cmdprint{\soustitre} sert à spécifier le sous-titre
+% du manuscrit, le cas échéant. Les remarques sur un long titre
+% principal s'appliquent également au sous-titre.
% \end{DescribeMacro}
%
% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\auteur}
-% Nom complet de l'auteur de la thèse ou du mémoire, sous la forme
-% |Prénom Nom| avec seulement des majuscules initiales. Ne pas
-% utiliser la commande \cmd{\author} de {\LaTeX} pour le nom de
-% l'auteur.
+% La commande \cmdprint{\auteur} permet de saisir le nom complet de
+% l'auteur de la thèse ou du mémoire, sous la forme |Prénom Nom|
+% avec seulement des majuscules initiales. N'utilisez pas la
+% commande \cmd{\author} de {\LaTeX} pour le nom de l'auteur.
% \end{DescribeMacro}
%
% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\programme}
-% Nom complet officiel du programme d'études comme «Doctorat en
-% informatique» ou «Maîtrise en mathématiques». Si le programme
-% comporte une majeure, séparer sa mention de celle du programme
-% principal par un tiret demi-quadratin (obtenu avec |--|).
+% La commande \cmdprint{\programme} sert à spécifier le nom complet
+% officiel du programme d'études comme «Doctorat en informatique» ou
+% «Maîtrise en mathématiques». Si le programme comporte une majeure,
+% séparez sa mention de celle du programme principal par un tiret
+% demi-quadratin (obtenu avec |--|).
% \end{DescribeMacro}
%
% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\direction}
-% Nom complet du directeur ou de la directrice de recherche, sous la
-% forme |Prénom Nom| avec seulement des majuscules initiales, suivi
-% d'une virgule et de la mention «directeur de recherche» ou
-% «directrice de recherche».
+% La commande \cmdprint{\direction} sert à spécifier le nom complet
+% du directeur ou de la directrice de recherche, sous la forme
+% |Prénom Nom| avec seulement des majuscules initiales, suivi d'une
+% virgule et de la mention «directeur de recherche» ou «directrice
+% de recherche».
%
% Les thèses en cotutelle comportent un directeur ou une directrice
% de recherche et un directeur ou une directrice de cotutelle.
-% Séparer chaque mention par |\\|, comme ceci:
+% Séparez chaque mention par {\bs\bs}, comme ceci:
% \begin{quote}
% |\direction{Prénom Nom, directrice de recherche \\| \\
% | Prénom Nom, directeur de cotutelle}|
% \end{quote}
%
% De même, les maîtrises en bidiplomation comptent deux directeurs
-% ou directrices de recherche. Séparer chaque mention tel que
+% ou directrices de recherche. Séparez chaque mention tel que
% mentionné ci-dessus.
% \end{DescribeMacro}
%
% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\codirection}
-% Comme la commande \cmd{\direction}, mais pour le ou les
-% codirecteurs de recherche, s'il y a lieu. Lorsqu'il y a plus d'un
-% codirecteur de recherche, séparer chaque mention par |\\|, comme
-% ceci:
+% La commande \cmdprint{\codirection} joue le même rôle que la
+% commande \cmdprint{\direction}, mais pour le ou les codirecteurs
+% de recherche, s'il y a lieu. Lorsqu'il y a plus d'un codirecteur
+% de recherche, séparez chaque mention par {\bs\bs}, comme ceci:
% \begin{quote}
% |\codirection{Prénom Nom, directrice de recherche \\| \\
% | Prénom Nom, directeur de recherche}|
@@ -599,27 +746,30 @@
% \end{DescribeMacro}
%
% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\frontispice}
-% Création de la page frontispice. De toutes les commandes
-% ci-dessus, c'est la seule qui doit se trouver dans le corps du
-% document plutôt que dans le préambule.
+% La commande \cmdprint{\frontispice} crée la page frontispice à
+% l'endroit où elle apparait dans le code source. De toutes les
+% commandes ci-dessus, c'est la seule qui doit se trouver dans le
+% corps du document plutôt que dans le préambule.
% \end{DescribeMacro}
%
% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\dedicace}
-% Ajout d'une dédicace («À mes parents», «À Camille») à la thèse ou
-% au mémoire. La dédicace est disposée seule sur une page liminaire,
-% à une dizaine de lignes de la marge du haut et alignée à droite.
-% Par défaut, elle est composée en italique.
+% La commande \cmdprint{\dedicace} permet d'insérer une dédicace («À
+% mes parents», «À Camille») à l'endroit où elle apparait dans le
+% code source. La dédicace est disposée seule sur une page
+% liminaire, à une dizaine de lignes de la marge du haut et alignée
+% à droite. Par défaut, elle est composée en italique.
% \end{DescribeMacro}
%
% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\epigraphe}
-% Ajout d'une épigraphe au début du document. Comme la dédicace,
-% l'épigraphe est disposée seule sur une page liminaire, à une
-% dizaine de lignes de la marge du haut et alignée à droite. La
-% commande accepte deux arguments, soit le texte de la citation et
-% son auteur ou la source, dans l'ordre.
-%
-% Pour ajouter une épigraphe au début d'un ou plusieurs chapitres,
-% utiliser directement la commande \cmd{\epigraph} de
+% La commande \cmdprint{\epigraphe} permet d'insérer une épigraphe
+% au début du document. Comme la dédicace, l'épigraphe est disposée
+% seule sur une page liminaire, à une dizaine de lignes de la marge
+% du haut et alignée à droite. La commande accepte deux arguments,
+% soit le texte de la citation et son auteur ou la source, dans
+% l'ordre.
+%
+% Pour ajouter une épigraphe au début d'un ou de plusieurs
+% chapitres, utilisez directement la commande \cmd{\epigraph} de
% \class{memoir}, sur laquelle \cmd{\dedicace} et \cmd{\epigraphe}
% sont d'ailleurs basées.
% \end{DescribeMacro}
@@ -640,8 +790,8 @@
% L'environnement |quotation|, quant à lui, doit être utilisé pour
% les citations «longues», celles qui peuvent s'étendre sur plus de
% cinq lignes ou, surtout, plus d'un paragraphe. Dans la classe, le
-% texte est alors toujours placé en retrait de 10~mm, mais également
-% à interligne simple. De plus, un espace vertical sépare les
+% texte est alors toujours placé en retrait de 10~mm, mais aussi à
+% interligne simple. De plus, un espace vertical sépare les
% paragraphes, le cas échéant, afin de bien les distinguer les uns
% des autres.
% \end{DescribeEnv}
@@ -658,8 +808,9 @@
% \end{DescribeMacro}
%
% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\SingleSpacing}
-% Si ce devait être nécessaire ailleurs dans le document, la
-% commande \cmd{\SingleSpacing} permet de passer à l'interligne simple.
+% Si ce devait être nécessaire ailleurs dans le document, vous
+% pouvez avoir recours à la commande \cmd{\SingleSpacing} pour
+% passer à l'interligne simple.
% \end{DescribeMacro}
%
% \subsection{Hyperliens}
@@ -680,58 +831,44 @@
% \subsection{Autres paquetages chargés}
% \label{sec:paquetages}
%
-% Outre \class{memoir}, la classe \class{ulthese} charge quelques
-% paquetages qui peuvent aussi vous être utiles. Il n'est donc pas
-% nécessaire de charger de nouveau les paquetages suivants:
-% \begin{description}
-% \item[\normalfont\pkg{babel}] \citep{babel} gestion des documents
-% rédigés dans une ou plusieurs langues autres que l'anglais (si
-% l'option |nobabel| de la classe est absente; voir aussi la
-% \autoref{sec:langues});
-% \item[\normalfont\pkg{numprint}] \citep{numprint} requis par la
-% commande \cmd{\nombre} de \pkg{babel}; le paquetage est donc
-% chargé uniquement si \pkg{babel} l'est. Permet de composer
-% automatiquement des nombres avec un séparateur toutes les trois
-% positions (une espace en français);
-% \item[\normalfont\pkg{natbib}] \citep{natbib} gestion de la
-% bibliographie (si l'option |nonatbib| de la classe est absente;
-% voir aussi la \autoref{sec:bibliographie});
-% \item[\normalfont\pkg{chapterbib}] \citep{chapterbib} gestion de
-% bibliographies multiples (si l'une ou l'autre des options
-% |bibchapitre| ou |bibsection| est spécifiée;
-% voir aussi la \autoref{sec:bibliographie:multiples});
-% \item[\normalfont\pkg{hyperref}] \citep{hyperref} permet de
-% transformer toutes les références en hyperliens cliquables lorsque
-% le document est produit avec pdf{\LaTeX} ou {\XeLaTeX} (si
-% l'option |nohyperref| est spécifiée, vous devez obligatoirement
-% charger le paquetage vous-même);
-% \item[\normalfont\pkg{etoolbox}] \citep{etoolbox} outils
-% additionnels pour la conception de classes et de paquetages
-% (utilisé pour le chargement de \pkg{hyperref});
-% \item[\normalfont\pkg{fontspec}] \citep{fontspec} gestion des
-% polices OpenType sous {\XeLaTeX} (chargé avec ce moteur
-% seulement);
-% \item[\normalfont\pkg{graphicx}] \citep{graphicx} insertion et
-% manipulation de graphiques;
-% \item[\normalfont\pkg{xcolor}] \citep{xcolor} gestion des couleurs
-% dans le document, notamment celle des hyperliens;
-% \item[\normalfont\pkg{textcomp}] multitude de symboles spéciaux,
-% dont un beau symbole de copyright, \textcopyright.
-% \end{description}
-% L'\autoref{sec:meo} sur la mise en œuvre de la classe fournit
-% plus de détails sur la liste des paquetages chargés et les raisons
-% pour lesquelles ils sont requis dans la classe.
+% \changes{6.0}{2024-06-17}{Documentation: simplification de la
+% section sur les autres paquetages chargés par la classe.}
+% La classe {\ulclass} charge par défaut les paquetages suivants qui
+% peuvent vous être utiles: %
+% \href{https://ctan.org/pkg/babel}{\pkg{babel}} (voir aussi la \autoref{sec:langues}) %
+% \href{https://ctan.org/pkg/fontspec}{\pkg{fontspec}}, %
+% \href{https://ctan.org/pkg/graphicx}{\pkg{graphicx}}, %
+% \href{https://ctan.org/pkg/hyperref}{\pkg{hyperref}}, %
+% \href{https://ctan.org/pkg/microtype}{\pkg{microtype}}, %
+% \href{https://ctan.org/pkg/natbib}{\pkg{natbib}} (voir aussi la
+% \autoref{sec:bibliographie}), %
+% \href{https://ctan.org/pkg/numprint}{\pkg{numprint}}, %
+% \href{https://ctan.org/pkg/xcolor}{\pkg{xcolor}}. %
+% Tel que mentionné précédemment, la classe est basée sur
+% \class{memoir} qui, elle-même, incorpore d'office une trentaine de
+% paquetages\footnote{%
+% Consultez la section~18.24 de la documentation de \class{memoir}
+% pour la liste, ou encore le journal de la compilation (\emph{log})
+% d'un document utilisant la classe {\ulclass}.}. %
+% L'intégralité des fonctionnalités de \class{memoir} se retrouve donc
+% dans {\ulclass}.
+%
+% L'\autoref{sec:meo} sur la mise en œuvre de la classe fournit la
+% liste détaillée des paquetages chargés et les raisons pour
+% lesquelles ils sont requis dans la classe.
%
% \subsection{Paquetage incompatible}
% \label{sec:incompatible}
%
-% Le paquetage \pkg{geometry} est incompatible avec la classe à cause
-% de sa mauvaise interaction avec \class{memoir}. Son chargement dans
-% le préambule du document cause une erreur lors de la compilation.
+% Le paquetage %
+% \href{https://ctan.org/pkg/geometry}{\pkg{geometry}} %
+% est incompatible avec la classe à cause de sa mauvaise interaction
+% avec \class{memoir}. Son chargement dans le préambule du document
+% cause une erreur lors de la compilation.
%
% \section{Thèses et mémoires par articles}
% \changes{5.0}{2018-06-08}{Ajout d'une section spécifique sur les
-% thèses et mémoires par articles.}
+% thèses et mémoires par articles.}
%
% La rédaction de la thèse ou du mémoire par articles est une pratique
% qui gagne en popularité. Elle consiste à remplacer le corps
@@ -741,167 +878,54 @@
% du mémoire (le cas échéant) y apparaissent sous forme de
% sections numérotées.
%
-% L'autre caractéristique qui distingue la thèse et le mémoire par
-% articles des versions standards, c'est la nécessité d'utiliser une
-% bibliographie distincte pour chacun des chapitres. Les options de la
-% classe |bibchapitre| et |bibsection| permettent de réaliser cette
-% mise en forme particulière. La \autoref{sec:bibliographie:multiples}
-% explique comment en tirer profit.
-%
% Des gabarits de document maître et de chapitre fournissent la
% structure de base pour la thèse et le mémoire par articles. Vous
% pouvez, au besoin, combiner les caractéristiques de ces gabarits à
-% celles de la thèse en cotutelle ou du mémoire en bidiplomation. La
-% \autoref{sec:gabarits} fournit les détails sur les gabarits.
+% celles de la thèse en cotutelle ou du mémoire en bidiplomation.
%
-% \section{Français et autres langues}
-% \label{sec:langues}
-%
-% Une complication additionnelle si vous rédigez dans une langue autre
-% que l'anglais consiste à adapter {\LaTeX} à votre langue, qu'il
-% s'agisse des mots clés, de la typographie ou de la césure des mots.
-% La solution standard à ce problème provient du paquetage
-% \pkg{babel}. Celui-ci permet de combiner plusieurs langues dans un
-% même document et de passer de l'une à l'autre facilement. Il est
-% chargé par défaut par la classe \class{ulthese}.
-%
-% Aucune langue n'est spécifiée dans la classe. Vous aurez sans doute
-% recours à l'anglais et au français, ne serait-ce que pour les deux
-% résumés demandés par la FESP. Vous devez spécifier les langues
-% utilisées dans le document en options à la classe, tel que mentionné
-% à la \autoref{sec:utilisation:options}. La \emph{dernière} langue
-% spécifiée devient par défaut la langue active du document.
-%
-% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\selectlanguage}
-% La commande \cmd{\selectlanguage} de \pkg{babel} permet de passer de
-% la langue courante à la langue spécifiée en argument.
-% \end{DescribeMacro}
-%
-% \begin{DescribeEnv}{otherlanguage}
-% L'environnement |otherlanguage| de \pkg{babel} permet de faire
-% la même chose que la commande \cmd{\selectlanguage}, sauf que le
-% changement de langue est local à l'environnement --- utile pour
-% les brefs changements de langue.
-% \end{DescribeEnv}
-%
-% Si vous n'êtes pas autrement familier avec le paquetage
-% \pkg{babel}, consultez sa %
-% \doc{http://texdoc.net/pkg/babel/}. %
-% Celle-ci est éclatée en un
-% document principal, pour le cœur du paquetage et plusieurs
-% autres pour les fonctionnalités propres à une langue: %
-% \doc[anglais]{http://texdoc.net/pkg/babel-english}, %
-% \doc[français]{http://texdoc.net/pkg/babel-french}, %
-% etc. Consultez au moins les documents consacrés aux
-% langues utilisées dans votre thèse ou mémoire. Le plus simple
-% consiste sans doute à consulter en ligne sur CTAN les
-% \link{https://mirrors.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/babel/contrib/}{%
-% documents spécifiques par langue}.
-% \changes{4.4}{2017-05-14}{Correction d'une url vers la documentation
-% de babel.}
-%
-% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\nombre}
-% Le paquetage \pkg{numprint} étant chargé dans la classe avec
-% \pkg{babel}, vous pouvez utiliser la commande \cmd{\nombre} pour
-% formater automatiquement les nombres. Par exemple, le résultat de
-% |\nombre{123456789}| est \nombre{123456789}.
-% \end{DescribeMacro}
-%
-% Les utilisateurs de {\XeLaTeX} qui souhaiteraient plutôt utiliser le
-% plus récent paquetage \pkg{polyglossia} \citep{polyglossia} peuvent
-% empêcher le chargement de \pkg{babel} avec l'option |nobabel| de la
-% classe. Ils devront toutefois charger et configurer
-% \pkg{polyglossia} eux-mêmes dans l'entête de leur document. Ce
-% paquetage est moins évolué que \pkg{babel} pour la typographie
-% française.
+% \tipbox{À l'automne~2023, la FESP a retiré l'exigence de produire
+% une bibliographie par chapitre pour les thèses et mémoires par
+% articles. La thèse ou le mémoire doit désormais contenir une seule
+% bibliographie regroupant l’ensemble des références du document.}
%
% \section{Bibliographie}
% \label{sec:bibliographie}
+% \changes{6.0}{2024-05-22}{Documentation: suppression de la section
+% sur les bibliographies multiples.}
+% \changes{6.0}{2024-06-19}{Documentation: inversion des sections sur
+% la bibliographie et sur la rédaction en français.}
%
% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\bibliography}
-% Tel qu'expliqué au chapitre~8 de \citet{formation-latex-ul},
-% il est fortement recommandé d'utiliser {\BibTeX} pour la
+% Il est fortement recommandé d'utiliser {\BibTeX} pour la
% préparation de la bibliographie d'un document. Celle-ci est
% insérée dans le document à l'endroit où apparait la commande
% \cmd{\bibliography} dans le code source. Cette commande prend en
-% arguments les noms des bases de données bibliographiques séparés
+% arguments les noms des bases de données bibliographiques, séparés
% par des virgules.
% \end{DescribeMacro}
%
% \subsection{Mise en forme des citations}
% \label{sec:bibliographie:options}
%
-% Dans la classe \class{ulthese}, la mise en forme des citations est
-% confiée au paquetage \pkg{natbib} (à moins que l'option |nonatbib|
-% ne soit spécifiée). Le paquetage est chargé avec les options par
-% défaut, soit |round|, |semicolon| et |authoryear|. Pour spécifier
-% d'autres options, vous avez deux possibilités:
-% \begin{enumerate}
-% \item utiliser l'option |nonatbib| de la classe et ensuite charger
-% explicitement \pkg{natbib} avec ses options;
-% \item
-% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\setcitestyle}
-% utiliser la commande \cmd{\setcitestyle} pour passer de
-% nouvelles options à \pkg{natbib}.
-% \end{DescribeMacro}
-% \end{enumerate}
+% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\setcitestyle}
+% Dans la classe {\ulclass}, la mise en forme des citations est
+% confiée au paquetage %
+% \href{https://ctan.org/pkg/natbib}{\pkg{natbib}} %
+% (à moins que l'option |nonatbib| ne soit spécifiée). Le paquetage
+% est chargé avec les options par défaut, soit |round|, |semicolon|
+% et |authoryear|. Pour spécifier d'autres options utilisez la
+% commande \cmd{\setcitestyle} pour passer de nouvelles options à
+% \pkg{natbib}.
+% \end{DescribeMacro}
%
% Par exemple, pour utiliser un style de citation numérique où le
-% numéro de la référence se trouve entre crochets, vous pouvez
-% procéder de l'une ou l'autre des deux manières suivantes:
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\documentclass[nonatbib]{ulthese}| \\
-% |\usepackage[numbers,square]{natbib}| \\
-% |...| \\
-% |\bibliographystyle{plain-fr}|
-% \end{quote}
-% ou
+% numéro de la référence se trouve entre crochets, insérez la commande
+% suivante dans le préambule:
% \begin{quote}
-% |\documentclass{ulthese}| \\
-% |...| \\
-% |\setcitestyle{numbers,square}| \\
-% |\bibliographystyle{plain-fr}|
+% |\setcitestyle{numbers,square}|
% \end{quote}
%
-% Consultez la %
-% \doc{http://texdoc.net/pkg/natbib/} %
-% de \pkg{natbib} pour les détails.
-%
-% \subsection{Bibliographies multiples}
-% \label{sec:bibliographie:multiples}
-%
-% L'ajout de |bibchapitre| ou de |bibsection| dans les options de la
-% classe permet de générer une bibliographie distincte pour chaque
-% chapitre, une chose particulièrement utile pour les thèses et
-% mémoire par articles.
-%
-% La classe fait appel au paquetage \pkg{chapterbib}
-% \citep{chapterbib} pour composer des bibliographies multiples. La
-% \doc{http://texdoc.net/pkg/chapterbib/} du paquetage
-% explique la procédure à suivre pour obtenir une bibliographie par
-% chapitre avec {\BibTeX}. En résumé:
-% \begin{enumerate}
-% \item chaque chapitre comportant sa propre bibliographie doit
-% absolument être inséré dans le document principal avec la commande
-% \cmd{\include} \citep[section~3.5]{formation-latex-ul};
-% \item chaque fichier visé doit contenir une commande
-% \cmd{\bibliographystyle} (\autoref{sec:bibliographie:style}) et
-% une commande \cmd{\bibliography};
-% \item on obtient les diverses bibliographies en compilant avec
-% {\BibTeX} les fichiers individuels, et non le document maître.
-% \end{enumerate}
-%
-% La plupart des auteurs préféreront sans doute l'effet de l'option
-% |bibsection|, où la bibliographie apparait comme une section normale
-% à la fin d'un chapitre. Lorsque \pkg{babel} est chargé, la section
-% sera numérotée. Pour supprimer la numérotation, insérer dans le
-% préambule du document la commande
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\addto\extras|\meta{langue}|{\renewcommand{\bibsection}{%| \\
-% | \section*{\bibname}\prebibhook}}|
-% \end{quote}
-% où \meta{langue} est la langue par défaut du document
-% (\autoref{sec:langues}).
+% Consultez la documentation de \pkg{natbib} pour plus de détails.
%
% \subsection{Style de la bibliographie}
% \label{sec:bibliographie:style}
@@ -909,423 +933,142 @@
% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\bibliographystyle}
% Le format général de la bibliographie est contrôlé par un
% \emph{style} choisi avec la commande \cmd{\bibliographystyle} dans
-% le préambule du document ou dans les fichiers de chaque chapitre
-% dans une thèse ou un mémoire par articles. Les styles standards de
-% {\LaTeX} sont |plain|, |unsrt|, |alpha| et |abbrv|.
+% le préambule du document. Les styles standards de {\LaTeX} sont
+% |plain|, |unsrt|, |alpha| et |abbrv|.
% \end{DescribeMacro}
%
-% Le paquetage \pkg{natbib} chargé par défaut par la classe supporte
-% le style de citation auteur-année fréquemment employé en sciences
-% naturelles, plusieurs commandes de citation, un grand nombre de
-% styles de bibliographie ainsi que des entrées spécifiques pour les
-% numéros ISBN et les URL. Le paquetage fournit des styles de
-% bibliographie |plainnat|, |unsrtnat| et |abbrvnat| similaires aux
-% styles standards, mais plus complets. Il existe des
-% \link{https://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/bib-fr/}{versions
-% francisées} de ces styles (et de quelques autres) dans CTAN.
-%
-% Le paquetage \pkg{francais-bst} \citep{francais-bst} fournit une
-% feuille de style compatible avec \pkg{natbib} permettant de composer
-% des bibliographies auteur-année respectant les normes de typographie
-% française proposées dans \cite{Malo:1996}. Pour utiliser ce style,
-% spécifier dans le préambule du document LaTeX
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\bibliographystyle{francais}|
-% \end{quote}
+% Le paquetage \pkg{natbib} prend en charge le style de citation
+% auteur-année fréquemment employé en sciences naturelles, plusieurs
+% commandes de citation, un grand nombre de styles de bibliographie,
+% ainsi que des entrées spécifiques pour les numéros ISBN et les
+% adresses URL. Le paquetage fournit des styles de bibliographie
+% |plainnat|, |unsrtnat| et |abbrvnat| similaires aux styles
+% standards, mais plus complets. Il existe des %
+% \href{https://ctan.org/pkg/bib-fr}{versions francisées} %
+% de ces styles (et de quelques autres) dans CTAN.
+%
+% Les styles \code{francais} et \code{francaissc} du paquetage %
+% \href{https://ctan.org/pkg/francais-bst}{\pkg{francais-bst}} %
+% permettent de composer des bibliographies auteur-année respectant
+% les normes de typographie française. Ils sont compatibles avec
+% \pkg{natbib} et plus modernes que les styles mentionnés ci-dessus.
%
% Autrement, la FESP n'a pas d'exigences particulières quant à la
% présentation de la bibliographie (présentation du titre, des auteurs
% et autres informations bibliographiques).
%
-% \section{Police de caractères du document}
-% \label{sec:police}
-%
-% Les documents {\LaTeX} sont facilement reconnaissables par leur
-% police de caractères par défaut, {\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont
-% Computer Modern}. Avec toute distribution {\LaTeX} moderne, il est
-% maintenant simple d'utiliser l'une ou l'autre des polices PostScript
-% standards. D'ailleurs la classe \class{ulthese} utilise la police
-% sans empattements \textsf{Helvetica} pour composer les pages de
-% titre.
-%
-% La FESP permet l'utilisation des polices Times, Palatino (la police
-% du présent document) et Lucida~Bright dans les thèse et mémoires.
-% \citet[section~10.2]{formation-latex-ul} explique comment utiliser ces
-% polices dans votre document.
-%
-% \section{Gabarits}
-% \label{sec:gabarits}
-%
-% Afin de vous épauler dans la préparation de votre manuscrit, la
-% classe \class{ulthese} est livrée avec un ensemble de gabarits. Tout
-% d'abord, pour le document maître de différents types de thèses et de
-% mémoires:
-% \begin{itemize}[noitemsep]
-% \item |gabarit-doctorat.tex|;
-% \item |gabarit-doctorat-articles.tex|;
-% \item |gabarit-doctorat-cotutelle.tex|;
-% \item |gabarit-maitrise.tex|;
-% \item |gabarit-maitrise-articles.tex|;
-% \item |gabarit-maitrise-bidiplomation.tex|.
-% \end{itemize}
-% Ensuite, pour quelques parties d'un document:
-% \begin{itemize}[noitemsep]
-% \item |resume.tex|;
-% \item |abstract.tex|;
-% \item |remerciements.tex|;
-% \item |avantpropos.tex|;
-% \item |introduction.tex|;
-% \item |chapitre1.tex|;
-% \item |chapitre1-articles.tex|;
-% \item |chapitre2.tex|;
-% \item |chapitre2-articles.tex|;
-% \item |conclusion.tex|;
-% \item |annexe.tex|.
-% \end{itemize}
-% Vous pourriez devoir combiner les caractéristiques de deux gabarits
-% de document maître comme, par exemple, pour une thèse en cotutelle
-% par articles.
-%
-% Les gabarits comportent des commentaires succincts pour vous guider
-% dans leur utilisation. Les sections suivantes fournissent des
-% détails additionnels, et ce, dans l'ordre où les commandes
-% apparaissent dans les fichiers.
-%
-% \begin{rem}
-% Il n'y a pas de gabarit spécifique pour un examen de doctorat,
-% pour un essai de maîtrise, pour un projet de recherche ou pour un
-% rapport de stage. Utilisez un gabarit de thèse ou de maîtrise et
-% inscrivez l'option |examen|, |essai|, |projet| ou |stage| dans la
-% commande \cmd{\documentclass}.
-% \end{rem}
-%
-% \subsection{Encodage des fichiers}
-%
-% Composer en {\LaTeX} de longs textes dans une langue ayant recours
-% aux signes diacritiques devient rapidement pénible si l'on utilise
-% des commandes telles que |\'e|, |\`a| ou |\"o| pour entrer des lettres
-% accentuées. Afin de pouvoir plutôt entrer directement |é|, |à| ou
-% |ö|, {\LaTeX} doit être configuré pour reconnaître les lettres
-% accentuées. C'est le rôle du paquetage \pkg{inputenc}
-% \citep{inputenc}.
-%
-% Il existe plusieurs manières différentes d'encoder --- ou
-% d'enregistrer --- les lettres accentuées et autres caractères
-% spéciaux (comme, par exemple, le symbole de l'euro) dans un
-% ordinateur. La méthode la plus répandue et celle standard sur les
-% versions récentes des systèmes d'exploitation Linux et macOS est
-% l'UTF-8 de la norme
-% \link{https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Unicode}{Unicode}. Les gabarits
-% sont livrés dans ce type d'encodage.
-%
-% La déclaration
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}|
-% \end{quote}
-% dans le préambule assure que {\LaTeX} traitera correctement des
-% fichiers source encodés en UTF-8.
-%
-% La norme Unicode n'est pas aussi uniformément supportée par Windows.
-% Selon l'éditeur de texte employé et la version du système
-% d'exploitation, il peut être nécessaire d'utiliser les normes
-% d'encodage %
-% \link{https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_8859-1}{ISO~8859-1} %
-% (ou Latin-1; option |latin1| de \pkg{inputenc}), %
-% \link{https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_8859-15}{ISO~8859-15} %
-% (ou Latin-9; option |latin9|) ou %
-% \link{https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Windows-1252}{Windows-1252} %
-% (options |cp1252| ou |ansinew|).
-%
-% La situation est plus simple avec {\XeLaTeX} puisqu'il gère
-% nativement Unicode. Le paquetage \pkg{inputenc} est non seulement
-% inutile, mais incompatible avec {\XeLaTeX}. C'est pourquoi, dans les
-% gabarits, \pkg{inputenc} est chargé seulement lorsque {\XeTeX}
-% n'est pas le moteur employé pour compiler le document.
-%
-% \subsection{Paquetages additionnels}
-%
-% Tel qu'expliqué à la \autoref{sec:paquetages}, la classe charge déjà
-% quelques paquetages. Cependant, il est fort probable que vous devrez
-% en charger d'autres pour composer votre document. Les gabarits
-% prévoient un endroit pour le chargement de paquetages additionnels.
-%
-% Si vous utilisez un paquetage non standard dans les distributions
-% courantes (\TeX~Live, Mac\TeX, MiK\TeX), vous devez le fournir avec
-% le code source de votre document lors du dépôt final.
-%
-% \subsection{Changement de police de caractères}
-%
-% Les gabarits comportent des déclarations types pour utiliser les
-% polices Palatino ou Times sous {\LaTeX} ou, sous {\XeLaTeX}, leurs
-% équivalents Pagella et Termes du projet
-% \link{https://www.gust.org.pl/projects/e-foundry/tex-gyre/}{TeX~Gyre}.
-%
-% \subsection{Options de \pkg{babel}}
-%
-% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\frenchbsetup}
-% La commande \cmd{\frenchbsetup} de \pkg{babel} permet de contrôler
-% certains ajustements typographiques apportés par le paquetage en
-% mode français. Consultez la documentation de \pkg{babel} pour la
-% liste des options de configuration disponibles.
-% \end{DescribeMacro}
-%
-% Les concepteurs de la classe \class{ulthese} proposent trois
-% ajustements dans les gabarits:
-% \begin{enumerate}
-% \item l'option |StandardItemizeEnv=true| évite que le mode français de
-% \pkg{babel} ne diminue l'espacement vertical dans les listes;
-% \item l'option |ThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers=true| fait en sorte qu'une espace fine
-% sera utilisée comme séparateur des milliers dans les nombres plutôt
-% qu'une espace pleine;
-% \item les options |og=«| et |fg=»| déclarent que les caractères « et
-% » utilisés dans le code source représentent les guillemets ouvrant
-% et fermant, respectivement. Cela évite de devoir utiliser les
-% commandes \cmd{\og} et \cmd{\fg} de \pkg{babel} tout en bénéficiant de
-% l'ajutement automatique des espaces autour des symboles.
-% \end{enumerate}
-% Vous devez évidemment désactiver ces ajustements si l'option
-% |nobabel| est spécifiée au chargement de la classe.
+% \section{Français et autres langues}
+% \label{sec:langues}
%
-% \subsection{Style de la bibliographie}
-% \label{sec:bibliographystyle}
-%
-% Tel qu'expliqué à la \autoref{sec:bibliographie:style}, la commande
-% \cmd{\bibliographystyle} permet de définir le mode de citation dans
-% le texte et la présentation des notices bibliographiques. Cette
-% commande devrait figurer dans les fichiers des chapitres
-% individuels dans une thèse ou un mémoire par articles.
-%
-% \subsection{Déclarations de la page frontispice}
-%
-% Les gabarits comportent toutes les déclarations nécessaires pour
-% composer la page frontispice des divers types de thèse ou de
-% mémoires. Vous devez remplacer les éléments se trouvant entre
-% crochets |< >| en respectant la forme indiquée. Assurez-vous de
-% supprimer les caractères |<| et |>| afin qu'ils n'apparaissent pas
-% sur la page frontispice de votre document.
-%
-% \subsection{Pages liminaires}
-%
-% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\frontmatter}
-% La commande \cmd{\frontmatter} déclare que {\LaTeX} doit considérer le
-% matériel qui suit comme des pages liminaires. En pratique, cela
-% résulte essentiellement en une numérotation des pages en chiffres
-% romains.
-% \end{DescribeMacro}
+% Une complication additionnelle si vous rédigez dans une langue autre
+% que l'anglais consiste à adapter {\LaTeX} à votre langue, qu'il
+% s'agisse des mots clés, de la typographie ou de la césure des mots.
+% La solution standard à ce problème provient du paquetage %
+% \href{https://ctan.org/pkg/babel}{\pkg{babel}}. %
+% Celui-ci permet de combiner plusieurs langues dans un même document
+% et de passer de l'une à l'autre facilement. Il est chargé par défaut
+% par la classe {\ulclass}.
%
-% Les normes de présentation de la FESP édictent que les thèses et
-% mémoires devraient comporter les pages liminaires suivantes, dans
-% l'ordre:
-% \begin{enumerate}[noitemsep]
-% \item page frontispice (obligatoire);
-% \item résumé en français (obligatoire);
-% \item résumé en anglais (recommandé, mais non obligatoire);
-% \item table des matières (obligatoire);
-% \item liste des tableaux;
-% \item liste des figures;
-% \item liste des abbréviations et des sigles;
-% \item dédicace;
-% \item épigraphe;
-% \item remerciements;
-% \item avant-propos (obligatoire dans le cas d'une thèse ou d'un
-% mémoire par articles).
-% \end{enumerate}
-%
-% Les commandes
-% \begin{quote}
-% \cmd{\frontispice} \\
-% \cmd{\tableofcontents} \\
-% \cmd{\listoftables} \\
-% \cmd{\listoffigures} \\
-% \cmd{\dedicace}\marg{texte} \\
-% \cmd{\epigraphe}\marg{texte}\marg{auteur}
-% \end{quote}
-% permettent de générer les pages correspondantes. Seules les deux
-% dernières commandes admettent des arguments.
-%
-% \begin{rem}
-% L'examen de doctorat, l'essai de maîtrise, le rapport de projet de
-% recherche et le rapport de stage comportent une page de titre.
-% Vous devez ajouter dans les gabarits les commandes nécessaires
-% pour la production de la page de titre (\autoref{sec:pagetitre})
-% et supprimer les autres pages liminaires. Rappelons que l'option
-% de classe |examen| a pour effet de supprimer la page frontispice.
-% \end{rem}
-%
-% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\chapter*}
-% Les résumés, la liste des abbréviations et des sigles, les
-% remerciements et l'avant-propos sont composés comme des chapitres
-% normaux, mais sans être numérotés. Il faut donc définir ces éléments
-% avec la commande \cmd{\chapter*}.
-% \end{DescribeMacro}
+% Aucune langue n'est spécifiée dans la classe. Vous aurez sans doute
+% recours à l'anglais et au français, ne serait-ce que pour les deux
+% résumés demandés par la FESP. Vous devez spécifier les langues
+% utilisées dans le document en options à la classe, tel que mentionné
+% à la \autoref{sec:utilisation:options}. La \emph{dernière} langue
+% spécifiée devient par défaut la langue active du document.
%
-% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\label}
-% La commande \cmd{\label} permet d'utiliser le système de renvois
-% automatiques de {\LaTeX} \citep[section~3.4]{formation-latex-ul}.
-% Les étiquettes des chapitres non numérotés sont déjà configurées
-% pour l'ajout de ces chapitres dans la table des matières (voir
-% ci-dessous). Nous recommandons fortement de définir vos propres
-% étiquettes pour les chapitres normaux.
+% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\selectlanguage}
+% La commande \cmd{\selectlanguage} de \pkg{babel} permet de passer de
+% la langue courante à la langue spécifiée en argument.
% \end{DescribeMacro}
%
-% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\phantomsection}
-% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\addcontentsline}
-% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\nameref}
-% Les chapitres déclarés avec la commande \cmd{\chapter*}
-% n'apparaissent pas dans la table des matières. Comme les
-% normes de présentation de la FESP exigent que toutes les pages
-% liminaires y figurent, nous faisons suivre les commandes
-% \cmd{\chapter*}\marg{Titre} et \cmd{\label}\marg{nom} des
-% commandes
-% \end{DescribeMacro}
-% \end{DescribeMacro}
-% \end{DescribeMacro}
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\phantomsection\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{%| \\
-% | \nameref|\marg{nom}|}|
-% \end{quote}
-% Celles-ci ajoutent à la table des matières (|toc|) une section de
-% niveau |chapter| dont le titre est celui du chapitre auquel
-% correspond l'étiquette \meta{nom}. La commande \cmd{\phantomsection}
-% est rendue nécessaire (ou recommandée) par le paquetage
-% \pkg{hyperref}.
+% \begin{DescribeEnv}{otherlanguage}
+% L'environnement |otherlanguage| de \pkg{babel} permet de faire la
+% même chose que la commande \cmd{\selectlanguage}, sauf que le
+% changement de langue est local à l'environnement, ce qui peut
+% s'avérer utile pour les brefs changements de langue.
+% \end{DescribeEnv}
%
-% \subsection{Corps du document}
+% Si vous n'êtes pas autrement familier avec le paquetage \pkg{babel},
+% consultez sa documentation. Celle-ci est éclatée en un document
+% principal pour le cœur du paquetage et plusieurs autres pour les
+% fonctionnalités propres à une langue. Consultez au moins les
+% documents consacrés aux langues utilisées dans votre thèse ou
+% mémoire. Le plus simple consiste sans doute à consulter en ligne sur
+% CTAN les
+% \href{https://ctan.org/pkg/babel-contrib/}{documents spécifiques par langue}.
+% \changes{4.4}{2017-05-14}{Correction d'une url vers la documentation
+% de \textbf{babel}.}
%
-% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\mainmatter}
-% La commande \cmd{\mainmatter} délimite le début du corps du document. La
-% numérotation des pages passe en chiffres arabes.
+% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\nombre}
+% Le paquetage %
+% \href{https://ctan.org/pkg/numprint}{\pkg{numprint}} %
+% étant chargé dans la classe avec \pkg{babel}, vous pouvez utiliser
+% la commande \cmd{\nombre} pour formater automatiquement les
+% nombres. Par exemple, le résultat de |\nombre{123456789}| est
+% \nombre{123456789}.
% \end{DescribeMacro}
%
-% Le corps du document devrait normalement compter une introduction (non
-% numérotée), un développement divisé en chapitres (numérotés) et une
-% conclusion (non numérotée).
-%
-% \subsection{Annexes}
-%
-% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\appendix}
-% Si la thèse ou le mémoire comporte une ou plusieurs annexes,
-% composer celles-ci comme des chapitres normaux insérés dans le
-% document maître après la commande \cmd{\appendix}. Cette commande a
-% pour effet de passer d'un mode de numération numérique (1, 1.1, 2, 2.1,
-% \dots) à un mode alphanumérique (A, A.1, B, B.1, \dots).
-% \end{DescribeMacro}
+% Si vous souhaitez plutôt utiliser le plus récent paquetage %
+% \href{https://ctan.org/pkg/polyglossia}{\pkg{polyglossia}} %
+% avec {\XeLaTeX}, vous devez empêcher le chargement de \pkg{babel}
+% avec l'option |nobabel| de la classe, puis charger et configurer
+% \pkg{polyglossia} vous-même dans l'entête de votre document. Ce
+% paquetage est moins évolué que \pkg{babel} pour la typographie
+% française.
%
-% \subsection{Bibliographie}
+% \section{Police de caractères du document}
+% \label{sec:police}
+% \changes{6.0}{2024-06-17}{Documentation: révision de la section sur
+% les polices de caractères suite aux modifications apportées aux
+% règles de présentation de la FESP.}
%
-% La bibliographie figure normalement à la toute fin du document, sous
-% forme de chapitre non numéroté. Tel qu'expliqué à la
-% \autoref{sec:bibliographie:multiples}, la commande
-% \cmd{\bibliography} doit plutôt se trouver dans les fichiers des
-% chapitres dans une thèse ou un mémoire par articles.
+% Les documents {\LaTeX} sont facilement reconnaissables par leur
+% police de caractères par défaut: %
+% {\iftutex\fontfamily{lmr}\else\fontfamily{cmr}\fi\selectfont
+% Computer Modern}. %
+% Si vous le souhaitez, il est aujourd'hui assez simple de produire
+% des documents {\LaTeX} utilisant d'autres polices. L'approche
+% recommandée consiste à utiliser une police OpenType ou TrueType
+% présente sur votre système avec le moteur {\XeLaTeX}. Autrement,
+% vous pouvez charger l'une ou l'autre des polices PostScript
+% standards compatibles avec le moteur pdf{\LaTeX} en ayant recours au
+% paquetage %
+% \href{https://ctan.org/pkg/psnfss}{\pkg{psnfss}}. %
+% Dans tous les cas, assurez-vous de respecter les règles de
+% présentation de la FESP en matière de polices de caractères.
+%
+% La Bibliothèque de l’Université Laval détient une licence
+% d’utilisation des polices de très grande qualité %
+% \href{https://tug.org/store/lucida}{Lucida Bright}. %
+% Vous pouvez vous procurer gratuitement une copie des polices en
+% écrivant à %
+% \href{mailto:lucida@bibl.ulaval.ca}{lucida@bibl.ulaval.ca}.
+%
+% À titre indicatif, le présent document est composé avec les polices
+% OpenType %
+% \href{https://ctan.org/pkg/stix2-otf}{STIX~Two} %
+% pour le texte et %
+% \href{https://ctan.org/pkg/fira}{Fira} %
+% pour les éléments décoratifs (notamment \textsf{Fira Sans} pour les
+% titres de sections et \texttt{Fira Mono} pour le code informatique).
+%
+% \changes{6.0}{2024-05-25}{Documentation: suppression de la section
+% portant sur l'explication détaillée des gabarits. En échange,
+% ceux-ci comportent des commentaires additionnels.}
%
% \section{Commentaires, suggestions et aide}
% \changes{5.0}{2018-08-09}{Code source du projet déplacé de GitHub
-% vers GitLab.}
+% vers GitLab.}
+% \changes{6.0}{2024-06-18}{Documentation: retrait du wiki thèse
+% (fermé) et des archives de la liste ulthese-aide (peu utiles).}
%
-% Le \link{https://gitlab.com/vigou3/ulthese/}{dépôt du projet} dans
+% Le \href{https://gitlab.com/vigou3/ulthese/}{dépôt du projet} dans
% GitLab demeure le meilleur endroit pour rapporter des bogues ou pour
-% proposer des améliorations à la classe \class{ulthese}.
-%
-% Pour obtenir de l'aide additionnelle sur l'utilisation de la classe
-% --- et non sur celle de {\LaTeX} en général --- consultez d'abord:
-% \begin{enumerate}
-% \item le \link{http://www.theses.ulaval.ca/wiki/}{WikiThèse} de
-% l'Université Laval, en particulier la
-% \link{http://www.theses.ulaval.ca/wiki/index.php?title=FAQ}{Foire aux questions};
-% \item les
-% \link{http://listes.ulaval.ca/listserv/archives/ulthese-aide.html}{archives}
-% de la liste de distribution \texttt{ulthese-aide}.
-% \end{enumerate}
-% Si la réponse à votre question ne se trouve ni dans le wiki, ni dans
-% les archives, alors écrivez à l'adresse
-% \href{mailto:ulthese-aide@listes.ulaval.ca}{\url{ulthese-aide@listes.ulaval.ca}}.
-%
-% \StopEventually{
-% \begin{thebibliography}{15}
-% \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Références}
-% \bibitem[{Arseneau(2010)}]{chapterbib}
-% Arseneau, D. 2010,
-% {\selectlanguage{english}\emph{chapterbib. Multiple
-% bibliographies in {\LaTeX}}}.
-% URL~\url{https://www.ctan.org/pkg/chapterbib/}.
-%
-% \bibitem[{Braams et Bezos(2016)}]{babel}
-% Braams, J. et J.~Bezos. 2016,
-% {\selectlanguage{english}\emph{Babel}}.
-% URL~\url{https://www.ctan.org/pkg/babel/}.
-%
-% \bibitem[{Carlisle et {The \LaTeX3\ Project}(2016)}]{graphicx}
-% Carlisle, D. et {The \LaTeX3\ Project}. 2016,
-% {\selectlanguage{english}\emph{Packages in the `graphics'
-% Bundle}}. URL~\url{https://www.ctan.org/pkg/graphics/}.
-%
-% \bibitem[{Charette(2015)}]{polyglossia}
-% Charette, F. 2015, {\selectlanguage{english}\emph{Polyglossia:
-% An Alternative to Babel for {\XeLaTeX} and {\LuaLaTeX}}}.
-% URL~\url{https://www.ctan.org/pkg/polyglossia/}, current
-% maintainer Arthur Reutenauer.
-%
-% \bibitem[{Daly(2010)}]{natbib}
-% Daly, P.~W. 2010, {\selectlanguage{english}\emph{Natural
-% Sciences Citations and References}}.
-% URL~\url{https://www.ctan.org/pkg/natbib/}.
-%
-% \bibitem[{Goulet(2013)}]{francais-bst}
-% Goulet, V. 2013, {\selectlanguage{french}«Paquetage
-% francais-bst»},
-% URL~\url{https://www.ctan.org/pkg/francais-bst/}.
-%
-% \bibitem[{Goulet(2020)}]{formation-latex-ul}
-% Goulet, V. 2020, {\selectlanguage{french}\emph{Rédaction avec
-% {\LaTeX}}}, document libre sous contrat Creative Commons.
-% URL~\url{httpss://ctan.org/pkg/formation-latex-ul}.
-%
-% \bibitem[{Harders(2012)}]{numprint}
-% Harders, H. 2012, {\selectlanguage{english}\emph{The
-% numprint package}}.
-% URL~\url{https://www.ctan.org/pkg/numprint/}.
-%
-% \bibitem[{Jeffrey et Mittelbach(2015)}]{inputenc}
-% Jeffrey, A. et F.~Mittelbach. 2015,
-% {\selectlanguage{english}\emph{inputenc.sty}}.
-% URL~\url{https://www.ctan.org/pkg/inputenc/}.
-%
-% \bibitem[{Kern(2016)}]{xcolor}
-% Kern, D.~U. 2016, {\selectlanguage{english}\emph{Extending
-% {\LaTeX}’s color facilities: the xcolor package}}.
-% URL~\url{https://www.ctan.org/pkg/xcolor/}.
-%
-% \bibitem[{Lehman et Wright(2018)}]{etoolbox}
-% Lehman, P. et J.~Wright. 2018,
-% {\selectlanguage{english}\emph{The etoolbox package}}.
-% URL~\url{https://www.ctan.org/pkg/etoolbox/}.
-%
-% \bibitem[{Malo(1996)}]{Malo:1996}
-% Malo, M. 1996, {\selectlanguage{french}\emph{Guide de la
-% communication écrite au cégep, à l'université et en
-% entreprise}}, Québec Amérique. ISBN~978-2-8903-7875-9.
-%
-% \bibitem[{Rahtz et Oberdiek(2017)}]{hyperref}
-% Rahtz, S. et H.~Oberdiek. 2017,
-% {\selectlanguage{english}\emph{Hypertext marks in {\LaTeX}: a
-% manual for hyperref}}.
-% URL~\url{https://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref/}.
-%
-% \bibitem[{Robertson et Hosny(2017)}]{fontspec}
-% Robertson, W. et K.~Hosny. 2017,
-% {\selectlanguage{english}\emph{The fontspec package: Font
-% selection for {\XeLaTeX} and {\LuaLaTeX}}}.
-% URL~\url{https://www.ctan.org/pkg/fontspec/}.
-%
-% \bibitem[{Wilson(2016)}]{memoir}
-% Wilson, P. 2016, {\selectlanguage{english}\emph{The Memoir Class
-% for Configurable Typesetting}}, 8{\ieme} éd., The Herries Press.
-% URL~\url{https://www.ctan.org/pkg/memoir/}, maintained by Lars
-% Madsen.
-% \end{thebibliography}
-% \PrintChanges
-% }
+% proposer des améliorations à la classe {\ulclass}.
+%
+% Pour de l'aide additionnelle sur l'utilisation de la classe~--- et
+% non sur celle de {\LaTeX} en général~--- écrivez à l'adresse %
+% \href{mailto:ulthese-aide@listes.ulaval.ca}{ulthese-aide@listes.ulaval.ca}.
%
% \appendix
%
@@ -1343,44 +1086,47 @@
% la \autoref{sec:utilisation:options} lorsque l'on souhaite créer une
% page de titre.
%
-% \begin{DescribeMacro}{multifacultaire}
-% Identifie une thèse multifacultaire. Valide uniquement avec un
-% grade de doctorat. Cette déclaration requiert ensuite d'utiliser
-% la commande \cmd{\faculteUL}.
-% \end{DescribeMacro}
-%
-% \begin{DescribeMacro}{extensionUdeS}
-% Identifie une thèse réalisée en extension à l'Université de
-% Sherbrooke. Valide uniquement avec un grade de doctorat. Cette
-% déclaration requiert ensuite d'utiliser les commandes
-% \cmd{\faculteUL} et \cmd{\faculteUdeS}.
-% \end{DescribeMacro}
-%
-% \begin{DescribeMacro}{extensionUQO}
-% Identifie une thèse réalisée en extension à l'Université du
-% Québec en Outaouais (UQO). Valide uniquement avec un grade de doctorat.
-% Cette déclaration requiert ensuite d'utiliser les commandes
-% \cmd{\faculteUL} et \cmd{\faculteUQO}.
-% \end{DescribeMacro}
-%
-% \begin{DescribeMacro}{extensionUQAC}
-% Identifie un mémoire réalisé en extension à l'Université du Québec
-% à Chicoutimi (UQAC). Valide uniquement avec un grade de maîtrise.
-% Cette déclaration requiert ensuite d'utiliser les commandes
-% \cmd{\faculteUL} et \cmd{\faculteUQAC}.
-% \end{DescribeMacro}
+% \begin{DescribeOption}{multifacultaire}
+% L'option |multifacultaire| identifie une thèse
+% multifacultaire. Valide uniquement avec un grade de doctorat.
+% Cette déclaration requiert ensuite d'utiliser la commande
+% \cmd{\faculteUL}.
+% \end{DescribeOption}
+%
+% \begin{DescribeOption}{extensionUdeS}
+% L'option |extensionUdeS| identifie une thèse réalisée en extension
+% à l'Université de Sherbrooke. Valide uniquement avec un grade de
+% doctorat. Cette déclaration requiert ensuite d'utiliser les
+% commandes \cmd{\faculteUL} et \cmd{\faculteUdeS}.
+% \end{DescribeOption}
+%
+% \begin{DescribeOption}{extensionUQO}
+% L'option |extensionUQO| identifie une thèse réalisée en extension
+% à l'Université du Québec en Outaouais (UQO). Valide uniquement
+% avec un grade de doctorat. Cette déclaration requiert ensuite
+% d'utiliser les commandes \cmd{\faculteUL} et \cmd{\faculteUQO}.
+% \end{DescribeOption}
+%
+% \begin{DescribeOption}{extensionUQAC}
+% L'option |extensionUQAC| identifie un mémoire réalisé en extension
+% à l'Université du Québec à Chicoutimi (UQAC). Valide uniquement
+% avec un grade de maîtrise. Cette déclaration requiert ensuite
+% d'utiliser les commandes \cmd{\faculteUL} et \cmd{\faculteUQAC}.
+% \end{DescribeOption}
%
% Ensuite, la composition d'une page de titre peut nécessiter
% d'utiliser les commandes ci-dessous en plus de celles de la
% \autoref{sec:utilisation:commandes}.
%
% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\annee}
-% Année du dépôt final de la thèse ou du mémoire.
+% La commande \cmdprint{\annee} spécifie l'année du dépôt final de
+% la thèse ou du mémoire.
% \end{DescribeMacro}
%
% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\univcotutelle}
-% Nom, ville et pays de l'université de cotutelle, déclarés sous la
-% forme
+% Pour les thèses en cotutelle, la commande
+% \cmdprint{\univcotutelle} permet de saisir le nom, la ville et le
+% pays de l'université de cotutelle, sous la forme
% \begin{quote}
% |\univcotutelle{Nom de l'université \\ Ville, Pays}|
% \end{quote}
@@ -1389,8 +1135,9 @@
% \end{DescribeMacro}
%
% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\gradecotutelle}
-% Grade conféré par l'université de cotutelle, déclaré
-% sous la forme
+% Pour les thèses en cotutelle, la commande
+% \cmdprint{\gradecotutelle} spécifie le grade conféré par
+% l'université de cotutelle, sous la forme
% \begin{quote}
% |\gradecotutelle{Nom du grade (sigle)}|
% \end{quote}
@@ -1399,8 +1146,9 @@
% \end{DescribeMacro}
%
% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\univbidiplomation}
-% Nom, ville et pays de l'université de bidiplomation, déclarés sous
-% la forme
+% Pour les mémoires en bidiplomation, la commande
+% \cmdprint{\univbidiplomation} permet de saisir le nom, la ville et
+% le pays de l'université de bidiplomation, sous la forme
% \begin{quote}
% |\univbidiplomation{Nom de l'université \\ Ville, Pays}|
% \end{quote}
@@ -1409,8 +1157,9 @@
% \end{DescribeMacro}
%
% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\gradebidiplomation}
-% Grade conféré par l'université de bidiplomation, déclaré sous la
-% forme
+% Pour les mémoires en bidiplomation, la commande
+% \cmdprint{\gradebidiplomation} spécifie le grade conféré par
+% l'université de bidiplomation, sous la forme
% \begin{quote}
% |\gradebidiplomation{Nom du grade (sigle)}|
% \end{quote}
@@ -1419,7 +1168,8 @@
% \end{DescribeMacro}
%
% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\faculteUL}
-% La commande a deux usages:
+% La commande \cmdprint{\faculteUL} sert à saisir deux types
+% d'informations:
% \begin{enumerate}
% \item noms des facultés pour les thèses et mémoires
% multifacultaires, séparés par des commandes |\\|;
@@ -1433,35 +1183,37 @@
% \end{DescribeMacro}
%
% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\faculteUdeS}
-% Nom de la faculté de l'Université de Sherbrooke hébergeant la
-% thèse en extension. Cette commande prend effet seulement lorsque
-% la classe est chargée avec l'option |extensionUdeS|.
+% La commande \cmdprint{\faculteUdeS} spécifie le nom de la faculté
+% de l'Université de Sherbrooke hébergeant la thèse en extension.
+% Cette commande prend effet seulement lorsque la classe est chargée
+% avec l'option |extensionUdeS|.
% \end{DescribeMacro}
%
% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\faculteUQO}
-% Nom de la faculté de l'Université du Québec en Outaouais
-% hébergeant la thèse en extension. Cette commande prend effet
-% seulement lorsque la classe est chargée avec l'option
-% |extensionUQO|.
+% La commande \cmdprint{\faculteUQO} spécifie le nom de la faculté
+% de l'Université du Québec en Outaouais hébergeant la thèse en
+% extension. Cette commande prend effet seulement lorsque la classe
+% est chargée avec l'option |extensionUQO|.
% \end{DescribeMacro}
%
% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\faculteUQAC}
-% Nom de la faculté de l'Université du Québec à Chicoutimi
-% hébergeant le mémoire en extension. Cette commande prend effet
-% seulement lorsque la classe est chargée avec l'option
-% |extensionUQAC|.
+% La commande \cmdprint{\faculteUQAC} spécifie le nom de la faculté
+% de l'Université du Québec à Chicoutimi hébergeant le mémoire en
+% extension. Cette commande prend effet seulement lorsque la classe
+% est chargée avec l'option |extensionUQAC|.
% \end{DescribeMacro}
%
% \begin{DescribeMacro}{\pagetitre}
-% Création de la page de titre. Ne pas utiliser la commande
-% \cmd{\pagetitle} de {\LaTeX} pour ce faire. De toutes les
+% La commande \cmdprint{\pagetitre} crée la page de titre à
+% l'endroit où elle apparait dans le code source. N'utilisez pas la
+% commande \cmd{\titlepage} de {\LaTeX} pour ce faire. De toutes les
% commandes ci-dessus, c'est la seule qui doit se trouver dans le
% corps du document plutôt que dans le préambule.
% \end{DescribeMacro}
%
+% \MaybeStop{\PrintChanges}
%
-% ^^A Début du code de la classe
-%
+% ^^A >>>>> Début du code de la classe
% \section{Mise en œuvre}
% \label{sec:meo}
%
@@ -1470,37 +1222,30 @@
% explorer comment la classe est programmée.
%
% \subsection{Tests et valeurs booléennes}
-% \changes{4.4}{2017-06-01}{Tests et valeurs booléennes réalisés sans ifthen.}
+% \changes{4.4}{2017-06-01}{Tests et valeurs booléennes réalisés sans
+% \textbf{ifthen}.}
%
-% Le paquetage \pkg{ifxetex} permet de tester si un document est
-% compilé avec \XeTeX.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*class>
-\RequirePackage{ifxetex}
-% \end{macrocode}
% Nous définissons ici toutes les valeurs booléennes requises par la
% classe.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*class>
\newif\ifUL@babel \UL@babeltrue % charger babel?
\newif\ifUL@natbib \UL@natbibtrue % charger natbib?
\newif\ifUL@hyperref \UL@hyperreftrue % charger hyperref?
-\newif\ifUL@chapterbib \UL@chapterbibfalse % charger chapterbib?
-\newif\ifUL@sectionbib \UL@sectionbibfalse % option sectionbib de chapterbib?
-\newif\ifUL@isthesis % programme est une thèse?
-\newif\ifUL@iscotutelle \UL@iscotutellefalse % thèse en cotutelle?
+\newif\ifUL@isthesis % programme est une these?
+\newif\ifUL@iscotutelle \UL@iscotutellefalse % these en cotutelle?
\newif\ifUL@isexam \UL@isexamfalse % examen de doctorat?
-\newif\ifUL@isessay \UL@isessayfalse % essai de maîtrise?
+\newif\ifUL@isessay \UL@isessayfalse % essai de maitrise?
\newif\ifUL@isresearch \UL@isresearchfalse % projet de recherche?
\newif\ifUL@isworkterm \UL@isworktermfalse % rapport de stage?
\newif\ifUL@hassubtitle \UL@hassubtitlefalse % document a un sous-titre?
-\newif\ifUL@hastitlepage \UL@hastitlepagefalse % page titre utilisée?
+\newif\ifUL@hastitlepage \UL@hastitlepagefalse % page titre utilisee?
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Options de la classe}
%
% Les grandes catégories d'options propres à la classe sont: la
-% possibilité d'empêcher le chargement du paquetage \pkg{natbib};
-% l'activation des bibliographies par chapitre ou par section; la
+% possibilité d'empêcher le chargement du paquetage \pkg{natbib}; la
% possibilité d'empêcher le chargement du paquetage \pkg{babel}; la
% possibilité d'empêcher le chargement du paquetage \pkg{hyperref}; la
% taille de la police de caractères en points; le type de grade; la
@@ -1516,21 +1261,6 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
-% \begin{macro}{bibchapitre}
-% \begin{macro}{bibsection}
-% L'option |bibchapitre| entraine le chargement du paquetage
-% \pkg{chapterbib} qui permet de composer des bibliographies
-% multiples dans un document, habituellement une par
-% chapitre. Avec l'option |bibsection|, la bibliographie se
-% présente sous la forme d'une section plutôt que d'un chapitre.
-% La seconde option implique la première.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{bibchapitre}{\UL@chapterbibtrue}
-\DeclareOption{bibsection}{\UL@chapterbibtrue\UL@sectionbibtrue}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
% \begin{macro}{nobabel}
% L'option |nobabel| permet d'empêcher la classe de charger le
% paquetage \pkg{babel}. Cette option peut s'avérer utile pour
@@ -1618,10 +1348,6 @@
\UL@isthesisfalse
\renewcommand*{\UL@typenum}{0}
\newcommand*{\UL@degree}{Ma\^itre en architecture (M.~Arch.)}}
-\DeclareOption{MA}{%
- \UL@isthesisfalse
- \renewcommand*{\UL@typenum}{0}
- \newcommand*{\UL@degree}{Ma\^itre \`es arts (M.A.)}}
\DeclareOption{LLM}{%
\UL@isthesisfalse
\renewcommand*{\UL@typenum}{0}
@@ -1634,14 +1360,10 @@
\UL@isthesisfalse
\renewcommand*{\UL@typenum}{0}
\newcommand*{\UL@degree}{Ma\^itre en musique (M.~Mus.)}}
-\DeclareOption{MPht}{%
- \UL@isthesisfalse
- \renewcommand*{\UL@typenum}{0}
- \newcommand*{\UL@degree}{Ma\^itre en physioth\'erapie (M.~Pht.)}}
-\DeclareOption{MSc}{%
+\DeclareOption{MPsEd}{%
\UL@isthesisfalse
\renewcommand*{\UL@typenum}{0}
- \newcommand*{\UL@degree}{Ma\^itre \`es sciences (M.~Sc.)}}
+ \newcommand*{\UL@degree}{Ma\^itre en psycho\'education (M.~Ps.~\'ed.)}}
\DeclareOption{MScGeogr}{%
\UL@isthesisfalse
\renewcommand*{\UL@typenum}{0}
@@ -1650,10 +1372,18 @@
\UL@isthesisfalse
\renewcommand*{\UL@typenum}{0}
\newcommand*{\UL@degree}{Ma\^itre en service social (M.~Serv.~soc.)}}
-\DeclareOption{MPsEd}{%
+\DeclareOption{MTravSoc}{%
\UL@isthesisfalse
\renewcommand*{\UL@typenum}{0}
- \newcommand*{\UL@degree}{Ma\^itre en psycho\'education (M.~Ps.~\'ed.)}}
+ \newcommand*{\UL@degree}{Ma\^itre en travail social (M.~Trav.~soc.)}}
+\DeclareOption{MA}{%
+ \UL@isthesisfalse
+ \renewcommand*{\UL@typenum}{0}
+ \newcommand*{\UL@degree}{Ma\^itre \`es arts (M.A.)}}
+\DeclareOption{MSc}{%
+ \UL@isthesisfalse
+ \renewcommand*{\UL@typenum}{0}
+ \newcommand*{\UL@degree}{Ma\^itre \`es sciences (M.~Sc.)}}
\DeclareOption{multifacultaire}{%
\ifUL@isthesis
\renewcommand*{\UL@typenum}{1}
@@ -1761,7 +1491,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
-% \subsection{Chargement de la classe \class{memoir}}
+% \subsection{Chargement de la classe \texorpdfstring{\class{memoir}}{memoir}}
%
% Toutes les options de la classe sont passées à \class{memoir}. Le
% format de papier et la taille de police par défaut sont, dans
@@ -1787,51 +1517,50 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Paquetages requis}
-% \changes{5.0}{2018-06-10}{Le paquetage unicode-math n'est plus
-% chargé par défaut par la classe.}
-% \changes{5.0}{2018-08-11}{Le paquetage hyperref est désormais chargé
-% dans la classe plutôt que dans les gabarits. Requiert le paquetage
-% etoolbox.}
+% \changes{5.0}{2018-06-10}{Le paquetage \textbf{unicode-math} n'est
+% plus chargé par défaut par la classe.}
+% \changes{5.0}{2018-08-11}{Le paquetage \textbf{hyperref} est
+% désormais chargé dans la classe plutôt que dans les gabarits.
+% Requiert le paquetage etoolbox.}
%
% La classe s'efforce de charger un minimum de paquetages afin d'éviter
% les conflits potentiels.
%
-% {\XeLaTeX} requiert le paquetage \pkg{fontspec} pour le traitement
-% des polices. Sous {\LaTeX}, il est aujourd'hui préférable d'utiliser
-% les polices T1.
+% \changes{6.0}{2024-05-24}{Mise en œuvre: paquetage \textbf{inputenc} ^^A
+% désormais chargé avec l'option \texttt{utf8} lorsque la compilation
+% est effectuée par pdf{\LaTeX}.}
+% Le code source doit obligatoirement être enregistré dans le codage
+% UTF-8. Avec pdf{\LaTeX}, cela requiert le paquetage \pkg{inputenc}.
+%
+% \changes{6.0}{2024-05-24}{Mise en œuvre: paquetage
+% \textbf{microtype} désormais chargé par la classe avec
+% \textbf{fontspec} ou \textbf{fontenc}.}
+% \changes{6.0}{2024-05-24}{Mise en œuvre: option \texttt{Ligatures} ^^A
+% plus définie par défaut pour les polices OpenType.}
+% La classe charge également les paquetages minimalement nécessaires
+% pour la gestion des polices de caractères, soit \pkg{fontspec} avec
+% les moteurs modernes et \pkg{fontenc} avec pdf{\LaTeX}.
% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifxetex
+\iftutex
+ \RequirePackage[babel=true]{microtype}
\RequirePackage{fontspec}
- \defaultfontfeatures{Ligatures=TeX}
\else
+ \RequirePackage[babel=true]{microtype}
+ \RequirePackage[utf8]{inputenc}
\RequirePackage[T1]{fontenc}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% Les paquetages \pkg{natbib} et \pkg{chapterbib} doivent être chargés
-% avant \pkg{babel} pour bien fonctionner, le cas échéant. Tel que
-% précisé dans la documentation de \pkg{natbib}, l'option |sectionbib|
-% est passée à ce paquetage lorsqu'il est chargé, ou à
-% \pkg{chapterbib} autrement.
+% Le paquetage \pkg{natbib} doit être chargé avant \pkg{babel} pour
+% bien fonctionner, le cas échéant.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifUL@natbib
- \ifUL@sectionbib
- \PassOptionsToPackage{sectionbib}{natbib}
- \fi
\RequirePackage[round,semicolon,authoryear]{natbib}
\fi
-\ifUL@chapterbib
- \ifUL@sectionbib
- \ifUL@natbib\else
- \PassOptionsToPackage{sectionbib}{chapterbib}
- \fi
- \fi
- \RequirePackage{chapterbib}
-\fi
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Le support pour les langues autres que l'anglais est offert par le
-% paquetage \pkg{babel} --- à moins que l'option |nobabel| n'ait
+% paquetage \pkg{babel}~--- à moins que l'option |nobabel| n'ait
% été spécifiée au chargement de la classe. Les langues sont passées
% en option de la classe, et non du paquetage. Le paquetage
% \pkg{numprint} est requis par \pkg{babel} pour la définition
@@ -1844,14 +1573,16 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Le paquetage obligatoire \pkg{hyperref} est chargé en tout dernier
-% avec la commande \cmd{\AtEndPreamble} du paquetage \pkg{etoolbox}.
-% Si l'option |nohyperref| a été spécifiée, la classe vérifie que le
-% paquetage a été chargé. La configuration de base de la classe fait
-% en sorte que tous les liens sont signalés par la couleur
-% |ULlinkcolor| définie à la \autoref{sec:couleurs}.
+% avec la commande \cmd{\AtEndPreamble} du paquetage \pkg{etoolbox}
+% (chargé par \class{memoir}). Si l'option |nohyperref| a été
+% spécifiée, la classe vérifie que le paquetage a été chargé. La
+% configuration de base de la classe fait en sorte que tous les liens
+% sont signalés par la couleur |ULlinkcolor| définie à la
+% \autoref{sec:couleurs}.
+% \changes{6.0}{2024-06-17}{Mise en œuvre: chargement explicite de
+% \textbf{etoolbox} retiré, car le paquetage est chargé par memoir.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifUL@hyperref
- \RequirePackage{etoolbox}
\AtEndPreamble{\RequirePackage{hyperref}}
\else
\AtBeginDocument{%
@@ -1870,11 +1601,8 @@
\RequirePackage{xcolor}
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% La commande \cmd{\textcopyright} utilisée sur la page de titre requiert le
-% paquetage \pkg{textcomp} pour obtenir un beau signe de copyright.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\RequirePackage{textcomp}
-% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{6.0}{2024-06-17}{Mise en œuvre: paquetage \textbf{textcomp} ^^A
+% retiré, car non nécessaire.}
%
% \subsection{Paquetage incompatible}
%
@@ -1926,7 +1654,7 @@
% \subsection{Interligne}
%
% L'espacement entre les lignes est d'un interligne et demi.
-% L'espacement «double» entre les paragraphes est fixé à
+% L'espacement double entre les paragraphes est fixé à
% |0.5\baselineskip| afin d'en arriver à une disposition agréable à
% l'œil. Le retrait de première ligne est supprimé puisque plus
% nécessaire suite à l'ajout de l'espacement entre les paragraphes.
@@ -1968,11 +1696,15 @@
% utilisées dans la classe sont toutes quelques points inférieures à
% celles des gabarits Word.}%
% et les graisses présentées au \autoref{tab:polices}. La
-% déclaration |\fontencoding{T1}| est nécessaire avec {\XeLaTeX} pour
-% explicitement charger la même police que sous {\LaTeX}.
+% déclaration |\fontencoding{T1}| est nécessaire avec les moteurs
+% modernes pour explicitement charger la même police qu'avec
+% pdf{\LaTeX}.
%
% \begin{table}
% \centering
+% \caption{Tailles et graisses de la police Helvetica des éléments
+% de la page de titre}
+% \label{tab:polices}
% \begin{tabular}{ll}
% \toprule
% Élément & Police \\
@@ -1984,9 +1716,6 @@
% Autres éléments & 12~points normal \\
% \bottomrule
% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{Tailles et graisses de la police Helvetica des éléments
-% de la page de titre}
-% \label{tab:polices}
% \end{table}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -2435,22 +2164,30 @@
\setsecnumdepth{subsection}
%</class>
% \end{macrocode}
-% ^^A Fin du code de la classe
+% ^^A <<<<< Fin du code de la classe
%
-% ^^A Il faut placer ces notes de changement relatives aux gabarits
+% ^^A Les notes de versions relatives aux gabarits doivent se trouver
% ^^A avant \Finale
% \changes{5.0}{2018-06-08}{Gabarits: meilleure indication du texte à
-% remplacer.}
+% remplacer.}
% \changes{5.0}{2018-06-08}{Gabarits: bonification de la structure
-% d'un chapitre de thèse ou de mémoire par articles.}
+% d'un chapitre de thèse ou de mémoire par articles.}
% \changes{5.0}{2018-04-25}{Gabarits: ajout d'étiquettes et de renvois
-% dans les gabarits des parties du document.}
+% dans les gabarits des parties du document.}
% \changes{5.0}{2018-04-25}{Gabarits: automatisation de l'ajout
-% d'entrées dans la table des matières à l'aide d'étiquettes et de
-% renvois.}
+% d'entrées dans la table des matières à l'aide d'étiquettes et de
+% renvois.}
% \changes{4.4}{2017-05-16}{Gabarits: nouveau gabarit pour une thèse
-% par articles.}
+% par articles.}
% \changes{4.2}{2016-03-29}{Gabarits: nouvelles options de babel.}
+% \changes{6.0}{2024-05-22}{Gabarits: gabarits pour une thèse par
+% articles révisés suite aux changements aux règles de présentation.}
+% \changes{6.0}{2024-05-22}{Gabarits: meilleure sélection automatique
+% des paquetages pour les polices et pour le codage selon le moteur
+% {\TeX}.}
+% \changes{6.0}{2024-06-20}{Gabarits: seul l'exemple de changement
+% pour les polices STIX Two est maintenant fourni, et ce, dans une
+% version qui fonctionne avec les polices livrées avec TeX Live.}
%
% \Finale
%
@@ -2473,60 +2210,57 @@
%% description détaillée de la classe, de ce gabarit et des options
%% disponibles.
%%
+%% Vous devez obligatoirement enregistrer tout fichier contenant des
+%% caractères non-ASCII (comme des lettres accentuées) dans le codage
+%% de caractères UTF-8.
+%%
%% [Ne pas hésiter à supprimer les commentaires après les avoir lus.]
%%
%% Déclaration de la classe avec le type de grade
%<phd>%% [l'un de LLD, DMus, DPsy, DThP, PhD]
-%<m>%% [l'un de MATDR, MArch, MA, LLM, MErg, MMus, MPht, MSc, MScGeogr,
-%<m>%% MServSoc, MPsEd]
+%<m>%% [l'un de MATDR, MArch, LLM, MErg, MMus, MPsEd, MScGeogr,
+%<m>%% MServSoc, MTravSoc, MA, MSc]
%% et les langues les plus courantes. Le français sera la langue par
-%<!articles>%% défaut du document.
-%<articles>%% défaut du document. L'option 'bibsection' permet de créer des
-%<articles>%% bibliographies par chapitre présentées sous forme de section
-%<articles>%% numérotée.
-%<phd&standard>\documentclass[PhD,english,french]{ulthese}
-%<phd&articles>\documentclass[PhD,bibsection,english,french]{ulthese}
+%% défaut du document.
+%<phd&(standard|articles)>\documentclass[PhD,english,french]{ulthese}
%<phd&cotutelle>\documentclass[PhD,cotutelle,english,french]{ulthese}
-%<m&standard>\documentclass[MSc,english,french]{ulthese}
-%<m&articles>\documentclass[MSc,bibsection,english,french]{ulthese}
+%<m&(standard|articles)>\documentclass[MSc,english,french]{ulthese}
%<m&bidiplomation>\documentclass[MA,bidiplomation,english,french]{ulthese}
- %% Encodage utilisé pour les caractères accentués dans les fichiers
- %% source du document. Les gabarits sont encodés en UTF-8. Inutile
- %% avec XeLaTeX, qui gère Unicode nativement.
- \ifxetex\else \usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} \fi
-
%% Charger ici les autres paquetages nécessaires pour le document.
%% Quelques exemples; décommenter au besoin.
%\usepackage{amsmath} % recommandé pour les mathématiques
%\usepackage{icomma} % gestion de la virgule dans les nombres
- %% Utilisation d'une autre police de caractères pour le document.
- %% - Sous LaTeX
- %\usepackage{mathpazo} % texte et mathématiques en Palatino
- %\usepackage{mathptmx} % texte et mathématiques en Times
- %% - Sous XeLaTeX
- %\setmainfont{TeX Gyre Pagella} % texte en Pagella (Palatino)
- %\setmathfont{TeX Gyre Pagella Math} % mathématiques en Pagella (Palatino)
- %\setmainfont{TeX Gyre Termes} % texte en Termes (Times)
- %\setmathfont{TeX Gyre Termes Math} % mathématiques en Termes (Times)
+ %% Utilisation d'une autre police de caractères pour le document
+ %% (exemple pour les polices STIX Two incluses dans TeX Live).
+ %% - Avec pdfLaTeX
+ %\usepackage{stix2}
+ %% - Avec XeLaTeX
+ %\setmainfont{STIXTwoText}
+ %[
+ % Extension = .otf,
+ % UprightFont = *-Regular,
+ % BoldFont = *-SemiBold,
+ % ItalicFont = *-Italic,
+ % BoldItalicFont = *-SemiBoldItalic,
+ %]
+ %\setmathfont{STIXTwoMath-Regular}
+ %[
+ % Extension = .otf,
+ %]
%% Options de mise en forme du mode français de babel. Consulter la
- %% documentation du paquetage babel pour les options disponibles.
- %% Désactiver (effacer ou mettre en commentaire) si l'option
- %% 'nobabel' est spécifiée au chargement de la classe.
- \frenchbsetup{%
+ %% documentation du paquetage babel-french pour les options
+ %% disponibles. Désactiver (effacer ou mettre en commentaire) si
+ %% l'option 'nobabel' est spécifiée au chargement de la classe.
+ \frenchsetup{%
StandardItemizeEnv=true, % format standard des listes
ThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers=true, % espace fine dans les nombres
og=«, fg=» % caractères « et » sont les guillemets
}
-%<!articles> %% Style de la bibliographie.
-%<!articles> \bibliographystyle{}
-%<articles> %% Suppression du numéro de section de la bibliographie. Utilisation
-%<articles> %% de \extrasfrench parce que c'est la dernière langue déclarée dans
-%<articles> %% \documentclass, ci-dessus.
-%<articles> %\addto\extrasfrench{%
-%<articles> % \renewcommand{\bibsection}{\section*{\bibname}\prebibhook}}
+ %% Style de la bibliographie.
+ \bibliographystyle{}
%% Composition de la page frontispice. Remplacer les éléments entre < >.
%% Supprimer les caractères < >. Couper un long titre ou un long
@@ -2561,19 +2295,19 @@
\frontmatter % pages liminaires
-\frontispice % production de la page frontispice
+\frontispice % page frontispice (obligatoire)
-\include{resume} % résumé français
-\include{abstract} % résumé anglais
+\include{resume} % résumé français (obligatoire)
+\include{abstract} % résumé anglais (optionnel)
\cleardoublepage
-\tableofcontents % production de la TdM
+\tableofcontents % table des matières (obligatoire)
\cleardoublepage
-\listoftables % production de la liste des tableaux
+\listoftables % liste des tableaux
\cleardoublepage
-\listoffigures % production de la liste des figures
+\listoffigures % liste des figures
\cleardoublepage
\dedicace{<Dédicace si désiré>}
@@ -2583,7 +2317,8 @@
\cleardoublepage
\include{remerciements} % remerciements
-\include{avantpropos} % avant-propos
+%<!articles>\include{avantpropos} % avant-propos (optionnel)
+%<articles>\include{avantpropos} % avant-propos (obligatoire)
\mainmatter % corps du document
@@ -2598,8 +2333,7 @@
\include{annexe} % annexe A
-%<!articles>\bibliography{} % production de la bibliographie
-%<!articles>
+\bibliography{} % production de la bibliographie
\end{document}
%</gabarit>
%
@@ -2637,8 +2371,8 @@
\label{chap-avantpropos} % étiquette pour renvois
\phantomsection\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\nameref{chap-avantpropos}} % inclure dans TdM
-<Texte de l'avant-propos. Obligatoire dans une thèse ou un mémoire par
-articles.>
+<Texte de l'avant-propos. Obligatoire seulement pour une thèse ou un
+mémoire par intégration d'articles.>
%</avantpropos>
%
%<*introduction>
@@ -2669,8 +2403,6 @@ normal, sauf qu'elle n'est pas numérotée.>
%<articles>
<Texte du chapitre ou de l'article.>
%<articles>
-%<articles>\bibliographystyle{} % style de la bibliographie
-%<articles>\bibliography{} % production de la bibliographie
%</chapitre>
%
%<*conclusion>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/ulthese/ulthese.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/ulthese/ulthese.ins
index 7987a0f368c..59e03576625 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/ulthese/ulthese.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/ulthese/ulthese.ins
@@ -1,44 +1,34 @@
-%%
-%% Copyright (C) 2017 Universite Laval
-%%
-%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions
-%% of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c of this
-%% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version
-%% of this license is in:
-%%
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%%
-%% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2006/05/20 or later.
-%%
+%% Procédure d'installation de la classe ulthese.cls et des gabarits à
+%% partir de ulthese.dtx
\input docstrip.tex
\keepsilent
\askforoverwritefalse
+\nopostamble
\preamble
This is a generated file.
-Copyright (C) 2017 Universite Laval
+Copyright (C) 2012-2024 Universite Laval
This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions
of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c of this
license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version
of this license is in:
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+ https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
version 2006/05/20 or later.
This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Universite Laval
-<ulthese-dev@bibl.ulaval.ca>.
+The Current Maintainer of this work is Vincent Goulet for
+Universite Laval <ulthese-dev@bibl.ulaval.ca>.
-This work consists of the files ulthese.dtx and ulthese.ins and the
-derived files listed in the README.md file.
+This work consists of the files ulthese.dtx, ulthese.ins, and the
+derived files listed in the file README.md.
\endpreamble
@@ -83,17 +73,18 @@ derived files listed in the README.md file.
\obeyspaces
\Msg{*************************************************************}
\Msg{* *}
-\Msg{* La classe ulthese est maintenant prete a l'emploi. *}
+\Msg{* La classe ulthese est maintenant prête à l'emploi! *}
\Msg{* *}
-\Msg{* Utiliser un gabarit comme base pour votre fichier maitre. *}
-\Msg{* Vous pouvez effacer les gabarits inutiles. Composer le *}
-\Msg{* document dans des fichiers .tex distincts; quelques *}
-\Msg{* gabarits sont fournis avec la classe. *}
+\Msg{* Utilisez un des gabarits fournis avec la classe comme *}
+\Msg{* base pour votre fichier maitre. Vous pouvez effacer les *}
+\Msg{* gabarits inutiles. Composez le document dans des fichiers *}
+\Msg{* .tex distincts; quelques gabarits sont aussi fournis avec *}
+\Msg{* la classe. *}
\Msg{* *}
\Msg{* Pour produire la documentation de la classe, compiler le *}
-\Msg{* fichier ulthese.dtx avec LaTeX. *}
+\Msg{* fichier ulthese.dtx avec XeLaTeX. *}
\Msg{* *}
-\Msg{* Bonne redaction! *}
+\Msg{* Bonne rédaction! *}
\Msg{* *}
\Msg{*************************************************************}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/luatex/luamplib/luamplib.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/luatex/luamplib/luamplib.dtx
index edae80ada69..f40d1add132 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/luatex/luamplib/luamplib.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/luatex/luamplib/luamplib.dtx
@@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ See source file '\inFileName' for licencing and contact information.
%<*driver>
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
\ProvidesFile{luamplib.drv}%
- [2024/06/14 v2.32.2 Interface for using the mplib library]%
+ [2024/07/08 v2.33.0 Interface for using the mplib library]%
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\usepackage{metalogo,multicol,mdwlist,fancyvrb,xspace}
\usepackage[x11names]{xcolor}
@@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ See source file '\inFileName' for licencing and contact information.
% \author{Hans Hagen, Taco Hoekwater, Elie Roux, Philipp Gesang and Kim Dohyun\\
% Maintainer: LuaLaTeX Maintainers ---
% Support: \email{lualatex-dev@tug.org}}
-% \date{2024/06/14 v2.32.2}
+% \date{2024/07/08 v2.33.0}
%
% \maketitle
%
@@ -431,7 +431,7 @@ See source file '\inFileName' for licencing and contact information.
% |\mplibshowlog{disable}| will revert this functionality.
% This is a \TeX{} side interface for |luamplib.showlog|. (v2.20.8)
%
-% \paragraph{Settings regarding cache files}
+% \paragraph{About cache files}
% To support |btex ... etex| in external |.mp| files, \textsf{luamplib}
% inspects the content of each and every |.mp| input files and makes caches
% if nececcsary, before returning their paths to \LuaTeX's mplib library.
@@ -562,7 +562,8 @@ See source file '\inFileName' for licencing and contact information.
% \endmppattern % or \end{mppattern}
%
% \mpfig
-% fill fullcircle scaled 100 withpostscript "collect";
+% fill fullcircle scaled 100
+% withpostscript "collect" ;
% draw unitsquare shifted - center unitsquare scaled 45
% withpattern "mypatt"
% withpostscript "evenodd" ;
@@ -576,10 +577,10 @@ See source file '\inFileName' for licencing and contact information.
% |ystep| &\textit{number} & vertical spacing between pattern cells\\
% |xshift| &\textit{number} & horizontal shifting of pattern cells\\
% |yshift| &\textit{number} & vertical shifting of pattern cells\\
-% |matrix| &\textit{table} or \textit{string} & |xx|, |yx|, |xy|, |yy| values\kern1pt* or MP transformation code\\
+% |matrix| &\textit{table} or \textit{string} & |xx|, |yx|, |xy|, |yy| values\kern1pt* or MP transform code\\
% |bbox| &\textit{table} or \textit{string} & |llx|, |lly|, |urx|, |ury| values\kern1pt*\\
% |resources|&\textit{string} & PDF resources if needed\\
-% |colored| &\textit{boolean}& |false| for uncolored pattern. default: |true|\\\hline
+% |colored| or |coloured| &\textit{boolean}& |false| for uncolored pattern. default: |true|\\\hline
% & & \small *\,in string type, numbers are separated by spaces\\
% \end{tabular}
% \end{center}
@@ -597,39 +598,111 @@ See source file '\inFileName' for licencing and contact information.
% However, as luamplib automatically includes the resources of the current page, this option
% is not needed in most cases.
%
-% Option |colored=false| will generate an uncolored pattern which shall have no color at all.
+% Option |colored=false| (|coloured| is a synonym of |colored|) will generate an uncolored pattern which shall have no color at all.
% Uncolored pattern will be painted later by the color of a metapost object.
% An example:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \begin{mppattern}{pattuncolored}
% [
% colored = false,
-% matrix = "rotated 30",
+% matrix = "slanted .3 rotated 30",
% ]
% \tiny\TeX
% \end{mppattern}
%
% \begin{mplibcode}
% beginfig(1)
-% picture tex; tex := mpliboutlinetext.p ("\bfseries \TeX");
-% i:=0;
-% for item within tex:
-% i:=i+1;
-% if i < length tex:
-% fill pathpart item scaled 10
-% withpostscript "collect";
-% else:
+% picture tex;
+% tex = mpliboutlinetext.p ("\bfseries \TeX");
+% for i=1 upto mpliboutlinenum:
+% j:=0;
+% for item within mpliboutlinepic[i]:
+% j:=j+1;
% draw pathpart item scaled 10
-% withpattern "pattuncolored"
-% withpen pencircle scaled 0.5
-% withcolor 0.7 blue % paints the pattern
-% ;
-% fi
+% if j < length mpliboutlinepic[i]:
+% withpostscript "collect"
+% else:
+% withpattern "pattuncolored"
+% withpen pencircle scaled 1/2
+% withcolor (i/4)[red,blue] % paints the pattern
+% fi;
+% endfor
% endfor
% endfig;
% \end{mplibcode}
% \end{verbatim}
%
+% \paragraph{\texttt{withfademethod} and related macros}
+% |withfademethod| is a metapost operator which makes the color of an object gradiently transparent.
+% The syntax is \textit{<path>}\texttt{\char"7C}\textit{<picture>} |withfademethod| \textit{<string>},
+% the latter being either |"linear"| or |"circular"|.
+% Though it is similar to the |withshademethod| provided by metafun,
+% the differences are: (1) the operand of |withfademethod| can be a picture as well as a path;
+% (2) you cannot make gradient colors, but can only make gradient opacity.
+%
+% Related macros to control optional values are:
+% \begin{description}
+% \item [|withfadeopacity (|\textit{\mdseries number, number}|)|]
+% sets the starting opacity and the ending opacity, default value being |(1,0)|.
+% `|1|' denotes full color; `|0|' full transparency.
+% \item [|withfadevector (|\textit{\mdseries pair, pair}|)|]
+% sets the starting and ending points. Default value in the linear mode is
+% |(llcorner p, lrcorner p)|, where |p| is the operand,
+% meaning that fading starts from the left edge and ends at the right edge.
+% Default value in the circular mode is |(center p, center p)|, which means
+% centers of both starting and ending circles are the center of the bounding box.
+% \item [|withfadecenter|] is a synonym of |withfadevector|.
+% \item [|withfaderadius (|\textit{\mdseries number, number}|)|]
+% sets the radii of starting and ending circles. This is no-op in the linear mode.
+% Default value is |(0, abs(center p - urcorner p))|, meaning that fading starts from the
+% center and ends at the four corners of the bounding box.
+% \item [|withfadebbox (|\textit{\mdseries pair, pair}|)|]
+% sets the bounding box of the fading area, default value being |(llcorner p, urcorner p)|.
+% Though this option is not needed in most cases, there could be cases when users want to
+% explicitly control the bounding box.
+% \end{description}
+% An example:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \mpfig
+% picture mill;
+% mill = btex \includegraphics[width=100bp]{mill} etex;
+% draw mill
+% withfademethod "circular"
+% withfadecenter (center mill, center mill)
+% withfaderadius (20, 50)
+% withfadeopacity (1, 0)
+% ;
+% \endmpfig
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \paragraph{Lua table \texttt{luamplib.instances}}
+% Users can access the Lua table containing mplib instances, |luamplib.instances|,
+% through which metapost variables are also easily accessible
+% as documented in Lua\TeX{} manual \textsection\,11.2.8.4 (|texdoc luatex|).
+% The following will print |false|, |3.0|, |MetaPost| and
+% the points and the cyclicity of the path |unitsquare|, consecutively.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \begin{mplibcode}[instance1]
+% boolean b; b = 1 > 2;
+% numeric n; n = 3;
+% string s; s = "MetaPost";
+% path p; p = unitsquare;
+% \end{mplibcode}
+%
+% \directlua{
+% local instance1 = luamplib.instances.instance1
+% print( instance1:get_boolean"b" )
+% print( instance1:get_number"n" )
+% print( instance1:get_string"s" )
+% local t = instance1:get_path"p"
+% for k,v in pairs(t) do
+% print(k, type(v)=='table' and table.concat(v,' ') or v)
+% end
+% }
+% \end{verbatim}
+% In this way, it would not be difficult to define a paragraph shape
+% (using \cs{parshape} \TeX\ primitive) which follows an arbitrary metapost path.
+%
% \paragraph{About figure box metrics}
% Notice that, after each figure is processed, macro \cs{MPwidth} stores
% the width value of latest figure; \cs{MPheight}, the height value.
@@ -662,8 +735,8 @@ See source file '\inFileName' for licencing and contact information.
luatexbase.provides_module {
name = "luamplib",
- version = "2.32.2",
- date = "2024/06/14",
+ version = "2.33.0",
+ date = "2024/07/08",
description = "Lua package to typeset Metapost with LuaTeX's MPLib.",
}
@@ -725,6 +798,7 @@ luamplib.showlog = luamplib.showlog or false
% \begin{macrocode}
local tableconcat = table.concat
local tableinsert = table.insert
+local tableunpack = table.unpack
local texsprint = tex.sprint
local texgettoks = tex.gettoks
local texgetbox = tex.getbox
@@ -1004,6 +1078,7 @@ end
% \begin{macrocode}
luamplib.codeinherit = false
local mplibinstances = {}
+luamplib.instances = mplibinstances
local has_instancename = false
local function reporterror (result, prevlog)
@@ -1047,6 +1122,12 @@ local function reporterror (result, prevlog)
end
end
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% |lualibs-os.lua| installs a randomseed. When this file is not loaded,
+% we should explicitly seed a unique interger to get random randomseed for each run.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+if not math.initialseed then math.randomseed(currenttime) end
local function luamplibload (name)
local mpx = mplib.new {
ini_version = true,
@@ -1200,8 +1281,7 @@ local function process_tex_text (str)
else
local boxid = texboxes.globalid + 1
texboxes.globalid = boxid
- run_tex_code(format(
- [[\expandafter\newbox\csname luamplib.box.%s\endcsname]], boxid))
+ run_tex_code(format([[\expandafter\newbox\csname luamplib.box.%s\endcsname]], boxid))
tex_box_id = tex.getcount'allocationnumber'
end
run_tex_code(format("%s\\setbox%i\\hbox{%s}", global, tex_box_id, str))
@@ -1408,7 +1488,7 @@ function luamplib.runscript (code)
return buffer
end
buffer = {}
- mpprint(buffer, table.unpack(res))
+ mpprint(buffer, tableunpack(res))
return tableconcat(buffer)
end
return ""
@@ -1542,27 +1622,48 @@ luamplib.shadecolor = function (str)
% \end{mplibcode}
% \end{document}
% \end{verbatim}
+% another one: user-defined DeviceN colorspace
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \DocumentMetadata{ }
+% \documentclass{article}
+% \usepackage{luamplib}
+% \mplibsetformat{metafun}
+% \ExplSyntaxOn
+% \color_model_new:nnn { pantone1215 }
+% { Separation }
+% { name = PANTONE~1215~U ,
+% alternative-model = cmyk ,
+% alternative-values = {0, 0.15, 0.51, 0}
+% }
+% \color_model_new:nnn { pantone+black }
+% { DeviceN }
+% {
+% names = {pantone1215,black}
+% }
+% \color_set:nnn{purepantone}{pantone+black}{1,0}
+% \color_set:nnn{pureblack} {pantone+black}{0,1}
+% \ExplSyntaxOff
+% \begin{document}
+% \mpfig
+% fill unitsquare xscaled \mpdim{\textwidth} yscaled 30
+% withshademethod "linear"
+% withshadecolors ("purepantone","pureblack")
+% ;
+% \endmpfig
+% \end{document}
+% \end{verbatim}
% \begin{macrocode}
run_tex_code({
[[\color_export:nnN{]], str, [[}{backend}\mplib_@tempa]],
},ccexplat)
- local name = get_macro'mplib_@tempa':match'{(.-)}{.+}'
+ local name, value = get_macro'mplib_@tempa':match'{(.-)}{(.-)}'
local t, obj = res:explode()
if pdfmode then
- obj = t[1]:match"^/(.+)"
- if ltx.pdf and ltx.pdf.object_id then
- obj = format("%s 0 R", ltx.pdf.object_id(obj))
- else
- run_tex_code({
- [[\edef\mplib_@tempa{\pdf_object_ref:n{]], obj, "}}",
- },ccexplat)
- obj = get_macro'mplib_@tempa'
- end
+ obj = format("%s 0 R", ltx.pdf.object_id( t[1]:sub(2,-1) ))
else
obj = t[2]
end
- local value = t[3]:match"%[(.-)%]" or t[3]
- return format('(%s) withprescript"mplib_spotcolor=%s:%s"', value,obj,name)
+ return format('(1) withprescript"mplib_spotcolor=%s:%s:%s"', value,obj,name)
end
return colorsplit(res)
end
@@ -1868,7 +1969,7 @@ function luamplib.glyph (f, c)
if not gid then return mperr"cannot get GID (glyph id)" end
local fac = 1000 / (shapedata.units or 1000)
local t = shapedata.glyphs[gid].segments
- if not t then return "image(fill fullcircle scaled 0;)" end
+ if not t then return "image()" end
for i,v in ipairs(t) do
if type(v) == "table" then
for ii,vv in ipairs(v) do
@@ -2122,7 +2223,7 @@ function luamplib.outlinetext (text)
local id = tonumber(fmt:match"mplibtexboxid=(%d+):")
local box = texgetbox(id)
local res = outline_horz({ }, box, box.head, 0, 0)
- if #res == 0 then res = { "mpliboutlinepic[1]:=image(fill fullcircle scaled 0;);" } end
+ if #res == 0 then res = { "mpliboutlinepic[1]:=image();" } end
return tableconcat(res) .. format("mpliboutlinenum:=%i;", #res)
end
@@ -2327,6 +2428,39 @@ vardef mplibtransformmatrix (text e) =
& decimal ypart t & ","
& "}");
enddef;
+primarydef p withfademethod s =
+ p withprescript "mplibfadetype=" & s
+ withprescript "mplibfadebbox=" &
+ decimal xpart llcorner p & ":" &
+ decimal ypart llcorner p & ":" &
+ decimal xpart urcorner p & ":" &
+ decimal ypart urcorner p
+enddef;
+def withfadeopacity (expr a,b) =
+ withprescript "mplibfadeopacity=" &
+ decimal a & ":" &
+ decimal b
+enddef;
+def withfadevector (expr a,b) =
+ withprescript "mplibfadevector=" &
+ decimal xpart a & ":" &
+ decimal ypart a & ":" &
+ decimal xpart b & ":" &
+ decimal ypart b
+enddef;
+let withfadecenter = withfadevector;
+def withfaderadius (expr a,b) =
+ withprescript "mplibfaderadius=" &
+ decimal a & ":" &
+ decimal b
+enddef;
+def withfadebbox (expr a,b) =
+ withprescript "mplibfadebbox=" &
+ decimal xpart a & ":" &
+ decimal ypart a & ":" &
+ decimal xpart b & ":" &
+ decimal ypart b
+enddef;
]],
legacyverbatimtex = [[
def specialVerbatimTeX (text t) = runscript("luamplibprefig{"&t&"}") enddef;
@@ -2680,31 +2814,42 @@ pdfetcs.pgfextgs = "pgf@sys@addpdfresource@extgs@plain"
pdfetcs.pgfpattern = "pgf@sys@addpdfresource@patterns@plain"
pdfetcs.pgfcolorspace = "pgf@sys@addpdfresource@colorspaces@plain"
-local function update_pdfobjs (os)
- local on = pdfobjs[os]
+local function update_pdfobjs (os, stream)
+ local key = os
+ if stream then key = key..stream end
+ local on = pdfobjs[key]
if on then
return on,false
end
if pdfmode then
- on = pdf.immediateobj(os)
+ if stream then
+ on = pdf.immediateobj("stream",stream,os)
+ else
+ on = pdf.immediateobj(os)
+ end
else
on = pdfetcs.cnt or 1
- texsprint(format("\\special{pdf:obj @mplibpdfobj%s %s}",on,os))
+ if stream then
+ texsprint(format("\\special{pdf:stream @mplibpdfobj%s (%s) <<%s>>}",on,stream,os))
+ else
+ texsprint(format("\\special{pdf:obj @mplibpdfobj%s %s}",on,os))
+ end
pdfetcs.cnt = on + 1
end
- pdfobjs[os] = on
+ pdfobjs[key] = on
return on,true
end
if pdfmode then
pdfetcs.getpageres = pdf.getpageresources or function() return pdf.pageresources end
- pdfetcs.setpageres = pdf.setpageresources or function(s) pdf.pageresources = s end
- pdfetcs.initialize_resources = function (name)
+ local getpageres = pdfetcs.getpageres
+ local setpageres = pdf.setpageresources or function(s) pdf.pageresources = s end
+ local initialize_resources = function (name)
local tabname = format("%s_res",name)
pdfetcs[tabname] = { }
if luatexbase.callbacktypes.finish_pdffile then -- ltluatex
local obj = pdf.reserveobj()
- pdfetcs.setpageres(format("%s/%s %i 0 R", pdfetcs.getpageres() or "", name, obj))
+ setpageres(format("%s/%s %i 0 R", getpageres() or "", name, obj))
luatexbase.add_to_callback("finish_pdffile", function()
pdf.immediateobj(obj, format("<<%s>>", tableconcat(pdfetcs[tabname])))
end,
@@ -2712,21 +2857,29 @@ if pdfmode then
end
end
pdfetcs.fallback_update_resources = function (name, res)
+ local tabname = format("%s_res",name)
+ if not pdfetcs[tabname] then
+ initialize_resources(name)
+ end
if luatexbase.callbacktypes.finish_pdffile then
- local t = pdfetcs[format("%s_res",name)]
+ local t = pdfetcs[tabname]
t[#t+1] = res
else
- local tpr, n = pdfetcs.getpageres() or "", 0
+ local tpr, n = getpageres() or "", 0
tpr, n = tpr:gsub(format("/%s<<",name), "%1"..res)
if n == 0 then
tpr = format("%s/%s<<%s>>", tpr, name, res)
end
- pdfetcs.setpageres(tpr)
+ setpageres(tpr)
end
end
else
- texsprint("\\special{pdf:obj @MPlibTr<<>>}","\\special{pdf:obj @MPlibSh<<>>}",
- "\\special{pdf:obj @MPlibCS<<>>}","\\special{pdf:obj @MPlibPt<<>>}")
+ texsprint {
+ "\\special{pdf:obj @MPlibTr<<>>}",
+ "\\special{pdf:obj @MPlibSh<<>>}",
+ "\\special{pdf:obj @MPlibCS<<>>}",
+ "\\special{pdf:obj @MPlibPt<<>>}",
+ }
end
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -2740,57 +2893,56 @@ local transparancy_modes = { [0] = "Normal",
"Hue", "Saturation", "Color", "Luminosity",
"Compatible",
}
-
-local function update_tr_res(mode,opaq)
- local os = format("<</BM /%s/ca %.3f/CA %.3f/AIS false>>",mode,opaq,opaq)
- local on, new = update_pdfobjs(os)
- if not new then return on end
+local function add_extgs_resources (on, new)
local key = format("MPlibTr%s", on)
- local val = format(pdfmode and "%s 0 R" or "@mplibpdfobj%s", on)
- if pdfmanagement then
- texsprint(ccexplat,
- format("\\pdfmanagement_add:nnn{Page/Resources/ExtGState}{%s}{%s}", key, val))
- else
- local tr = format("/%s %s", key, val)
- if is_defined(pdfetcs.pgfextgs) then
- texsprint(format("\\csname %s\\endcsname{%s}", pdfetcs.pgfextgs,tr))
- elseif pdfmode then
- if is_defined"TRP@list" then
- texsprint(catat11,{
- [[\if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{]],
- [[\string\g@addto@macro\string\TRP@list{]],
- tr,
- [[}}\fi]],
- })
- if not get_macro"TRP@list":find(tr) then
- texsprint(catat11,[[\global\TRP@reruntrue]])
+ if new then
+ local val = format(pdfmode and "%s 0 R" or "@mplibpdfobj%s", on)
+ if pdfmanagement then
+ texsprint {
+ "\\csname pdfmanagement_add:nnn\\endcsname{Page/Resources/ExtGState}{", key, "}{", val, "}"
+ }
+ else
+ local tr = format("/%s %s", key, val)
+ if is_defined(pdfetcs.pgfextgs) then
+ texsprint { "\\csname ", pdfetcs.pgfextgs, "\\endcsname{", tr, "}" }
+ elseif pdfmode then
+ if is_defined"TRP@list" then
+ texsprint(catat11,{
+ [[\if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{]],
+ [[\string\g@addto@macro\string\TRP@list{]],
+ tr,
+ [[}}\fi]],
+ })
+ if not get_macro"TRP@list":find(tr) then
+ texsprint(catat11,[[\global\TRP@reruntrue]])
+ end
+ else
+ pdfetcs.fallback_update_resources("ExtGState", tr)
end
else
- if not pdfetcs.ExtGState_res then
- pdfetcs.initialize_resources"ExtGState"
- end
- pdfetcs.fallback_update_resources("ExtGState", tr)
+ texsprint { "\\special{pdf:put @MPlibTr<<", tr, ">>}" }
end
- else
- texsprint(format("\\special{pdf:put @MPlibTr<<%s>>}",tr))
- texsprint"\\special{pdf:put @resources<</ExtGState @MPlibTr>>}"
end
end
- return on
+ if not pdfmode and not pdfmanagement and not is_defined(pdfetcs.pgfextgs) then
+ texsprint"\\special{pdf:put @resources <</ExtGState @MPlibTr>>}"
+ end
+ return key
end
-
local function do_preobj_TR(object,prescript)
if object.postscript == "collect" then return end
local opaq = prescript and prescript.tr_transparency
- local tron_no
+ local on
if opaq then
local mode = prescript.tr_alternative or 1
mode = transparancy_modes[tonumber(mode)]
- tron_no = update_tr_res(mode, opaq)
+ local os, new = format("<</BM /%s/ca %.3f/CA %.3f/AIS false>>",mode,opaq,opaq)
+ on, new = update_pdfobjs(os)
+ local key = add_extgs_resources(on,new)
start_pdf_code()
- pdf_literalcode("/MPlibTr%i gs",tron_no)
+ pdf_literalcode("/%s gs",key)
end
- return tron_no
+ return on
end
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -2829,24 +2981,25 @@ local function sh_pdfpageresources(shtype,domain,colorspace,ca,cb,coordinates,st
"/Extend [true true]/AntiAlias true>>",
}
local on, new = update_pdfobjs(os)
- if not new then return on end
- local key = format("MPlibSh%s", on)
- local val = format(pdfmode and "%s 0 R" or "@mplibpdfobj%s", on)
- if pdfmanagement then
- texsprint(ccexplat,
- format("\\pdfmanagement_add:nnn{Page/Resources/Shading}{%s}{%s}", key, val))
- else
- local res = format("/%s %s", key, val)
- if pdfmode then
- if not pdfetcs.Shading_res then
- pdfetcs.initialize_resources"Shading"
- end
- pdfetcs.fallback_update_resources("Shading", res)
+ if new then
+ local key = format("MPlibSh%s", on)
+ local val = format(pdfmode and "%s 0 R" or "@mplibpdfobj%s", on)
+ if pdfmanagement then
+ texsprint {
+ "\\csname pdfmanagement_add:nnn\\endcsname{Page/Resources/Shading}{", key, "}{", val, "}"
+ }
else
- texsprint(format("\\special{pdf:put @MPlibSh<<%s>>}", res))
- texsprint"\\special{pdf:put @resources<</Shading @MPlibSh>>}"
+ local res = format("/%s %s", key, val)
+ if pdfmode then
+ pdfetcs.fallback_update_resources("Shading", res)
+ else
+ texsprint { "\\special{pdf:put @MPlibSh<<", res, ">>}" }
+ end
end
end
+ if not pdfmode and not pdfmanagement then
+ texsprint"\\special{pdf:put @resources <</Shading @MPlibSh>>}"
+ end
return on
end
@@ -2927,15 +3080,14 @@ local function do_preobj_SH(object,prescript)
local script = object.prescript:explode"\13+"
for i=#script,1,-1 do
if script[i]:find"mplib_spotcolor" then
- local name, value
- objref, name = script[i]:match"=(.-):(.+)"
- value = script[i+1]:match"=(.+)"
+ local t, name, value = script[i]:explode"="[2]:explode":"
+ value, objref, name = t[1], t[2], t[3]
if not names[name] then
pos = pos+1
names[name] = pos
names[#names+1] = name
end
- local t = { }
+ t = { }
for j=1,names[name] do t[#t+1] = 0 end
t[#t+1] = value
tableinsert(#ca == #cb and ca or cb, t)
@@ -2995,7 +3147,8 @@ end
%
% Patterns
% \begin{macrocode}
-patterns = { }
+pdfetcs.patterns = { }
+local patterns = pdfetcs.patterns
function luamplib.registerpattern ( boxid, name, opts )
local box = texgetbox(boxid)
local wd = format("%.3f",box.width/factor)
@@ -3003,7 +3156,12 @@ function luamplib.registerpattern ( boxid, name, opts )
info("w/h/d of '%s': %s %s 0.0", name, wd, hd)
if opts.xstep == 0 then opts.xstep = nil end
if opts.ystep == 0 then opts.ystep = nil end
- if opts.colored == nil then opts.colored = true end
+ if opts.colored == nil then
+ opts.colored = opts.coloured
+ if opts.colored == nil then
+ opts.colored = true
+ end
+ end
if type(opts.matrix) == "table" then opts.matrix = tableconcat(opts.matrix," ") end
if type(opts.bbox) == "table" then opts.bbox = tableconcat(opts.bbox," ") end
if opts.matrix and opts.matrix:find"%a" then
@@ -3029,7 +3187,7 @@ function luamplib.registerpattern ( boxid, name, opts )
for _,v in ipairs{"ExtGState","ColorSpace","Shading"} do
local pp = get_macro(format("g__pdfdict_/g__pdf_Core/Page/Resources/%s_prop",v))
if pp and pp:find"__prop_pair" then
- t[#t+1] = format("/%s %s", v, ltx.__pdf.object["__pdf/Page/Resources/"..v])
+ t[#t+1] = format("/%s %s 0 R", v, ltx.pdf.object_id("__pdf/Page/Resources/"..v))
end
end
else
@@ -3055,17 +3213,24 @@ function luamplib.registerpattern ( boxid, name, opts )
local optres, t = opts.resources or "", { }
if pdfmanagement then
for _,v in ipairs{"ExtGState","ColorSpace","Shading"} do
- run_tex_code(format(
- [[\mplibtmptoks\expanded{{/%s \pdf_object_ref:n{__pdf/Page/Resources/%s}}}]],v,v),ccexplat)
- t[#t+1] = texgettoks'mplibtmptoks'
+ local pp = get_macro(format("g__pdfdict_/g__pdf_Core/Page/Resources/%s_prop",v))
+ if pp and pp:find"__prop_pair" then
+ run_tex_code {
+ "\\mplibtmptoks\\expanded{{",
+ format("/%s \\csname pdf_object_ref:n\\endcsname{__pdf/Page/Resources/%s}",v,v),
+ "}}",
+ }
+ t[#t+1] = texgettoks'mplibtmptoks'
+ end
end
elseif is_defined(pdfetcs.pgfextgs) then
- run_tex_code("\\mplibtmptoks\\expanded{{\z
- \\ifpgf@sys@pdf@extgs@exists /ExtGState @pgfextgs\\fi\z
- \\ifpgf@sys@pdf@colorspaces@exists /ColorSpace @pgfcolorspaces\\fi}}",catat11)
+ run_tex_code ({
+ "\\mplibtmptoks\\expanded{{",
+ "\\ifpgf@sys@pdf@extgs@exists /ExtGState @pgfextgs\\fi",
+ "\\ifpgf@sys@pdf@colorspaces@exists /ColorSpace @pgfcolorspaces\\fi",
+ "}}",
+ }, catat11)
t[#t+1] = texgettoks'mplibtmptoks'
- else
- t[#t+1] = "/ExtGState @MPlibTr/Shading @MPlibSh/ColorSpace @MPlibCS"
end
optres = optres .. tableconcat(t)
texsprint {
@@ -3089,22 +3254,23 @@ local function pattern_colorspace (cs)
local key = format("MPlibCS%i",on)
local val = pdfmode and format("%i 0 R",on) or format("@mplibpdfobj%i",on)
if pdfmanagement then
- texsprint(ccexplat,format("\\pdfmanagement_add:nnn{Page/Resources/ColorSpace}{%s}{%s}",key,val))
+ texsprint {
+ "\\csname pdfmanagement_add:nnn\\endcsname{Page/Resources/ColorSpace}{", key, "}{", val, "}"
+ }
else
local res = format("/%s %s", key, val)
if is_defined(pdfetcs.pgfcolorspace) then
- texsprint(format("\\csname %s\\endcsname{%s}", pdfetcs.pgfcolorspace, res))
+ texsprint { "\\csname ", pdfetcs.pgfcolorspace, "\\endcsname{", res, "}" }
elseif pdfmode then
- if not pdfetcs.ColorSpace_res then
- pdfetcs.initialize_resources"ColorSpace"
- end
pdfetcs.fallback_update_resources("ColorSpace", res)
else
- texsprint(format("\\special{pdf:put @MPlibCS<<%s>>}", res))
- texsprint"\\special{pdf:put @resources<</ColorSpace @MPlibCS>>}"
+ texsprint { "\\special{pdf:put @MPlibCS<<", res, ">>}" }
end
end
end
+ if not pdfmode and not pdfmanagement and not is_defined(pdfetcs.pgfcolorspace) then
+ texsprint"\\special{pdf:put @resources <</ColorSpace @MPlibCS>>}"
+ end
return on
end
local function do_preobj_PAT(object, prescript)
@@ -3139,29 +3305,115 @@ local function do_preobj_PAT(object, prescript)
end
pdf_literalcode("/MPlibCS%i cs %s /%s scn", pattern_colorspace(cs), color, key)
end
- if patt.done then return end
- local val = pdfmode and format("%s 0 R",index) or patterns[index]
- if pdfmanagement then
- texsprint(ccexplat, format("\\pdfmanagement_add:nnn{Page/Resources/Pattern}{%s}{%s}",key,val))
- else
- local res = format("/%s %s", key, val)
- if is_defined(pdfetcs.pgfpattern) then
- texsprint(format("\\csname %s\\endcsname{%s}", pdfetcs.pgfpattern, res))
- elseif pdfmode then
- if not pdfetcs.Pattern_res then
- pdfetcs.initialize_resources"Pattern"
- end
- pdfetcs.fallback_update_resources("Pattern", res)
+ if not patt.done then
+ local val = pdfmode and format("%s 0 R",index) or patterns[index]
+ if pdfmanagement then
+ texsprint {
+ "\\csname pdfmanagement_add:nnn\\endcsname{Page/Resources/Pattern}{", key, "}{", val, "}"
+ }
else
- texsprint(format("\\special{pdf:put @MPlibPt<<%s>>}", res))
- texsprint"\\special{pdf:put @resources<</Pattern @MPlibPt>>}"
+ local res = format("/%s %s", key, val)
+ if is_defined(pdfetcs.pgfpattern) then
+ texsprint { "\\csname ", pdfetcs.pgfpattern, "\\endcsname{", res, "}" }
+ elseif pdfmode then
+ pdfetcs.fallback_update_resources("Pattern", res)
+ else
+ texsprint { "\\special{pdf:put @MPlibPt<<", res, ">>}" }
+ end
end
end
+ if not pdfmode and not pdfmanagement and not is_defined(pdfetcs.pgfpattern) then
+ texsprint"\\special{pdf:put @resources <</Pattern @MPlibPt>>}"
+ end
patt.done = true
end
% \end{macrocode}
%
+% Fading
+% \begin{macrocode}
+local function do_preobj_FADE (object, prescript)
+ if object.postscript == "collect" then return end
+ local fd_type = prescript and prescript.mplibfadetype
+ if not fd_type then return end
+ local dx, dy = 0, 0
+ local bbox = prescript.mplibfadebbox:explode":"
+ if tonumber(bbox[1]) < 0 then
+ dx = -bbox[1]
+ bbox[1], bbox[3] = 0, bbox[3] + dx
+ end
+ if tonumber(bbox[2]) < 0 then
+ dy = -bbox[2]
+ bbox[2], bbox[4] = 0, bbox[4] + dy
+ end
+ local vec, coords = prescript.mplibfadevector, { }
+ if vec then
+ vec = vec:explode":"
+ for i=1,4 do
+ coords[#coords+1] = vec[i] + (i % 2 == 0 and dy or dx)
+ end
+ end
+ if fd_type == "linear" then
+ if not vec then
+ coords = { bbox[1], bbox[2], bbox[3], bbox[2] } -- left to right
+ end
+ coords = format("%f %f %f %f", tableunpack(coords))
+ elseif fd_type == "circular" then
+ local width, height = bbox[3]-bbox[1], bbox[4]-bbox[2]
+ if not vec then
+ coords = { width/2, height/2, width/2, height/2 } -- center for both circle
+ end
+ local radius = prescript.mplibfaderadius or format("0:%f",math.sqrt(width^2+height^2)/2);
+ radius = radius:explode":"
+ tableinsert(coords, 3, radius[1])
+ tableinsert(coords, radius[2])
+ coords = format("%f %f %f %f %f %f", tableunpack(coords))
+ else
+ err("unknown fading method '%s'", fd_type)
+ end
+ fd_type = fd_type == "linear" and 2 or 3
+ bbox = format("%f %f %f %f", tableunpack(bbox))
+ local opaq = (prescript.mplibfadeopacity or "1:0"):explode":"
+ local ca, cb = {{ opaq[1] }}, {{ opaq[2] }}
+ local on, os, new
+ on = sh_pdfpageresources(fd_type, "0 1", "/DeviceGray", ca, cb, coords, 1)
+ if pdfmode then
+ os = format("<</PatternType 2/Shading %s 0 R>>", on)
+ else
+ os = format("<</PatternType 2/Shading @mplibpdfobj%s>>", on)
+ end
+ on = update_pdfobjs(os)
+ local streamtext = format("q /Pattern cs/MPlibFd%s scn %s re f Q", on, bbox)
+ if pdfmode then
+ os = format("<</Pattern<</MPlibFd%s %s 0 R>>>>", on, on)
+ else
+ os = format("<</Pattern<</MPlibFd%s @mplibpdfobj%s>>>>", on, on)
+ end
+ on = update_pdfobjs(os)
+ local resources = "/Resources "..format(pdfmode and "%s 0 R" or "@mplibpdfobj%s", on)
+ on = update_pdfobjs"<</S/Transparency/CS/DeviceGray>>"
+ local attr = tableconcat{
+ "/Subtype/Form",
+ format("/BBox[%s]", bbox),
+ format("/Matrix[1 0 0 1 %f %f]", -dx, -dy),
+ resources,
+ "/Group ", format(pdfmode and "%s 0 R" or "@mplibpdfobj%s", on),
+ }
+ on = update_pdfobjs(attr, streamtext)
+ os = tableconcat {
+ "<</SMask<</S/Luminosity/G ",
+ format(pdfmode and "%s 0 R" or "@mplibpdfobj%s", on),
+ ">>>>",
+ }
+ on, new = update_pdfobjs(os)
+ local key = add_extgs_resources(on,new)
+ start_pdf_code()
+ pdf_literalcode("/%s gs", key)
+ return on
+end
+
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
% Finally, flush figures by inserting PDF literals.
% \begin{macrocode}
function luamplib.flush (result,flusher)
@@ -3203,13 +3455,14 @@ function luamplib.flush (result,flusher)
local object = objects[o]
local objecttype = object.type
% \end{macrocode}
-% The following 6 lines are part of |btex...etex| patch.
+% The following 7 lines are part of |btex...etex| patch.
% Again, colors are processed at this stage.
% \begin{macrocode}
local prescript = object.prescript
prescript = prescript and script2table(prescript) -- prescript is now a table
local cr_over = do_preobj_CR(object,prescript) -- color
local tr_opaq = do_preobj_TR(object,prescript) -- opacity
+ local fading_ = do_preobj_FADE(object,prescript) -- fading
if prescript and prescript.mplibtexboxid then
put_tex_boxes(object,prescript)
elseif objecttype == "start_bounds" or objecttype == "stop_bounds" then --skip
@@ -3387,6 +3640,9 @@ function luamplib.flush (result,flusher)
end
end
end
+ if fading_ then -- fading
+ stop_pdf_code()
+ end
if tr_opaq then -- opacity
stop_pdf_code()
end
@@ -3450,7 +3706,7 @@ end
\else
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
\ProvidesPackage{luamplib}
- [2024/06/14 v2.32.2 mplib package for LuaTeX]
+ [2024/07/08 v2.33.0 mplib package for LuaTeX]
\ifx\newluafunction\@undefined
\input ltluatex
\fi